The URL can be used to link to this page

Report (2) Project Manual for Bonaventure of i ar 15000 SW Hall Blvd Tigard, OR 97224 Bonaventure Senior Housing James Clarkson, Architect, 3425 Boone Road SE Salem, Oregon 97317 Phone 503.373.3165 Fax 503.480.3157 Project Number 1403 tC31p WEA_C0(`5"`7 City of Tigard A. • oved Plans By AVie. Date f 6 7--zt(--- Ao) JAMES CtA ON OFFICE COPY Or SA OREGON L - c.{( .6130 �;�. PROJECT Bonaventure of Tigard Senior Living Assisted,Independent and Memory Care Tigard, Oregon 97224 OWNER/DEVELOPER Bonaventure Senior Housing 3425 Boone Road SE Salem, OR 97317 Phone: (503) 373-3153 Fax: (503) 588-3531 Contact: Ben Settecase ARCHITECT Bonaventure Senior Housing James Clarkson,Architect, 3425 Boone Road SE Salem, OR 97317 Phone: (503) 589-6182 Fax: (503) 588-3531 Contact: Jim Clarkson GENERAL CONTRACTOR Bonaventure Construction 3425 Boone Road SE Salem, OR 97317 Phone: (503) 373-3159 Fax: (503)480-3131 Contact: John Bosse Date: July 11, 2014 Architect's Project Number: 1403 m:\drafting\projects\1403 tigard\specifications\word100000 title page.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 00000 p1 of 2 CIVIL ENGINEER KITCHEN DESIGN CIVIL ENGINEERING/Landscaping CESNW,'Inc Bargreen Ellingson, Inc. 13190 SW 68th Parkway, Suite 150 3232 NW Industrial St. Tigard, OR 97223 Portland, OR 97210 PH(503)968-6655 Phone: (503)227-1161 Contact: Tony Weller Fax: (503) 727-3104 tweller @ cesnw.com Proj. Consult.: Jeremy Edmondson STRUCTURAL DESIGN Dan Green, Engineering Inc, 3232 Triangle Drive SE Salem, OR 97302 Phone: (503)391-2309 Fax: (503) 566-8860 Contact: Dan Green MECHANICAL DESIGN Jet Industries 1935 Silverton Rd Salem, OR 97301 Phone: (503) 363-2334 Fax: (503) 798-4526 Contact: Oliver Raab, Jeff Stauffer PLUMBING DESIGN Jet Industries 1935 Silverton Rd Salem, OR 97301 Phone: (503) 363-2334 Fax: (503) 798-4526 Contact: Oliver Raab,Jeff Stauffer ELECTRICAL DESIGN Jet Industries 1935 Silverton Rd Salem, OR 97301 Phone: (503)363-2334 Fax: (503) 798-4526 Contact: Oliver Raab,Jeff Stauffer m:\drafting\projects\1403 tigard\specifications\word\00000 title page.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 00000 p2 of 2 TOC-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS This Project Manual has been organized under the format of the Construction Specifications Institute(CSI). Section numbers are listed merely for identification, and they may not be consecutive. The Contractor shall check the contents of this Manual against the Table of Contents to assure that this volume is complete. PROCUREMENT AND GENERAL INFORMATION Bidding Requirements- Refer To Bonaventure Construction Instructions 00320 Geotechnical Data 00700 General Conditions DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01110 Summary of Work 01115 Designated Design-Build Requirements 01295 Applications for Payment 01310 Project Coordination 01315 Project Meetings 01320 Progress Schedules 01330 Shop Drawings,Product Data,& Samples 01420 Reference Specifications& Standards 01450 Contractor's Quality Control Program 01453 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Construction Facilities 01565 Project Security 01600 Materials& Equipment 01630 Product Substitutions 01730 Cutting&Patching 01740 Cleaning &Trash Removal 01750 Equipment& Systems Start Up 01770 Contract Closeout 01780 Warranties&Bonds 01820 Project Record Documents 01830 Operating&Maintenance Data DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02230 Site Clearing 02300 Earthwork 02315 Utility Trenching m:\drafting\projects11403 tigard\specifications\word\00001 toc.doc 3/7/2014 Tiagrd 7-11-14 01110 p1 of 5 02770 Concrete Drives, Walks, Gutters,&Curbs 02820 Vinyl Coated Chain Link Fencing 02900 Landscaping DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 03510 Self-leveling Underlayment DIVISION 4 -MASONRY 04100 Masonry Mortars& Grouts 04200 Unit Masonry 04700 Adhered Stone DIVISION 5-METALS 05100 Structural Steel 05500 Miscellaneous Fabricated Steel DIVISION 6-WOOD &PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06174 Plywood Web Joists 06176 Plate-Connected Wood Trusses 06180 Glue Laminated Structural Units 06220 Finish Carpentry 06310 Wood Preservative Treatment 06410 Custom-built Casework& Shelving 06415 Field-applied Plastic Laminate Covering 06600 Plastic Sanitary(FRP)Wall Panels DIVISION 7-THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07130 Waterproofing 07180 Transparent Water Repellent 07200 Thermal Insulation 07310 Composition Shingle Roofing 07462 Fiber Cement Siding&Paneling 07530 Single-ply Roofing 07620 Sheetmetal Flashing&Trim m:\drafting\projects11403 tigard\specifications\word\00001 toc.doc 3/7/2014 Tiagrd 7-11-14 01110 p2 of 5 07840 Firestopping 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8-DOORS&WINDOWS 08110 Hollow Steel Doors&Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08300 Access Panels and Hatches 08460 Automatic Operating Doors 08560 Vinyl Windows 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 09310 Ceramic&Quarry Tile 09500 Acoustic Treatment 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting&Finishing DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10190 Cubicle Curtains 10260 Wall Corner Guards 10305 Manufactured Metal Fireplaces 10350 Flagpole 10500 Lockers 10800 Residential Units Toilet& Bath Accessories 10810 Public Toilet Room Accessories 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 11110 Laundry Equipment 11400 Commercial Kitchen Equipment 11452 Appliances 11700 Bather Equipment m:\drafting\projects\1403 tigard\specifications\word\00001 toc.doc 3/7/2014 Tiagrd 7-11-14 01110 p3 of 5 DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 12510 Window Blinds DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION None included DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14200 Elevators DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15060 Pipes and Pipe Fittings 15100 Valves 15140 Supports and Anchors 15170 Motors 15190 Mechanical Identification 15240 Mechanical Equipment Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control 15250 Insulation 15330 Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems 15420 Plumbing Piping Systems 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15450 Plumbing Equipment 15620 Fuel-Fired Heaters 15630 Electric Heaters 15650 Refrigeration - Air Conditioning 15770 Air-to-Air Heat Pumps .15780 Packaged Air Conditioning Units 15860 Fans 15889 Kitchen Hood System 15890 Ductwork 15895 Adjustable Frequency Drive 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15940 Air Outlets and Inlets 15950 Controls 15990 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements m:\drafting\projects11403 tigard\specifications\word\00001 toc.doc 3/7/2014 Tiagrd 7-11-14 01110 p4 of 5 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16109 Equipment Connections 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires, Connectors and Cables 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16400 Service and Distribution 16450 Grounding 16475 Overcurrent Protection 16500 Lighting 16620 Diesel Generator 16915 Lighting Control Relay Panel 16700 Basic Low-Voltage Materials 16720 Fire Alarm System 16740 Telecom Cabling 16750 CATV Cabling 16760 Emergency Call System 16770 PA System 16780 Access Control System 16790 Theater Equipment END OF TABLE m:\drafting\projects\1403 tigard\specifications\word\00001 toc.doc 3/7/2014 Tiagrd 7-11-14 01110 p5 of 5 SECTION 00320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUB-SURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A Geotechnical Report,prepared for this Project, is available for review and reference: Report Title& Date: Geotechnical Site Investigation Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard, Oregon(no report number provided) June 20, 2013 Geotechnical Engineer: Columbia West Address: 11917 NE 95th St Vancouver,WA Telephone Number: (360) 823-2900 B. Report can be reviewed at the Geotechnical Engineer's Office and Bonaventure's Corporate Office 1.2 OWNER'S DISCLAIMER A. The Report is not part of the Contract Documents. It is made available for information only. B. The Owner does not guarantee Report Information accuracy at locations and times other than those given. Groundwater elevations,particularly, are subject to change. C. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conclusions the Contractor may draw from this Report. The Contractor may employ its own consultants to analyze this information and/or conduct additional tests and examinations. D. The Owner specifically disclaims responsibility for interpretations by any Bidder of information included within the Report. 1.3 DIFFERENT CONDITIONS A. If, during construction,conditions are encountered which differ substantially from those indicated in the Report,promptly so notify the Architect in writing, and do not disturb such conditions until directed. B. The Architect will promptly request the Owner to instruct the Geotechnical Engineer to investigate such conditions. C. If the Geotechnical Engineer determines that conditions do differ substantially from those that reasonably could be anticipated from examination of the Site and the Report,and that such conditions will necessitate a change in the Work and/or an adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time, the Owner will authorize a Change Order, as stipulated in the General Conditions,to enable the necessary changes and/or adjustments. END OF SECTION MASTER 00320 geotech report.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 00320 pl of 1 ■ Gectechnickt s Environtiler tat s Sp:.a :$, . .., i Columbia West=c f,; Geotechnical Site Investigation Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard, Oregon June 20, 2013 • "Sl ....f.-.::F: Y•".. cx `.1a. i '".4.._,,..L.��i:`1M. '" : x•• ,..F'' : iI'�'=�' •::,fl Vi!:i:'{k"� _ .� . .. 1141 Ix; ...d. - I - l ,r1..%?-c,-,,-.' 41 '; a ¢ 8,-;.0140:', ..:,... . F y t -' ws.Ri. !:: . 'l3,111 Sly .. j "x} e : Sx:s.• r:: �yy?� +,gypp.!;�•'. ........, �-'�,. -:E • •'� n.�%",. _. -. ,.:.1. i;q•"..�:.,,".:..::......... . ,w,r..; .•'ls..^ . :ysl ' te' ; x:.� .7w. '9'; ,..-��,,.,."�.. �� i '.'c?N...i:'t'+!4 1: °E': • 1 1917 NE 95'Street Vancouver,Washington 98682 '%'-'14.4.I.1.4 . phone:360-823-2900,fax 360-823-2901 2901 y �_ • F 1 '� www.columbiawestengineering.com F y AM IV,, • Se hal l a Environmental • Special Inspections L. Columbia WO$trr Engineering , I n c GEOTECHNICAL SITE INVESTIGATION BONAVENTURE SENIOR LVING TIGARD, OREGON Prepared For: Bonaventure Senior Housing Mr. Robert Underwood 3220 State St. Suite 200 Salem, Oregon 97301 Site Location: 8325 SW Ross Rd Tigard, Oregon 97224 Prepared By: Columbia West Engineering, Inc. 11917 NE 95th Street Vancouver, Washington 98682 Phone: 360-823-2900 Fax: 360-823-2901 Date Prepared: June 20, 2013 Geotechnical • Environmental • Special Inspections 11917 NE 95'Street Vancouver,Washington 98682 • Phone: 360-823-2900,Fax 360-823-2901 www columbia westenglneering.corn TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES ii LIST OF APPENDICES iii 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 General Site Information 1 1.2 Proposed Development 1 2.0 REGIONAL GEOLOGY AND SOIL CONDITIONS 1 3.0 REGIONAL SEISMOLOGY 2 4.0 GEOTECHNICAL AND GEOLOGIC FIELD INVESTIGATION 3 4.1 Surface Investigation and Site Description 4 4.2 Subsurface Exploration and Investigation 4 4.2.1 Soil Type Description 4 4.2.2 Groundwater 5 5.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 5 5.1 Site Preparation and Grading 5 5.2 Engineered Structural Fill 6 5.3 Cut and Fill Slopes 7 5.4 Foundations 7 5.5 Slabs on Grade 8 5.6 Settlement 9 5.7 Excavation 9 5.8 Lateral Earth Pressure 9 5.9 Seismic Design Considerations 10 5.10 Liquefaction 11 5.11 Drainage 12 5.12 Bituminous Asphalt and Portland Cement Concrete 12 5.13 Wet Weather Construction Methods and Techniques 13 5.14 Soil Erosion Potential 14 5.15 Utility Installation 15 6.0 CONCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS 15 REFERENCES FIGURES APPENDICES Ciaotecttnkat•t?nviranmentM.SpeciaE Inapmci+ans Columbia West° — n tt l a ° a ct i n cJ a n c' II onaventwe Tigard Project(BSH)lGeotechnicaNteporfl13116,Bonaventure Senior Livirg.Tigard,Oregon Geotechn■cal Repod.docx rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page ii Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon LIST OF FIGURES Number Title 1 Site Location Map 2 Test Pit Location Map 3 Typical Cut and Fill Slope Cross-Section 4 Minimum Foundation Slope Setback Detail 5 Typical Perimeter Footing Drain Detail 6 Typical Perforated Drain Pipe Trench Detail GarstecRnee�ri.6ttvirdrse»�nidt:Bpeciaf In&poetdriets Columbia West »venture Tigard Project(BSH)1GeotechnicahReport\13116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page iii Bona venture Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon LIST OF APPENDICES Number Title A Analytical Laboratory Test Reports B Subsurface Exploration Logs C Soil Classification Information D Report Limitations and Important Information aatechnicai.Envirenatantal. Spacial Inspections Columbia West FP E { - i ;} L maventure Tigard Project(8SHilGeotechnicaltReport113118,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 GEOTECHNICAL SITE INVESTIGATION BONAVENTURE SENIOR LIVING TIGARD, OREGON 1.0 INTRODUCTION Columbia West Engineering, Inc. was retained by Bonaventure Senior Housing to conduct a geotechnical site investigation for the proposed Bonaventure Senior Living center located at 8325 SW Ross Rd in Tigard, Oregon. The purpose of the investigation was to observe and assess subsurface soil conditions at specific locations and provide geotechnical engineering analyses, planning, and design recommendations. The specific scope of services was outlined in a proposal contract dated May 15, 2013. This report summarizes the investigation and provides field assessment documentation and laboratory analytical test reports. This report is subject to the limitations expressed in Section 6.0, Conclusion and Limitations, and Appendix D. 1.1 General Site Information As indicated on Figures 1 and 2, the subject site is located at 8325 SW Ross Rd in Tigard, Oregon. The site is comprised of tax parcel W250644 totaling approximately 5.85 acres. The subject site is bounded by residential properties. The regulatory jurisdictional agency is the City of Tigard, Oregon. The approximate latitude and longitude are N 45° 24' 40" and W 122° 45' 45", and the legal description is a portion of the NW 1/4 of Section 12, T2S, R1W, Willamette Meridian. 1.2 Proposed Development Review of preliminary site plans produced by Bonaventure Senior Housing indicates that the proposed development will include construction of a 3-story independent living center, a 3-story assisted living center, a 4-story common area, a trash enclosure area, a single-story memory care courtyard, and associated drive and parking areas. Columbia West understands that minor cut and fill areas will be proposed. This report is based upon proposed development as described above and may not be applicable if modified. 2.0 REGIONAL GEOLOGY AND SOIL CONDITIONS The subject site lies within the Willamette Valley/Puget Sound Lowland, a wide physiographic depression flanked by the mountainous Coast Range on the west and the Cascade Range on the east. Inclined or uplifted structural zones within the Willamette Valley/Puget Sound Lowland constitute highland areas and depressed structural zones form sediment-filled basins. The site is located within the central portion of the Portland/Vancouver Basin, an open, somewhat elliptical, northwest- trending syncline approximately 60 miles wide. Geoteohnlcat•Environmental•Special€napectiona Columbia West- , p ' n e e r € n g , Z L onaverdure Tigard Project(8SH)1GeotechnicaliReport\13116,Bonaventure Senior Living.Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 2 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon According to the Generalized Geologic Map of the Willamette Lowland (Marshall W. Gannett and Rodney R. Caldwell, U.S. Department of the Interior, U.S. Geological Survey, 1998), near-surface soils are expected to consist of silt, sand, and gravel deposited primarily by late Pleistocene glacial outburst floods derived from catastrophic outburst floods of Glacial Lake Missoula (Qs). The Web Soil Survey (United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service [USDA NRCS], 2013 Website) identifies surface soils as Quatama loam. Quatama series soils are fine-textured silts and clays with moderate permeability, moderate water capacity, and low shear strength. Quatama soils have low to moderate shrink-swell potential and slight erosion hazard based primarily upon slope grade. 3.0 REGIONAL SEISMOLOGY Recent research and subsurface mapping investigations within the Pacific Northwest appear to suggest the historic potential risk for a large earthquake event with strong localized ground movement may be underestimated. Past earthquakes in the Pacific Northwest appear to have caused landslides and ground subsidence, in addition to severe flooding near coastal areas. Earthquakes may also induce soil liquefaction, which occurs when elevated horizontal ground acceleration and velocity cause soil particles to interact as a fluid as opposed to a solid. Liquefaction of soil can result in lateral spreading and temporary loss of bearing capacity and shear strength. There are at least four major known fault zones in the region that may be capable of generating potentially destructive horizontal accelerations. These fault zones are described briefly in the following text. Portland Hills Fault Zone The Portland Hills Fault Zone consists of several northwest-trending faults located along the eastern boundary of the Portland Hills. The fault zone is approximately 13 miles in length and is located approximately 6 miles north of the site. According to Seismic Design Mapping, State of Oregon (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995), there is no definitive consensus among geologists as to the zone fault type. Several alternate interpretations have been suggested, including various strike-slip and dipping thrust fault theories. Evidence exists to suggest that fault movement has impacted shallow Holocene deposits and deeper Pleistocene sediments. Seismologists recorded a M3.9 earthquake thought to be associated with the fault zone near Kelly Point Park in April 2003, and a M3.5 earthquake possibly associated with the fault zone occurred approximately 1.3 miles east of the fault in 1991. Therefore, the Portland Hills Fault Zone is generally thought to be potentially active and capable of producing possible damaging earthquakes. Geotechnical.Environmental•Special incpectlgnc Columbia West- _. rneventure Tigard Project(BSHj\Geotechnical\Report113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 3 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon Gales Creek-Newberg-Mt. Angel Fault Zone Located approximately 9 miles southwest of the site, the 50-mile long Gales Creek- Newberg-Mt. Angel Structural Zone consists of a series of discontinuous northwest- trending faults. Possible late-Quaternary geomorphic surface deformation may exist along the structural zone (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). Although no definitive evidence of impacts to Holocene sediments has reportedly been observed, a M5.6 earthquake occurred in March 1993 near Scotts Mills, approximately four miles south of the mapped extent of the Mt. Angel fault. It is unclear if the earthquake occurred along the fault zone or a parallel structure. Therefore, the Gales Creek-Newberg-Mt. Angel Structural Zone is considered potentially active. Lacamas Creek-Sandy River Fault Zone The northwest-trending Lacamas Creek Fault and northeast-trending Sandy River Fault intersect north of Camas, Washington approximately 20 miles northeast of the site. According to Geology and Groundwater Conditions of Clark County Washington (USGS Water Supply Paper 1600, Mundorff, 1964) and the Geologic Map of the Lake Oswego Quadrangle (Oregon DOGAMI Series GMS-59, 1989), the Lacamas Creek fault zone consists of shear contact between the Troutdale Formation and underlying Oligocene andesite-basalt bedrock. Secondary shear contact associated with the fault zone may have produced a series of prominent northwest-southeast geomorphic lineaments in proximity to the site. Recorded mild seismic activity during the recent past indicates this area may be potentially seismogenic. Cascadia Subduction Zone The Cascadia Subduction Zone has recently been recognized as a potential source of strong earthquake activity in the PortlandNancouver Basin. This phenomenon is the result of the earth's large tectonic plate movement. Geologic evidence indicates that volcanic ocean floor activity along the Juan de Fuca ridge in the Pacific Ocean causes the Juan de Fuca Plate to perpetually move east and subduct under the North American Continental Plate. The subduction zone results in historic volcanic and potential earthquake activity in proximity to the plate interface, believed to lie approximately 20 to 50 miles west of the general location of the Oregon and Washington coast (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). 4M GEOTECHNICAL AND GEOLOGIC FIELD INVESTIGATION A geotechnical field investigation consisting of visual reconnaissance and 5 soil boring explorations (SB-1 through SB-5) was conducted at the site on June 10, 2013. Subsurface soil profiles were logged in accordance with Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) specifications. Disturbed soil samples were collected from relevant soil horizons within the explorations and submitted for laboratory analysis. Sample results are presented in Appendix A. Exploration locations are indicated on Figure 2. Exploration logs are presented in Appendix B. Soil descriptions and classification information are provided in Appendix C. Geo�hn€cal•Sovitenmentai s Special Inspections Columbia West Fr maventore Tigard Project(BSH)\Geotechnical1Report113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docn. rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 4 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon 4.1 Surface Investigation and Site Description The 5.85-acre subject site lies on an open, relatively flat field, vegetated with tall grass, shrubs, and trees. The site has historically been utilized as a farm. Current development and structures at the site consist primarily of a residential home which includes a swimming pool area, two barns, an outbuilding, associated paved drive areas, and a soil stockpile located at the approximate northern central portion of the site as indicated on Figure 2. According to elevation data obtained from topographic maps and Google Earth, the site elevation ranges from 204 to 208 feet above mean sea level (amsl) across the property. 4.2 Subsurface Exploration and Investigation Soil boring explorations SB-1 through SB-5 were advanced at the site to a maximum depth of 51.5 feet using a truck-mounted, mud-rotary and hollow-stem auger drill system on June 10, 2013. Exploration locations were selected to observe subsurface soil characteristics in proposed development areas. Approximate exploration locations are indicated on Figure 2. 4.2.1 Soil Type Description Soil boring exploration indicated that the site is covered with approximately 12 inches of organic-rich topsoil. Underlying the topsoil, surficial soils resembling the Quatama loam soil series were encountered. Subsurface lithology was reasonably consistent at all explored locations and may generally be described by soil types identified in the following text. Soil Type 1 — Sandy SILT and Sandy Lean CLAY Soil Type 1 was observed to consist primarily of heavily mottled, orange, gray, and light brown, medium stiff, very moist, Sandy SILT and Sandy Lean CLAY. Soil Type 1 was observed below the topsoil in soil boring explorations SB-1 through SB-3, and SB-5, and interlayered at various depths between Soil Types 2 and 3. Analytical laboratory testing conducted upon representative soil samples obtained from soil borings SB-1 and SB-2 indicated approximately 51 to 66 percent by weight passing the No. 200 sieve and in situ moisture contents ranging from 26 to 35 percent. Atterberg Limit test results indicated a liquid limit ranging from 31 to 37 percent and a plasticity index ranging from 6 to 15. Soil Type 1 is classified as CL and ML according to USCS specifications and A-6(8), A-4(1), and A-4(4), according to AASHTO specifications. Soil Type 2— Silty SAND Soil Type 2 was observed to consist of brown to gray, wet, loose to dense silty SAND with interlayered lenses of poorly graded SAND. Soil Type 2 was observed underlying Soil Type 1 in soil boring explorations SB-1 through SB-3, and SB-5, underlying the topsoil at SB-4, and interlayered at various depths between Soil Types 1 and 3. Geoteclrnkat a Environmantal s Spacial Inapaction Cot n ib-a Wes t- E ,naventure Tigard Project(BSH)1GeotecMricatlReportll 3116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 5 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon Analytical laboratory testing conducted upon representative soil samples obtained from soil boring SB-1 indicated approximately 36 percent by weight passing the No. 200 sieve and in situ moisture content of 30 percent. Atterberg Limit test results indicated that Soil Type 2 is non-plastic. Soil Type 2 is classified as SM or SP according to USCS specifications and A-4(0) according to AASHTO specifications. Soil Type 3— Lean CLAY with Sand Soil Type 3 was observed to consist primarily of heavily mottled, brown, blue, orange, gray, medium stiff to very stiff, very moist, Lean CLAY with Sand. Soil Type 3 was was observed underlying Soil Type 2 in soil boring explorations SB-1 through SB-3, and SB-5, and interlayered at various depths between Soil Types 1 and 2. Analytical laboratory testing conducted upon representative soil samples obtained from soil borings SB-1 through SB-3 indicated approximately 71 to 76 percent by weight passing the No. 200 sieve and in situ moisture contents ranging from 26 to 29 percent. Atterberg Limit test results indicated a liquid limit ranging from 27 to 48 percent and a plasticity index ranging from 6 to 27. Soil Type 3 is classified as CL or CL-ML according to USCS specifications and A-4(3), A-7-6(15), and A-7-6(18), according to AASHTO specifications. 4.2.2 Groundwater Light perched groundwater seepage was encountered in all subsurface explorations at an approximate depth of 10 feet bgs. Measurements from inside the boreholes at soil borings SB-3 through SB-5 indicated that seepage was occurring from a sandy layer underlain by a less permeable sandy CLAY layer. According to Estimated Depth to Groundwater in the Portland Oregon Area, 2013 Website (USGS, Oregon Water Science Center), the shallow static aquifer altitude in the vicinity of the site is approximately 161 to 164 feet amsl corresponding to an approximate depth to groundwater at the site of 40 to 45 feet depending upon ground surface elevation. Groundwater levels are often subject to seasonal variance and may rise during extended periods of increased precipitation. Perched groundwater may also be present in other localized areas. 5.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS The geotechnical site investigation suggests the proposed development is generally compatible with surface and subsurface soils, provided the recommendations presented in this report are utilized and incorporated into the design and construction processes. Design recommendations are presented in the following text sections. 5.1 Site Preparation and Grading Vegetation should be cleared and topsoil stripped from areas identified for structures and site grading. Vegetation, other organic material, and debris should be removed from the site. Stripped topsoil should also be removed, or used only as landscape fill in nonstructural areas with slopes less than 25 percent. A stripping depth of Geotechntcoi.Environments!s Special Inspections Columbia West rnaventure Tigard Project(BSMtGtechnicanRepor013116,Bonaventure Senior LMng.Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report does. rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 6 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon approximately 12 inches is anticipated. The required stripping depth will increase in areas with unsuitable fill, remnant building foundations and drive areas, or previously disturbed soils. Stripped material should be stockpiled prior to removal or placed in a separate designated location away from other material. The post-construction maximum depth of topsoil or landscape fill placed or spread at any location onsite should not exceed one foot. Previously disturbed soil, debris, remnant building debris, soil stockpiles, or unsuitable fill encountered during grading or construction activities should be removed completely and thoroughly. This includes test pit locations conducted as part of this investigation. Demolished structures should be removed entirely. This includes old foundations, the swimming pool at the existing residence, utilities, and associated unconsolidated soils. Abandoned septic systems, including tanks and drain fields, should be removed completely. Excavation areas should be backfilled with engineered structural fill. Wells should be properly abandoned and filled with bentonite, cement grout, or other suitable means in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations. Additional geotechnical assessment is recommended if structures are proposed in proximity to abandoned wells. Site grading activities should be performed in accordance with requirements specified in the 2009 International Building Code (IBC), Chapter 18 and Appendix J, with exceptions noted in the text herein. Site preparation, soil stripping, and grading activities should be observed and documented by an experienced geotechnical engineer or designated representative. 5.2 Engineered Structural Fill Areas proposed for fill placement should be appropriately prepared as described in the preceding text. Surface soils should then be scarified and compacted prior to additional fill placement. Engineered structural fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 inches in depth and compacted using standard conventional compaction equipment. The soil moisture content should be within two percentage points of optimum conditions. A field density at least equal to 95 percent of the maximum dry density, obtained from the modified Proctor moisture-density relationship test (ASTM D1557), is recommended for structural fill placement. For engineered structural fill placed on sloped grades, the area should be benched to provide a horizontal surface for compaction. Compaction of engineered structural fill should be verified by nuclear gauge field compaction testing performed in accordance with ASTM D6938. Field compaction testing should be performed for each vertical foot of engineered fill placed. Engineered fill placement should be observed by an experienced geotechnical engineer or designated representative. Engineered structural fill placement activities should be performed during dry summer months if possible. If fill placement occurs during dry weather conditions, clean native Geateehnicai r EnVNGrtnIo,tal.Spoolal Inspection* Columbia West Fp tnaventure Tigard Project(BSH)1GeotechnicaIReport113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.doco, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 7 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon soils may be suitable for use as structural fill if adequately moisture-conditioned to achieve recommended compaction specifications. Because they are moisture- sensitive, fine-textured soils are often difficult to excavate and compact during wet weather conditions. If adequate compaction is not achievable with clean native soils, import structural fill consisting of well-graded granular material with a maximum particle size of three inches and no more than five percent passing the No. 200 sieve is recommended. Representative samples of proposed engineered structural fill should be submitted for laboratory analysis and approval by the geotechnical engineer prior to placement. Laboratory analyses should include particle-size gradation and modified Proctor moisture-density analysis. 5.3 Cut and Fill Slopes Fill placed on existing grades steeper than 5H:1V should be horizontally benched at least 10 feet into the slope. Fill slopes greater than six feet in height should be vertically keyed into existing subsurface soil. A typical fill slope cross-section is shown in Figure 3. Drainage implementations, including subdrains or perforated drain pipe trenches, may also be necessary in proximity to cut and fill slopes if seeps or springs are encountered. Drainage design may be performed on a case-by-case basis. Extent, depth, and location of drainage may be determined in the field by the geotechnical engineer during construction when soil conditions are exposed. Failure to provide adequate drainage may result in soil sloughing, settlement, or erosion. Final cut or fill slopes at the site should not exceed 2H:1V or 15 feet in total height without individual slope stability analysis. The values above assume a minimum horizontal setback for loads of 10 feet from top of cut or fill slope face or overall slope height divided by three (H/3), whichever is greater. A minimum slope setback detail for structures is presented in Figure 4. Concentrated drainage or water flow over the face of slopes should be prohibited, and adequate protection against erosion is required. Fill slopes should be constructed by placing fill material in maximum 12-inch level lifts, compacting as described in Section 5.2, Engineered Structural Fill and horizontally benching where appropriate. Fill slopes should be overbuilt, compacted, and trimmed at least two feet horizontally to provide adequate compaction of the outer slope face. Proper cut and fill slope construction is critical to overall project stability and should be observed by an experienced geotechnical engineer. 5.4 Foundations Foundation recommendations will ultimately depend upon the size and locations of structures proposed in the final development plan. It is our understanding that proposed buildings will likely consist of slab-on-grade, 3 to 4-story, wood-frame buildings. Maximum anticipated loads are approximately 5 to 6 kips per foot for perimeter footings and 85 to 95 kips per column. If actual loading exceeds anticipated Geotechnical• Environmental•Special inapactiar+a Columbia West mavenaure Tigard Project(13Sti)tGeoteclnicallReport113116.Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigenl,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx. rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 8 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon loading, additional analysis should be conducted for the specific load conditions and proposed footing dimensions. The existing ground surface should be prepared as described in Section 5.1, Site Preparation and Grading, and Section 5.2, Engineered Structural Fill. Foundations should bear upon a 12-inch-thick layer of crushed aggregate base compacted to 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density placed on firm competent native soil or engineered structural fill. Disturbed or soft surface soils should be removed from foundation alignments and replaced with granular structural fill. Footings should extend to a depth at least 24 inches below lowest adjacent exterior grade to provide adequate bearing capacity and protection against frost heave. If foundations are constructed during wet weather conditions, over-excavation and additional granular structural backfill is recommended. Excavations adjacent to foundations should not extend within a 1.5H:1V angle projected down from the outside bottom footing edge without additional geotechnical analysis. To evaluate bearing capacity for proposed structures, serviceability and reliability of shear resistance for subsurface soils was considered. Allowable bearing capacity is typically a function of footing dimension and subsurface soil properties, including settlement and shear resistance. Based upon in-situ field testing and laboratory analysis, the estimated allowable bearing capacity for well-drained foundations prepared as described above is 1,500 psf. Bearing capacity may be increased by one- third for transient lateral forces such as seismic or wind. The modulus of subgrade reaction is estimated to be 200 psi/inch. The estimated coefficient of friction between firm native soil or engineered structural fill and in-place poured concrete is 0.42. Lateral forces may also be resisted by an assumed passive soil equivalent fluid pressure of 250 psf/f against embedded footings. The upper six inches of soil should be neglected in passive pressure calculations. Foundations should not be permitted to bear upon disturbed soil. Because soil is often heterogeneous and anisotropic, the geotechnical engineer of record or designated representative shall observe, test, and approve foundation subgrade soils prior to placing crushed aggregate base rock, forms, or reinforcing bar. 5.5 Slabs on Grade The proposed buildings may have slab-on-grade flooring. Slabs may be supported on competent native soils or engineered structural fill. If encountered, disturbed soils, organic-rich topsoil, or undocumented fill in the proposed slab locations should be removed and replaced with structural fill. Preparation and compaction beneath the slab should be performed in accordance with the recommendations presented in Section 5.1, Site Preparation and Grading, and Section 5.2, Engineered Structural Fill. Slabs should be underlain by at least six inches of free-draining crushed aggregate. Geotextile filter fabric may be used below the crushed aggregate to increase subgrade support. A moisture barrier may be constructed beneath the slab. A typical moisture Geotechnical a Environmental a Special tnap ctiont #,,, Columbia West- °-' " ,naventure Tigard Project(BSH)\Geotechnical\Report513116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 9 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon barrier consists of 6 mil visqueen plastic overlain with two inches of fine sand constructed over the crushed aggregate subgrade. Alternative moisture barriers may be specified by a licensed, experienced structural engineer or architect. Slabs should be appropriately waterproofed in accordance with the anticipated type of finished flooring. Slab thickness and reinforcement should be designed by an experienced structural engineer. 5.6 Settlement Total long-term static footing displacement for shallow foundations constructed as described in this report is not anticipated to exceed approximately 1 inch. Differential settlement between comparably loaded footing elements is not expected to exceed approximately 1/2 inch over a span of 50 feet. For deep fill areas, total footing settlements may increase due to consolidation of fill material and underlying native soil. The resulting vertical displacement after loading may be due to elastic distortion, dissipation of excess pore pressure, or soil creep. Expansion of subgrade may also occur due to uplift rebound forces after unloading of native soils in deep cut areas. Settlement described above pertains to static loads. 5.7 Excavation Soils at the site were explored to a maximum depth of 51.5 feet using a truck-mounted, mud-rotary and hollow-stem auger drill system. Bedrock was not encountered and blasting or specialized rock-excavation techniques are not anticipated. Light perched groundwater seepage was encountered during subsurface exploration in all soil boring explorations at an approximate depth of 10 feet bgs. Based upon laboratory analysis and field testing, near-surface soils may be Oregon State Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Type C. For temporary open-cut excavations deeper than four feet, but less than 20 feet in soils of these types, the maximum allowable slope is 1.5H:1 V. OSHA soil type should be confirmed during field construction activities by the contractor. Soil is often anisotropic and heterogeneous, and it is possible that OSHA soil types determined in the field may differ from those described above. The contractor should be held responsible for site safety, sloping, and shoring. Columbia West is not responsible for contractor activities and in no case should excavation be conducted in excess of all applicable local, state, and federal laws. 5.8 Lateral Earth Pressure Lateral earth pressure should be carefully considered for design of retaining walls. Hydrostatic pressure and additional surcharge loading should also be considered. Retained material may include engineered structural backfill consisting of imported granular material meeting Section 02630 and Table 02630-1 of ODOT Standard Specifications. Backfill should be prepared and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D1557). Recommended parameters for lateral earth pressures for engineered structural fill are BUotechnicoi It Botoaonnlental.Special tesµecttotts Columbia West r tnaventure Tigard Project(BSH)\GeotechnicallReport113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docz, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 10 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon presented in Table 1. The design parameters presented in Table 1 are valid for static loading cases only. The recommended earth pressures do not include surcharge loads, dynamic loading, hydrostatic pressure, or seismic design. If seismic design is required, seismic forces for unrestrained walls may be calculated by superimposing a uniform lateral force of 10H2 pounds per lineal foot of wall, where H is the total wall height in feet. The resultant force should be applied at 0.6H from the base of the wall. Base coefficient of friction and bearing capacity for retaining wall design may be estimated based upon the values identified previously in Section 5.4, Foundations. Table 1. Recommended Lateral Earth Pressure Parameters Equivalent Fluid Pressure Drained for Level Backfill" Internal Backfill Material - Wet Density Angle of At-rest Active Passive Friction Imported granular backfill 60 pcf 38 pcf 517 pcf 140 pcf 35° per 02630-1 ODOT *The upper 6 inches of soil should be neglected in passive pressure calculations. If exterior grade from top or toe of retaining wall is sloped, Columbia West should be contacted to provide location-specific lateral earth pressures. A continuous one-foot-thick zone of free-draining, washed, open-graded 1-inch by 2-inch drain rock and a 4-inch perforated gravity drain pipe is assumed behind retaining walls. Geotextile filter fabric should be placed between the drain rock and fine-textured backfill soil. Specifications for drainpipe design are presented in Section 5.11, Drainage. If walls cannot be gravity drained, saturated base conditions and/or applicable hydrostatic pressures should be assumed. Final retaining wall design should be reviewed and approved by the geotechnical engineer. Retaining wall subgrade and backfill activities should also be observed and tested for compliance with recommended specifications by the geotechnical engineer or designated representative during construction. 5.9 Seismic Design Considerations According to the National Seismic Hazard Maps, Open-File 02-420, United States Geologic Survey (USGS), October 2002, the anticipated peak ground and maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations resulting from seismic activity for the subject site are summarized in Table 2. Table 2. Approximate Probabilistic Ground Motion Values for'firm rock'sites based on subject property longitude and latitude 10%Probability of 2%Probability of Exceedance in 50 yrs Exceedance in 50 yrs Peak Ground Acceleration 0.19 g 0.40 g 0.2 sec Spectral 0.44 g 0.93 g Acceleration 1.0 sec Spectral 0.15 g 0.34 g Acceleration Geotechnical•Environmental•Special inspections v Columbia West- l: et sg s c i g t n ,r*venture Tigard Project(BSH)1Geotechnical\Repon113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotecimical Report.docx, „(( rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 11 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon The listed probabilistic ground motion values are based upon "firm rock" sites with an assumed shear wave velocity of 2,500 ft/s in the upper 100 feet of soil profile. These values should be adjusted for site class effects by applying site coefficients Fa and Fv as defined in 2009 IBC Tables 1613.5.3(1) and (2). The site coefficients are intended to more accurately characterize estimated peak ground and respective earthquake spectral response accelerations by considering site-specific soil characteristics and index properties. Based upon observed subsurface soil conditions at the site, and review of well logs and local geologic maps, site soils may be considered to be Site Class D as defined in 2009 IBC Section 1613.5.2. This site class designation indicates that some amplification of seismic energy may occur during a seismic event because of subsurface conditions. Additional seismic information is presented in Section 5.10, Liquefaction. Localized peak ground accelerations exceeding the adjusted values may occur in some areas in direct proximity to an earthquake's origin. This may be a result of amplification of seismic energy due to depth to competent bedrock, compression and shear wave velocity of bedrock, presence and thickness of loose, unconsolidated alluvial deposits, soil plasticity, grain size, and other factors. Identification of specific seismic response spectra is beyond the scope of this investigation. If site structures are designed in accordance with recommendations specified in the 2009 IBC, the potential for peak ground accelerations in excess of the adjusted and amplified values should be understood. 5.10 Liquefaction Liquefaction, defined as the transformation of the behavior of a granular material from a solid to a liquid due to increased pore-water pressure and reduced effective stress, may occur when granular or non-plastic silt materials quickly compact under cyclic stresses caused by a seismic event. The effects of liquefaction may include immediate ground settlement and lateral spreading. Soils most susceptible to liquefaction are generally saturated, cohesionless, loose to medium-dense sands within 50 feet of the ground surface. Recent research has also indicated that low plasticity silts and clays may also be subject to sand-like liquefaction behavior if the plasticity index determined by the Atterberg Limits analysis is less than 8. Potentially liquefiable soils located above the existing, historic, or expected ground water levels do not generally pose a liquefaction hazard. It is important to note that changes in perched ground water elevation may occur due to project development or other factors not observed at the time of investigation. Based upon the results of the field investigation, laboratory analysis, and review of ground water mapping, near-surface soils are not saturated and exhibit low to moderate plasticity characteristics. Therefore, the potential for liquefaction of shallow soils at the site is considered to be low. Gootechnical•Environmental•Spatial Inspections Columbia West Fr E rx y n e or i n s 3 , I n c maveMUre Tigard Project(BSH)1Geotechnicat1Report113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geolechnical Reporl.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 12 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon 5.11 Drainage At a minimum, site drainage should include surface water collection and conveyance to properly designed stormwater management structures and facilities. Drainage design in general should conform to the City of Tigard regulations. Finished site grading should be conducted with positive drainage away from structures. Depressions or shallow areas that may retain ponding water should be avoided. Roof drains, low-point drains, and perimeter foundation drains are recommended for structures. Drains should consist of separate systems and gravity flow with a minimum two-percent slope away from foundations into the stormwater system or approved discharge location. Concentrated discharge of water should be prohibited across slopes and water should not be diverted, routed, or allowed to flow over or across slope faces. Perimeter foundation drains should consist of 3-inch perforated PVC pipe surrounded by a minimum of 1 ft3 of clean, washed drain rock per linear foot of pipe and wrapped with geotextile filter fabric. Open-graded drain rock with a maximum particle size of 3 inches and less than 2 percent passing the No. 200 sieve is recommended. Geotextile filter fabric should consist of Mirafi 140N or approved equivalent, with AOS between No. 70 and No. 100 sieve. The water permittivity should be greater than 1.5/sec. Figure 5 presents a typical foundation drain. Perimeter drains may limit increased hydrostatic pressure beneath footings and assist in reducing potential perched moisture areas. Subdrains should also be considered if portions of the site are cut below surrounding grades. Shallow groundwater, springs, or seeps should be conveyed via drainage channel or perforated pipe into the stormwater management system or an approved discharge. Recommendations for design and installation of perforated drainage pipe may be performed on a case-by-case basis by the geotechnical engineer during construction. Failure to provide adequate surface and sub-surface drainage may result in soil slumping or unanticipated settlement of structures exceeding tolerable limits. A typical perforated drain pipe trench detail is presented in Figure 6. Foundation drains and subdrains should be closely monitored after construction to assess their effectiveness. If additional surface or shallow subsurface seeps become evident, the drainage provisions may require modification or additional drains. The geotechnical engineer should be consulted to provide appropriate recommendations. 5.12 Bituminous Asphalt and Portland Cement Concrete According to preliminary site plans, the subject site is anticipated to include asphalt concrete streets, drive aisles, loading areas, and parking stalls. Based upon analytical laboratory test results and field exploration, Columbia West recommends the general pavement design consist of a minimum of 10 inches of compacted crushed aggregate base overlain with a minimum of 3 inches of asphalt concrete pavement for onsite parking and drive areas. The general pavement section identified above assumes adequate subgrade support provided by firm compacted engineered structural fill or a Geotezhnical•Envtrvnment,t•Spnc,ai inspection* Columbia West ` " c, ,naventure Tigard Propel(BSH)1GeotechnicallReport113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docz, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site investigation Page 13 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon well-drained, recompacted, native subgrade. Columbia West recommends adherence to the City of Tigard's standards for public works construction if improvements to public roads are proposed. For dry weather construction, pavement surface sections should bear upon competent subgrade consisting of scarified and compacted native soil or engineered structural fill. Wet weather pavement construction is discussed later in Section 5.13, Wet Weather Construction Methods and Techniques. Subgrade conditions should be evaluated and tested by a licensed geotechnical engineer or designated representative prior to placement of crushed aggregate base. Subgrade evaluation should include nuclear gauge density testing and wheel proof-roll observations conducted with a 12-cubic yard, double-axle dump truck or equivalent. Nuclear gauge density testing should be conducted at 150-foot intervals or as determined by the onsite geotechnical engineer. Subgrade soil should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor dry density, as determined by ASTM D1557. Areas of observed deflection or rutting during proof-roll evaluation should be excavated to a firm surface and replaced with compacted crushed aggregate. Crushed aggregate base should be compacted and tested in accordance with the specifications outlined above. Asphalt concrete pavement should be compacted to at least 91 percent of maximum Rice density. Nuclear gauge density testing should be conducted to verify adherence to recommended specifications. Testing frequency should be in accordance with the City of Tigard specifications. Portland cement concrete curbs and sidewalks should be installed in accordance with the City of Tigard specifications. Curb and sidewalk aggregate base should be observed and proof-rolled in the presence of an experienced geotechnical engineer or designated representative. Soft areas that deflect or rut should be stabilized prior to pouring concrete. Concrete should be tested during installation in accordance with ASTM C171, C138, C231, C143, C1064, and C31. This includes casting of cylinder specimen at a frequency of four cylinders per 100 cubic yards of poured concrete. Recommended field and analytical laboratory concrete testing includes slump, air entrainment, temperature, and unit weight. 5.13 Wet Weather Construction Methods and Techniques Wet weather construction often results in significant shear strength reduction and soft areas that may rut or deflect. Installation of granular working layers may be necessary to provide a firm support base and sustain construction equipment. Granular layers should consist of all-weather gravel, 4-inch by 6-inch gabion, or other similar material (6-inch maximum size with less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve). Construction equipment traffic across exposed fine-textured soil should be minimized. Equipment traffic induces dynamic loading, which may result in weak areas and significant reduction in shear strength for soils above plastic limit. Wet weather Gspter;lmlcaf a Enoirenmentat re Special trspectlons Columbia West- - maventure Tigard Project(0SH)\Geotechnical\Report113116,Bonaventure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotectlnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 14 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon construction may generate significant excess quantities of soft wet soil, which should be removed from the site or stockpiled in a designated area. Construction during wet weather conditions may require increased base thickness. Road base should consist of 3"-0 or 1'/4"-0 crushed aggregate and should be placed on previously stripped and structurally competent subgrade. Over-excavation may be necessary to provide a firm base upon which to place crushed aggregate. Geotextile filter fabric such as Mirafi 500X or an approved equivalent is also recommended. Crushed aggregate base should be installed in a single lift with trucks end-dumping from an advancing layer of granular fill. During extended wet periods, stripping activities may also need to be conducted from an advancing layer of granular fil I. Once installed, the crushed aggregate base should be compacted with several passes from a static drum roller. A vibratory compactor is not recommended because it may further disturb the subgrade. Subdrains may also be necessary to provide subgrade drainage and maintain structural integrity. Crushed aggregate base should be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density according to the modified Proctor density test (ASTM D1557). Compaction should be verified by nuclear gauge density testing. Observation of a proof-roll with a loaded dump truck is also recommended as an indication of subgrade performance. It should be understood that wet weather construction is risky and costly. An experienced geotechnical engineer or designated representative should observe and document wet weather construction activities. Proper construction methods and techniques are critical to overall project integrity. 5.14 Soil Erosion Potential Based upon field observations and laboratory testing, the erosion hazard for site soils in flat to shallow-gradient portions of the property is likely to be low. The potential for erosion generally increases in sloped areas. Therefore, disturbance to vegetation in sloped areas should be minimized during construction activities. Soil is also prone to erosion if unprotected and unvegetated during periods of increased precipitation. Erosion can be minimized by performing construction activities during dry summer months. Site-specific erosion control measures should be implemented to address the maintenance of exposed areas. This may include silt fence, biofilter bags, straw wattles, or other suitable methods. During construction activities, exposed areas should be well-compacted and protected from erosion with visqueen, surface tactifier, or other means, as appropriate. Temporary slopes or exposed areas may be covered with straw, crushed aggregate, or riprap in localized areas to minimize erosion. Erosion and water runoff during wet weather conditions may be controlled by application of strategically placed channels and small detention depressions with overflow pipes. Gaotechnicnl•Environmental•Special Inspections Columbia West ° maventure Tigard Propel(BSH)1GeotechnicallReport113116,Bonaventure Senior living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 15 Bona venture Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon After grading, exposed surfaces should be vegetated as soon as possible with erosion- resistant native species. Jute mesh or straw may be applied to enhance vegetation. Once established, vegetation should be properly maintained. Disturbance to existing native vegetation and surrounding organic soil should also be minimized during construction activities. 5.15 Utility Installation Utility installation at the site may require subsurface excavation and trenching. Excavation, trenching and shoring should conform to federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) (29 CFR, Part 1926) and OR-OSHA regulations. Site soils may slough when cut vertically and sudden precipitation events or perched ground water may result in accumulation of water within excavation zones and trenches. These areas should be dewatered in accordance with appropriate discharge regulations. Due to potential shallow ground water conditions, significant dewatering and pumping may be necessary. Utilities should be installed in general accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Utility trench backfill should consist of crushed aggregate or other coarse-textured, free-draining granular material acceptable to the client, City of Tigard, and the site geotechnical engineer. Trench backfill material within 18 inches of the top of utility pipes should be hand compacted (i.e., no heavy compaction equipment). The remaining backfill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor moisture-density test (ASTM D1557). Clean, free-draining, fine bedding sand is recommended for use in the pipe zone. With exception of the pipe zone, backfill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 inches in thickness. Compaction of utility trench backfill material should be verified by nuclear gauge field compaction testing performed in accordance with ASTM D6938. It is recommended that field compaction testing be performed at 250-foot intervals along the utility trench centerline at the surface and midpoint depth of the trench. Compaction frequency and specifications may be modified for non-structural areas in accordance with recommendations of the site geotechnical engineer. 6.0 CONCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS This geotechnical site investigation report was prepared in accordance with accepted standard conventional principles and practices of geotechnical engineering. This investigation pertains only to material tested and observed as of the date of this report, and is based upon proposed site development as described in the text herein. This report is a professional opinion containing recommendations established by engineering interpretations of subsurface soils based upon conditions observed during site exploration. Soil conditions may differ between tested locations or over time. Slight variations may produce impacts to the performance of structural facilities if not adequately addressed. This underscores the importance of diligent QA/QC Geotechrticat.Environmantal w Special Inapac#lana Columbia West- ! rnaventure Tigard Project(SSH)NGeotechnicallReporl\13116,Bonaventure Senior Living,1-gard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docx, rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 16 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon construction observation and testing to verify soil conditions are as anticipated in this report. Therefore, this report contains several recommendations for field observation and testing by Columbia West personnel during construction activities. Columbia West cannot accept responsibility for deviations from recommendations described in this report. Future performance of structural facilities is often related to the degree of construction observation by qualified personnel. These services should be performed to the full extent recommended. This report is not an environmental assessment and should not be construed as a representative warranty of site subsurface conditions. The discovery of adverse environmental conditions, or subsurface soils that deviate significantly from those described in this report, should immediately prompt further investigation. The above statements are in lieu of all other statements expressed or implied. This report was prepared solely for the client and is not to be reproduced without prior authorization from Columbia West. Final engineering plans and specifications for the project should be reviewed and approved by Columbia West as they relate to geotechnical and grading issues prior to final design approval. Columbia West is not responsible for independent conclusions or recommendations made by other parties based upon information presented in this report. Unless a particular service was expressly included in the scope, it was not performed and there should be no assumptions based upon services not provided. Additional report limitations and important information about this document are presented in Appendix D. This information should be carefully read and understood by the client and other parties reviewing this document. Sincerely, *,G1STEA,_ 42-COLU i BIA W-ST E GINEERING, Inc. I OREGO BENJAMIN L,1O• /l/i rami _ ;I'�...G �,, , 2f - Be m L. C•ok, RG 41, - ,.,, ii.. .gist ►, t'01., #60 .1�...�. L)(P. ri.-3'-‘3 ii ...'-I E. Lehto, PE, GE Principal Engineer �`�9� P a -ss, Vejs°' ' '9 i 82i ' E ' 41 rillie.k i. EGII 'aQ 0`141i61.. E.k,-"xs 12,.-31-"-\ Geotochnicel s Environmental a Soocial Inspections Columbia West- - 116-bonavenlu.o tigard project(bsh)lgeotechnicaArepor1113110.bonaventue senior tying beard,oregongeotechnical report.docu. rev.June 2013 Geotechnical Site Investigation Page 17 Bonaventure Senior Living, Tigard, Oregon REFERENCES Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Soil and Rock(I), v04.08, American Society for Testing and Materials, 1999. Beeson, M.H., Tolan, T.L., Madin, I.P., Geologic Map of the Lake Oswego Quadrangle, Clackamas, Multnomah, and Washington Counties, Oregon; Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries; Geological Map Series GMS-59, 1989. Estimated Depth to Groundwater in the Portland, Oregon Area, USGS Oregon Water Science Center 2013 Website, http://or.water.usgs.gov/projs_dir/puz/index.html Generalized Geologic Map of the Willamette Lowland, U.S. Department of the Interior, U.S. Geological Survey, Marshall W. Gannett and Rodney R. Caldwell, 1998. Geomatrix Consultants, Seismic Design Mapping, State of Oregon, January 1995. International Building Code: 2009 International Building Code, 2006 edition, International Code Council, 2009. McCarthy, Kathleen A., and Anderson, Donald B., Ground Water Data for the Portland Basin, Oregon and Washington, Open File Report 90-126, United States Geological Survey, 1990. National Seismic-Hazard Maps, Open File Report 02-420, United States Geological Survey, October, 2002. Oregon Administrative Rules, Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Division, Excavations, Subdivision P. Portland Maps(http://www.portlandmaps.com) Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, 29 CFR Part 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), revised July 1, 2001. U. S. Geological Survey, National Water Information System: Web Interface, http://waterdata.usgs.gov/wa/nwis/current/?type=flow&group_key=basin_cd Web Soil Survey, Natural Resources Conservation Service, United States Department of Agriculture 2013 website (http://websoilsurvey.nres.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm.). Wong, Ivan, et al, Earthquake Scenario and Probabilistic Earthquake Ground Shaking Maps for the Portland, Oregon, Metropolitan Area, IMS-16, Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries, 2000. Youd, T. L, and Idriss, I. M., Liquefaction Resistance of Soils: Summary Report from the 1996 NCEER and 1998 NCEER/NSF Workshops on Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils, Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 127, No. 4, April, 2001. GeotechntcM•Enwrronrnnr,tal•Specie!lnspectlorrs Columbia West maventure Tigard Project(BSH)\Geotechnical\Report 113116.Sonevenlure Senior Living,Tigard,Oregon Geotechnical Report.docz, rev.June 2013 FIGURES ,,t t'U1 t1i 11U iVJ9 -„CEu • ,/ Vir',,t �' , . I N we �rirr7arl Ei ft,;:., zr f#a5_,1 c;ytveft �;">>. 11 y,'t t K 1,,,,, ` tf:2ti Jf i`1 E'k. A'Oti0 5 ,s`rd �, ,,,. Beaverton i C:$t4PPfl t` :-. r nor,e-wh treti rt\v'j .,,. i N t ,4 -, ts * fttqft A -: Zr, i Nzits c J'iirz ,,- ,.. . ,,,,,,, , ', �r,, �,�, SITE LOCTIO , -.� y , -,r. it ttctd t.t f '.-•A,,, 411 1 � • v f 3+ V- .A 1 „{1 a h f t ■t. 4. 4'. } - it. , µµ T Veit tt ;tv,k r =WeliaE,� 4 { w k a F 1 } c t 7 2 < #3sf`t r 4- f;, A 1,'R,fr.or F?t ,aid, .,t� r ft< 4,II,- ati,. MAP SOURCE: GOGGLE MAPS 2013 fesign• Drawn: BLC SITE LOCATION MAP - -;,,_ i-,rr —. „>a,-- _ ,.hecked: I VL Date: 6/13/13 Columbia West .or Client: RONAVENTURF Rev By Date FIGURE t� Job No : 13116 BONAVENTURE SENIOR LIVING ,15 . 17 NE 95^Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 8325 SW ROSS ST Phone:360-823.2900,Fax:360-823-2901 CAD File: FIGURE 1 wwwcotumbiawestengineering.can Scale: N/A TIGARD, OREGON I �y E • illt e `� ' �" ' 4 APPROXIMATE SITE BOUNDARY i ,, + �,, w -fir ,. : , m,. �.. � � 11 F �_. . rte. 1.,,.( a. + 3 P°". " '" :r ev , . ill ,. '�.° T..4 A:5> a w+"dtr"l"�a'.d��•xy :i;� C �:'; C re „ '� d i - ` e -i-, i L I , . APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF SOIL BORING `� �,. NOTES: G�a+�oeachr+;c,:.t•ErnaonrnoR:.ai.$P+t�ia1 inc{anct.ns. Design: Drawn.B LC t. SITE LOCATION: 8325 SW ROSS ST, TIGARD, OREGON. ■-© embia WeStl- SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION MAP 2.SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 5.85 ACRES IN SIZE. M Checked:LVL Dote:6/13/13 3.DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. n n c r r Clienf: BONAVENTURE Rev By Date FIGURE 4.BASE MAP OBTAINED FROM GOOGLE EARTH. 11s97NE95ch9TREE7 Job No: 13116 3116 BONAVENTURE SENIOR LIVING 5.SOIL BORING LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE AND NOT VANCOUVER,WASHINGTON 98662 SURVEYED. CAD File:FIGURE 2 TIGARD, OREGON PHONE:3666232900 PAX 366823-2901 www.columbalwesCenglneering.com Scale: NON E TYPICAL CUT AND FILL SLOPE CROSS-SECTION EXISTING GROUND SURFACE COMPACTED ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL FILL TYPICAL CUT SLOPE; PLACED IN 12-INCH LIFTS GRADE MAY BE DETERMINED BY SITE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER \ - _ VIII BUT NOT TO EXCEED 2H:1V TYPICAL FILL SLOPE; GRADE MAY BE DETERMINED BY 1 II SITE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER BUT NOT TO EXCEED 2H:1V ' 1 ' , 1 POSSIBLE GROUND , ► - ' WATER SEEP 11 ilk II _ICI. ROUTE DRAINS THROUGH SOLID PIPE TO N. N N N. N. N. N. �4 FEET (TYPICAL) DAYLIGHT AT SLOPE FACE. MAINTAIN SOLID N. N. N. N. N. . \ N. N,, le PIPE TO APPROVED DISCHARGE LOCATION. N.' r, N y, w, .� `s _ DO NOT ALLOW TO FLOW OVER SLOPE FACE. r N N. N. N. N N. gyp,, �� I - i POSSIBLE GROUND WATER SEEP TOE BENCH/KEY AilialMINIFIPPri JOS — ,__,:a_____POSSIBLE GROUND �.-,- -- WATER SEEP _ -III . .r 2 FEET (TYPICAL) -III H I ' '' NEED FOR DRAINS SHOULD BE DETERMINED BY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER DURING CONSTRUCTION MINIMUM MINIMUM 10 FEET 5 FEET TYPICAL DRAIN SECTION DETAIL DRAIN SPECIFICATIONS GEOTEXTILE FABRIC �� " WASHED DRAIN ROCK GEOTEXTILE FABRIC SHALL CONSIST OF MIRAFI 140N OR APPROVED MINIMUM � I�� MINIMUM EQUIVALENT WITH AOS BETWEEN No. 70 AND No. 100 SIEVE. 2 FEET '~' r � 2 FEET MINIMUM 3—INCH DIAMETER WASHED DRAIN ROCK SHALL BE OPEN—GRADED ANGULAR DRAIN ROCK PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE WITH LESS 2 PERCENT PASSING THE No. 200 SIEVE AND A MAXIMUM M PARTICLE SIZE OF 3 INCHES. MINIMUM MINIMUM 2 FEET 2 FEET Geoteohnical a Environmental.Spacial Inspections lik Design: Drawn:BLC TYPICAL CUT AND FILL Columbia West- Checked:LVL Date:6/13/13 SLOPE CROSS—SECTION FIGURE rif- NOTES: E r. cl 1 n e c r i n 8 . 1 n c Client: BONAVENTURE Rev By Date 1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. 2.SLOPES AND PROFILES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE. 11917 NE 95th STREET Job No: 13116 BONAVENTRUE SENIOR LIVING 3 3.DRAWING REPRESENTS N AND TYPICAL FILL AND CUT PHON VANCOUVER.22900 FAX:N ae232901 CAD File:FIGURE 3 TIGARD, OREGON SLOPE SECTION, AND MAY NOT BE SITE-SPECIFIC. www.columbeiwestenginearing.com Scale:NONE TYPICAL CUT AND FILL SLOPE CROSS-SECTION PROPOSED STRUCTURE I_ I I I-° I I I 1 I I I I I I COMPACTED ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL FILL OR COMPETENT NATIVE CUT SOIL -co--- 10 FEET FOOTING �; H `, — RECOMMENDED MINIMUM HORIZONTAL SETBACK DISTANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM EDGE OF FOOTING �P+ I I AND FACE OF SLOPE IS 10 FEET OR SLOPE HEIGHT DIVIDED BY 3, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. — MINIMUM SETBACK DISTANCE ASSUMES SLOPE - EXISTS ON ONE PROPERTY BORDER. FOR PROPERTY CORNERS WITH ADJOINING SLOPES, ADDITIONAL - ENGINEERING ANALYSIS MAY BE REQUIRED. _�iTn1II I -1 I_ Geoteohnisal ii Environmental•Special Ins Design: Drawn:BLC MINIMUM FOUNDATION NOTES: Columbia West Checked:LVL Date:6/13/13 SLOPE SETBACK DETAIL FIGURE 1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. tr ft 9 1 n e e r t „ g , x n e 1 SLOPES AND PROFILES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE. Client: BONAVENTURE Rev By Date 3.DRAWING REPRESENTS TYPICAL FOUNDATION 11817 NE95thSTREET Job No:13116 BONAVENTURE SENIOR LIVING 4 SETBACK DETAIL, AND MAY NOT BE VANCOUVER,WASHINGTON 98882 _ SITE—SPECIFIC. PHONE 360.8232900 FAX 360823.2901 CAD Flle:FIGURE 4 TIGARD, OREGON www.columbeiwestangineering.com Scale:NONE TYPICAL PERIMETER FOOTING DRAIN DETAIL FINAL EXTERIOR GRADE SHOULD PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE AWAY FROM STRUCTURES SLOPE TO DRAIN TOPSOIL MATERIAL ---a 4.W .Y W W W W 4, W W W `. W W W W - GEOTEXTILE FABRIC W 4, (MIRAFI 140N OR EQUIVALENT) • FOOTING MINIMUM DEPTH III :� 0� �e•�j' _ OF 24 INCHES • 0! , i_.i —I I 0040,• i op -1 —I I 1—III—1 —I 11 1 I I I H I I I ' ' FILTER SAND COMPETENT NATIVE SOIL PERFORATED OR SLOTTED 3—INCH RIGID PVC DRAIN BEARING SURFACE OR PIPE INSTALLED AT MINIMUM 2 PERCENT SLOPE WITH ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL FILL GRAVITY FLOW TO APPROVED DISCHARGE LOCATION OPEN—GRADED DRAIN ROCK WITH MAXIMUM PARTICLE SIZE OF 3 INCHES oe ynlc l•Environmental•Special in= nns Design: Drawn:BLC TYPICAL PERIMETER Columbia We Checked:LVL Date:6/13/13 FOOTING DRAIN DETAIL Engineering , a ° Client:BONAVENTURE Rev By Date FIGURE NOTES: 11917 NE Job No:13116 BONAVENTURE SENIOR LIVING 1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. - 5 2.DRAWING REPRESENTS TYPICAL FOOTING DRAIN VANCOUVER,WASHW8TON 88882 PHONE 3868232900 FAX 3868232801 CAD File:FIGURE 5 TIGARD, OREGON DETAIL AND MAY NOT BE SITE—SPECIFIC. www:calumbeiwestsngineerfig.00m Scale:NONE TYPICAL PERFORATED DRAIN. PIPE TRENCH DETAIL STRUCTURAL AREAS NON-STRUCTURAL AREAS ASPHALT PAVEMENT SURFACE 1 1/4"-0 CRUSHED AGGREGATE ROAD BASE NON-STRUCTURAL FILL / TOPSOIL STRUCTURAL FILL 1=1 ( ( MINIMUM 1 FOOT 2 FEET (TYPICAL) .fpm�.4+_.-ki. y.?S;: -11 mg jEt■I IP D.gip 41111016 I • 4■•■.,1 I'•ik OPEN GRADED FRACTURED FACE • I ANGULAR DRAIN ROCK WITH 4b, �:,' MAXIMUM 3-INCH PARTICLE SIZE VARIES . ;mod �`�� qv .S ��•I 'I GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC (MIRAFI 140N OR EQUIVALENT) I,'•1+,,� MINIMUM 6-INCH DIAMETER �'�'i RIGID PVC OR HDPE DRAIN PIPE I I ( I _I1'I UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL II —+► MINIMUM 2 FEET -.4-- NOTE: LOCATION, INVERT ELEVATION, DEPTH OF TRENCH, AND EXTENT OF PERFORATED PIPE REQUIRED MAY BE MODIFIED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER DURING CONSTRUCTION BASED UPON FIELD OBSERVATION AND SITE-SPECIFIC SOIL CONDITIONS. Osetcctrtical E .5p c&+, eor Design: Drawn:six TYPICAL PERFORATED 1 Columbia 0St Checked:LVL Date:6/13/13 DRAIN PIPE TRENCH DETAIL g " 8 ; . . " F i n e * I n c Client:BONAVENTURE Rev By Date FIGURE 11917 NE 95th STREET :Job No: 13116 BONAVENTURE SENIOR LIVING VANCOUVER WA3F111■18fON 88882 6 PHUNE 360823,29M FAQ'360823290/ CAD File: FIGURE 6 www.columb TIGARD, OREGON Scale:NONE APPENDIX A LABORATORY TEST RESULTS Geotechnical ■ Environmental ■ Special inspections 11817 NE 95v'Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360.823-2900,Fax:360.823-2901 Columbia West www.columbiewestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-287 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE FIELD ID 3220 State st. Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1:.1 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY • . 06/1 0/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy Lean CLAY ' Soil Boring SB-01 CL, Sandy Lean Clay depth=2.5 feet SPECIFICATIONS AASHTO SOIL TYPE none ' A-6(8) LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE . Rainhart"Mary Ann" Sifter 637 ASTM D6913, D422 ADDITIONAL DATA : SIEVE DATA initial dry mass(g)= 68 .7 %gravel= 0,0% as-received moisture content= 32.8% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %sand= 34.8% liquid limit= 37 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %•silt and.clay= 65.2% plastic limit= 22 effective size.Dow= n/a plasticity index= 15 Duo) n/a PERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= n/a DPI= n/a SIEVE SIZE SIEVE SPECS US I, mm act. I interp.. max I miff. 6.00' 150.0 100.0% . GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% 3.00" 75.0 100.0% =a t:, -- 4V01 - = 4 tai i'A e S tt If; 2E-1 • 2.50' 63.0 100.0% 1 1IUiiIiIilllIilIiiiiii ,°° ° � II'I't1� J 1.50' 37.5 100.0% - 90% 1.25' 31.5 100.0% • g 1.00" 25.0 100.0% 80% 80% 0 718" 22.4 100.0% II 3/4' 19.0 100.0% 70% 70% 5/8' 16.0 100.0% j 1/2' 12.5 100.0% 3/8' 9.50 100.0% 60% i 60% 1/4' 6.30 100.0% e #4 4.75 100.0% 160% i 50% #8 2.36 99.8% #10 2.00 99.8% * #16 1:18 99.3% 40% I 40% #20 0.850 99.0% #30 0.600 98.3% 30% 30% o #40 0.425 97.5% Z #50 0.300 96.1% #60 0.250 95:3% 20% i i 20% #80 0.180 91.2% #100 0.150 88:9% 10% 10% #140 0.106 77.0% #170 0.090 71.4% #200 0.075 65.2% 0% I I I 0% DATE TESTED TESTED BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/13/13 C.--------- --MJR� •4 sieve aims -�sieve data C// =•amr This report may not be reproduced except in full without prior wrdlen authorization by Colurrtia West Engineering,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature CWE-s12-r07/1 Geotechnical is Environmental ■ Special Inspections 11917 NE 95°i Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax 360-823-2901 Columbia West www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , rolia I n c ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT PROJECT CUENT PROJECT NO. ;LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-287 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE ,FIELD1D r 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1.1 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATESAMPLED 'SAMPLED BY • 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA .MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy Lean CLAY Soil Boring SB-01 CL,Sandy Lean Clay depth=2.5 feet LABORATORY TEST DATA .LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Liquid Limit Machine,Hand Rolled ASTM D4318 ATTERBERG LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT DETERMINATION A • © ® LIQUID LIMIT liquid limit= 37 wet soil+. an weight q P r9 9' 40.47 40.38 40.09 tto%_. plastic limit= 22 dry soil"+.pan weight,g= 35.35 35.02 34.54 80%_ - - plasticity index= 15 pan weight,g= 20.52 20.77 20.88 ae TO% N(blows)= 35 24 15 ": 60%_ ' ' moisture,%= 34.5% 37.6% 40.6% 850% 0 40%_ SHRINKAGE. 'PLASTIC LIMIT DETERMINATION E 30%- > o 20%_ shrinkage limit= n/a wet soil+pan weight,g= 27.16 27.16 0% : shrinkage ratio= n/a dry soil+pan weight,g= 26.01 26.00 10 25 100 pan weight,g= 20.81 20.82 number of blows,"N" moisture,%= 22.1% 22.4% ADDITIONAL:DATA PLASTICITY CHART &1 %gravel= 0.0% %sand= 34.8% 70 %silt and clay= 65.2% - "U"Line %silt= n/a %clay= n/a - moisture content= 32.8% x 50 - a c - CH or OH "A'Line v40 - •.--/ 7n R - #'' ' o. 30 _ / 20 .GL ar OL MH or OH 10 CL-ML ML or OL . 1 DATE TESTED I TESTED SY 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 eo go too 06/19/13 MIR liquid limit -* ----- Tuts report may not be reproduced except In run without prior written authorization byColumbiawes tEngineering,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC:authorized signature CWE-s14-r12/09 Geotechnioar a Environmental ■ Special Inspection 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 •Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 Columbia W www.columbiewestengineering.com • E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. •LAID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing. 13,116 '' S13-288"' Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT,DATE FIELD 1D , 3220 State st.Suite 200 . 06/20/13 1 SBI.2 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED, - i.SAMPLED BY ' '-06/10/13 1 -"ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy SILT Soil Boring SB-01 ML, Sandy Silt depth=5 feet SPECIFICATIONS AASHTO SOIL TYPE none A-4(4) . LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE ' Rainhart"Mary Ann"Sifter 637 ASTM D6913, D422 ,ADDITIONAL DATA SIEVE DATA initial dry mass(g)= 125.9 %gravel= 0.0% as-received moisture content= 35.1% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %sand= 33.7% liquid limit= 34 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %silt and clay= 66,3% plastic limit= 27 effective size,Dow= n/a plasticity index= 7 D 1= n/a • PERCENT'PASSING fineness modulus= n/a. D(60)= n/a .SIEVE SIZE SIEVE `` SPECS US I' mm act.. I interp: max I min' , . 6.00" 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% �� >bbtb o m 8 �� 3.00" 75.0 100.0% e h%4-1S :.-asa .ki 4 VZ u § § a av 22- 2.50' 63.0 100.0% 100% ° ° °m c° a°°° ° ° ° ®e • -.woe.. - 100% 2.00' 50.0 100.0% _ ' i ° ° i 1.75' 45.0 100.0% •90% - - 90% 1.50" 37.5 100.0% 1.25' 31.5 100,0% 1.00" 25.0 100.0% . 80% i ° 80% ° 718' 22.4 100.0% • 3i4• 19.0 100.0% ., 5/8" 16.0 100.0% 70% j 70% 1/2' 12.5 100.0% 3/8' 9.50 100.0% 60% i i 60% 1/4' 6:30 100.0% i c #4 4.75 100.0% to on 50% r 50% #8 2.36 100.0% r`� #10 2.00 100.0% o - , i #16 1:18 99.8% 40% i :, i - 40% #20 0.850 99:7% _ #30 0.600 99.1% ... 30% - 30% p #40 0.425 98:4% _ #50 0.300 97.1% 20% - 20% #60 0.250 96.4% #80 0.180 92.6% #100 0.150 00.6% 10% I 10% #140 0.106 78.4% #170 0.090 72.6% - #200 0.075 66:3% 0°!w, I 0% DATE TESTED TESTED BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/13/13 MAR $ slaveelzes .....0-sieve data �'•,_ .1' f '_ __ z: t C/ This report may not be reproduced except In M without prior written authorization by Cohnrtia West Engineering.Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature CWE-s12-r07/1 11917 NE 95th Street Vancouver,Washington 96682 Geotechnical v Environmental ■ Special Inspections ; Phone: West --.'"Ar��one:360.823-2900,Fax 360-823-2901 www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB ID - Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-288 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood ,REPORT DATE FIELD ID 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1.2 ' Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy SILT . Soil Boring SB-01 ML,Sandy Silt depth=5 feet LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Liquid Limit Machine,Hand Rolled ASTM D4318 ATTERBERGLIMITS LIQUID`LIMITTOETERMINATION LIQUID LIMIT 0 0 0 0 100% liquid limit= 34 wet soil+pan weight,g= 39.54 40.63 40.23 8o% 1_ plastic limit= 27 dry soil+pan weight,g= 34.92 35.54 35.08 . 80% , plasticity index= 7 pan weight,g= 20.89 20.74 20.82 a. 70% .. -- - . -, --- N(blows)= 33 22 17 = 550% moisture,%= 32.9% 34.4% 36.1% c 40% g SHRINKAGE PLASTIC LIMIT DETERMINATION E 30% 0 0 0 0 20% - shrinkage limit= n/a wet soil+pan weight,g= 27.27 27.44 10% 096 shrinkage ratio= n/a dry soil+pan weight,g= 25.86 25.97 10 25 100 pan weight,g= 20.58 20.50 number of blows,"N" ' moisture,%= 26.7% 26.9% ADDITIONAL DATA PLASTICITY CHART BO %gravel= 0.0% %sand= 33.7% %silt and clay= 66.3% %silt= n/a "U"Line _ %clay•= n/a 60 moisture content= 35.1% x 50 • v "A"Line 5 - CH or OH Z"' 40 r Ti - 1 3- 30 %- _ 20 CL Or OL MH or OH 10 -• CI,ML ® ML or OL DATE TESTED I TESTED BY 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 06/19/13 MJR liquid limit -- This report may not be reproduced except in tut without prior written authorization by Columbia West Engiseedng,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorised signature CWE-s14-r12/09 Geotechnical ■ Environmental w Special inspections 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax.360-823-2901 Columbia West www.columbiewestengineering.com • E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB1D Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-289 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE FIELD lo 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1.3' Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE'SAPB°LED SAMPLED BY ,06/10/13=. " ASE. MATERIAL DATA ' MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE ; Silty SAND Soil Boring SB-01 SM, Silty Sand depth=7.5 feet SPECIFICATIONS - AASHTO SOIL TYPE none A-4(0) LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Rainhart"Mary Ann"Sifter 637 ASTM D6913,D422 ADDITIONAL DATA . i SIEVE DATA initial dry mass(g)= 105.3 '%gravel= .0.0% as-received moisture content= 30.3% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %sand= 63.5% liquid limit= 0 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %silt and clay= 36.5% plastic limit= 0 effective size,Dom= n/a plasticity index= 0 Dm= n/a PERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= n/a D#oI= 0.133 mm SIEVE SIZE - SIEVE SPECS US 'I mm act. I'"interp: max. I min 6.00" 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% 3.00' 75.0 100.0% Fa e4 t-,kM§ N ° a wZ E E I WI Vg a , 2.50' 63.0 100.0% 100% ,, ,,C °°4 4 F•x •4 4 4 % ° °» ° 4 100% 2.00" 50.0 100.0% - ° 1.75' 45.0 100.0% 90% - 90% 1.50" 37.5 100.0%IIIIIIIIIIIIMEIM4 '' I 1.25' 31.5 100.0% 1.00" 25.0 100.0% 80% 1 80°k 718' 22.4 100:0% 1 314' 19.0 100.0% 7091, ` 70% 5/8' 16.0 100.0% 1/2' 12.5 100.0% ° 3/8' 9.50 100.0% 60% i 60% 1/4' 8.30 100.0% Cri C ION #4 475 100.0% li M 50% - 50% #8 2.36 99.9% a. j 1 - #10 2.00 99.9% e :Elo #16 1.18 99.7% 0 40 h i 40% #20 0.850 99.6% i I #30 0.600 982% 30% 30% #40 0.425 96.7% El _ #50 0.300 89.2% #60 0.250 85.2% 20% 20% #80 0.180 • #100 0.150 64.8% 72.1% • 10% 10% #140 0.106 50!6% #170 0.090 44.0% • #200 0.075 36.5% • 0% 0% DATE-TESTED TESTED BY 100:00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.91 particle size(mm) • 06/:13%13' �rIV17R t sieve sizes -0-sieve data d•*--ftif This repot may not be reproduced except in far without prior written authorization by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.aadhatred signature CW E-s12-r07/1 Geotechnical a Environmental a Special inspections 11 917 NE 95"'Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360.823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 Columbia W www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT • - PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB ID • Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-290 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE FIELD ID 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1.4 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE • USCS SOIL TYPE Silty SAND Soil Boring SB-01 SM, Silty Sand depth= 10 feet SPECIFICATIONS AASHTO SOIL TYPE none A-2-4(0) LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Rainhart"Mary Ann" Sifter 637 ASTM D6913, D422 ADDITIONAL DATA. SIEVE DATA initial dry mass(g)= 144.2 %gravel= 0.0% as-received moisture content= 31.0% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %sand.= 73.6%. ' liquid limit= 0 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %,silt and'clay 26.4%, plastic limit= 0 effective size,Dtt01 n/a plasticity index= 0 Dt30)= 0.083 mm PERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= n/a Dom),= 0.181 mm SIEVE SIZE SIEVE . SPECS US I! Aim act. I interp. max I' min 6.00" 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% 00 3.00" 75.0 100.0% t is 3 8n'vN to g o ii 8 v� < Po�v :;per � � �;� # � � � �� ua 2.50' .63.0 100.0% lop% e - - am a a °t°° °- o s s o o @- s 100% 2.00" 50.0 100.0% ° i 1.75' 45.0 100.0% 90% 90°k J 1.50' 37.5 100.0%. • j 1.25' 31.5 100.0% g 1.00" 25.0 100.0% 80% - • - 80% 0 7/8" 22.4 100.0% ° ; 3/4' 19.0 100:0% 70% 70% 518' 16.0 100.0% 112' 12.5 100.0% " ;318" 9.50 100.0% 60% i - 60% 1/4' 6.30 100.0% c ; : #4 4.75 100.0% TA i 4 50% -- - , c !I. i 50% #8 2.36 99.9% a ; F ; #10 2.00 99.8% a° ; #16 1.18 99.5% 40% - • # 40% #20 0.850 99.4% o • #30 0.600 96.5% 30% i ' 30% o #40 0.425 93.6% Z #50 0.300 80.8% N #60 0.250 74.2% 20% _ 20% #80 0.180 59.8% ' ;# 100 0.150 51.8% 10% i i 10% #140 0.106 39.1% ' , #170 0.090 33.1% : #200 0.075 26.4% 0% i i I 0% DATE TESTED I TESTED BY , 100.00 10.00 1.00 0:10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/13113, MJR + e,eve sizes -0-sieve data �-- - � This repoit nsy not be reproduced except in full wdlaut prior written authonzationby Columbia WestE 9,Inc, COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature . OWE-s12-r07/12 Geatechnical ■ Environmental ■ Special Inspections 11917 NE,95d"Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 Columbia West pas www.columbiawestengineerrng.com E n g i n e e r i n g , Inc PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CUENT ;PROJECT NO: LAB ID - Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard'Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-291 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood ,REPORT DATE ' MELD ID '° -- 3220 State st.'Suite 200 06/20/13 ' .SB1.5' DATE SAMPLED, [SAMPLED BY Salem,Oregon 97301 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA . MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE SILTY CLAY with Sand Soil Boring SB-01 CL-ML,Silty Clay with Sand depth= 17.5 feet • SPECIFICATIONS AASHTO SOIL TYPE none A-4(3) LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Rainhart"Mary Ann" Sifter 637 ASTM D6913,D422 ADDITIONAL DATA SIEVE DATA initial dry mass(g)= 119.6 %:gravel= 0.0% as-received moisture content= 29.9% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %sand= 26.3% liquid limit= 27 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %silt and clay.= 733% • plastic limit= 21 effective size,'D1lo)= n/a . plasticity index= 6 Dom= n/a PERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= n/a D1eo)= n/a SIEVE SIZE SIEVE I SPECS US I mm act. I interp. max I min 6.00" 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% 'mxchhh!v h g `,4E E e a elf el liql 3.00' 75.0 100.0% hN i,.-:-�:�� # ## 2.50' 63.0 100.9% 100% , ,,° -° 1 ffi o s ' 0 °o _o-' 100% 2.00" 50.0 100.0% I 1.75' 45.0 100.0% - i o ° � • - 90% ° j - 90% _1 1.50" 37.5 100.0% a i ; 1.25" 31.5 100.0% 1.00" 25.0 100,0% 80% I " 80% t, 7/8" 22.4 100.0% i E • ; 3/4' 19.0 100.0% 70% 70% 5/8" 16.0 100.0% • 1/2' 12.5 100.0% • I i 3/8" 9.50 100.0% 60% i 60% V4' 6.30 100.0% C . I ; #4 4.75 100.0% N 50% #10 2.36 99.9% • C 50% - #10 2.00 99.9% Zit i #16 1.18 99.2% 40% i 40% #20 0.850 98.7% j I _ #30 0.600 97.7% 30% ` - i - 30% o #40 0.425 96.7% #50 0.300 94.4% . ; #60 0.250 93.2% 20% S . 20% NO 0.180 88.7% #100 0.150 86.2% • 10% i - 10% #140 0.108 79.9% #170 0.090 77.0% - i i i - #200 0.075 73.7% 0% I i i 0°r6 DATE TESTED I TESTED BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06114/13 BJR $ sieve sizes -0-sieve data /.ter ---- • This report may not be reproduced except in full without prior written authorization by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.a d arized signature CWE-s12-r07/1 Geotechnical ■ Environmental ■ Spacial Inspections 11917 NE 95"'Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax 360-823-2901 Columbia West ra' www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT PROJECT CUENT PROJECT NO. 1'LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-291 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE '',HEM) 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1.5 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED Q SAMPLED BY 06/10/13`? ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIALSOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE SILTY CLAY with Sand Soil Boring SB-01 CL-ML,Silty Clay with Sand • depth=17.5 feet LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE .. Liquid Limit Machine,Hand Rolled ASTM D4318 ATTERBERG LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT DETERMINATION 0 0 0 ® LIQUID LIMIT 100% liquid limit= 27 wet soil+pan weight,g= 41.03— 40.62 41.50 9096 plastic limit= 21 dry soil+pan weight,g= 36.85 36.43 37.02 80% - plasticity index= 6 pan weight,g= 20.65 20.84 20.91 . e 70% .- .. N(blows)= 35 26 16 !y 60% M 50% .. . ' moisture,%= 25.8% , 26.9% 27.8% c 40% . . . .. SHRINKAGE PLASTIC LIMIT DETERMINATION o , : 0 ® ® 20% shrinkage limit= n/a wet soil+pan weight,g= 28.20 28.02 0% shrinkage ratio= n/a dry soil+pan weight,g= 26.91 26.76 10 26 100 pan weight,g= 20.68 20.76 number of blows,"N" moisture,%= 20.7% 21.0% ADDITIONAL DATA PLASTICITY CHART 80 %,gravel= 0.0% . %sand= 26.3% 70 %silt and clay= 73.7% "U"Line %silt= n/a %clay= n/a 60 - moisture content= 29.9% x c - CH or OH "A"Line Z 40 r - % A - , a 30 -s ' ' 20 , GL orOL MH or OH - 10 1, CUM ML or OL r DATE TESTED TESTED BY 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 06/19/13 MJR _.. liquid limit C_.._. — This report may not be reproduced except in fug without prior when authorization by Columbia West Engkieedng,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INd.authorized signature CWE-s14-r12/09 • • Geotechnical ■ Environmental ■ Special Inspections 11917 NE 95"'Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax 360-823-2901 Columbia West www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g ,• I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. .LAMB) Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior.Housing 13116', S13-292 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT:DATE - FIELD'ID 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB1.6 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED sAMPIED;BY , 06/10/13. ASR MATERIAL DATA . MATERIAL SAMPLED "MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Lean CLAY with Sand Soil Boring SB-01 ' CL, Lean Clay with Sand depth=20 feet SPECIFICATIONS AASHTO SOIL TYPE ,, none A-7-6(18) LABORATORY TEST DATA . LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Rainhart"Mary Ann" Sifter 637 ASTM D6913,D422 ADDITIONALDATA SIEVE DATA initial dry:mass(g)= 124.1 "41,gravel'= 0.0% , as-received moisture content= 26.6% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %sand= 28,7% • liquid limit= 48 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %silt-and clay= 71.3% " plastic limit= 21 effective size,D/Go1= nia , plasticity index= 27 Dci= n/a 1 sPERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= n/a Daoi= n/a SIEVE SIZE SIEVE SPECS ' US I: mm act. I interp., max I min • 6.00• 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% 3.00' 75.0 100.0% %, hN t : .:Va N b 4 `8; ii § Q a @W V$ B 2.50' 83.0 100.0% 100% . 100% IIiiiiiiiIIiIiui 'iir:uJ .iiiui• 900 J 1.50' 37.5 100.0% 5 1.25' 31.5 100.0% 1.00" 25.0 100.0% • 80% i i i 80% 0 7/8" 22.4 100.0% g 6 3/4' 19.0 100.0% i 518' 16.0 100.0% 70% I i 70% • 112" 12.5 100.0% 318' 9:50 100.0% 80% 60% 114' 6.30 1090% C ' #4 4.75 100.0% • IA #8 2.36 99.8% 50% i 50% #10 2:00 99:8% e i #16 118 98.5% 40% 40% #20 0.850 97.7% #30 0.600 95.3% 30% . 30% ci #40 0.425 93.0% 1 #50 0.300 89.3% #60 0.250 87.4% 20% i 20% #80 0.180 84.2% #100 0.150 82:5% . 10% ! 100 #140 0.106 76.9% #170 0.090 74.2% I DATE#200 0.075 71.3% 0% 0% TESTED' TESTEED:BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/14/13 /►IBJR "� , 4 sieve sizes .--P-sieve data G..-------- - This repan may not be reproduced except in full without prior written authorization by Columbia West Engyreedng,.Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING.INC.authorized signature CWE-s12-r07/ Geotechnical ■ Environmental o Special Inspections 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax 360-823-2901 Colunibill WO St -^�° www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g ., I n c ATTERSERG-LIMITS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-292 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE . FIELD ID 3220 State st.Suite 200 106/20/13 SB1:.6 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE:SAMPLED '. SAMPLED BY 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Lean CLAY with Sand Soil Boring SB-01 CL,Lean Clay with Sand depth=20 feet — LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Liquid Limit Machine,Hand Rolled ASTM D4318 ATTERBERG LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT DETERMINATION © 0 0 0 UQUID LIMIT 100% liquid limit= 48 wet soil+pan weight,g= 41.17 39.37 39.83 90% . plastic limit= 21 dry soil+pan weight,g= 34.68 33.30 _ 33.33 80% plasticity index= 27 pan weight,g= 20.60 20.49 20:71 6. 70% N(blows)= 35 22 15 :; fl moisture,%= 46.1% 47.4% 51.5% c 40% 1,SHRINKAGE PLASTIC LIMIT DETERMINATION E 30% 10% shrinkage limit= n/a wet soil+pan weight,g= 27.16 27.48 0% shrinkage ratio= n/a dry soil+pan weight,g= 26.03 26.29 10 25 100 pan weight,g= 20.76 _ 20.58 number of blows,"N" moisture,%= 21.4% 20.8% ADDITIONAL DATA PLASTICITY CHART so %gravel= 0.0% %sand= 28.7% %silt and clay= 71.3% 70 •' "U"Line %silt= n/a : %clay= n/a 60 _ moisture content= 26.6% x 50 w - c - CH or OH "A'Line Z` T - R / a, 30 % O CL orOL : MH or OH 10 (CL-ML ML orOL r DATE TESTED TESTED BY , . . , , 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 06/19/13 MJR liquid limit C.------ ----- This report may not be reproduced except In full without prior written authorization by Columbia West Ergbeedrg,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC:authorized signature CWE-s14-r12109 Geotechnical it Environmental a Special Inspections 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360823-2900,Fax 360823-2901 Columbia : We s www.columbiewestengineering.com E n g . i n e a r i n g , I n_ c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB II) Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel ,Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S13-293 . Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE ' FIELD ID' 3220 State st. Suite 200 06/20/13 , , SB2.I , Salem,Oregon 97301 DATESAMPLED '' SAMPLEDSY . • 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA • MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy SILT Soil Boring SB-02 ML,Sandy Silt depth=2.5 feet SPECIFICATIONS AASHTO SOIL TYPE _ none A-4(l) • LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE ' Rainhart"Mary Ann"Sifter 637 • ASTM D6913,D422 ADDITIONAL DATA • SIEVE.DATA ' initial dry mass(g)= 93.4 %gravel= 0.0% as-received moisture content= 28.5% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a %.sand= 48.8% liquid limit= 31 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %siitand clay= 51.2% plastic limit= 25 effective size,Dow= n/a plasticity index= 6 DOoI= n/a PERCENT,PASSING fineness modulus= n/a Dom= 0.092 mm SIEVE SIZE SIEVE SPECS , US I mm act. I intelp. I mak I min , 6.00' 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% 3.00' 75.0 100.0% tr Div t,'4 :�aa N a z Q e a tw iiig 2E8 2.50' 63.0 100.0% 100% ,. e 0 0°° 6d°° s • ° 0° -s- 100% 2.00' 50.0 100.0% . e ' 1.75 45.0 100.0% 90% I 1 90% , 1:50' 37.5 100.0% _ wy 1.25' 31.5 100.0% ° - g 1.00' 25.0 100.0% 80% _ I , 80% 0 7/8' 22.4 100.0% 3/4' 19.0 100.0% 70% i I i 70% 5/8' 16.0 100.0% 1/2" 12.5 100.0% 3/8' 9.50 100.0% 60% i 60% 1/4' 6.30 100.0% c 1 #4 4.75 100.0% Ti _ i3 50% I ° 50% #8 2.36 99.9% o. #10 2.00 99.8% e #16 1.18 99.3% 40% i 40% #20 0.850 99.0% I i = #30 0.600 97.8% 30% 30% 121, #40 0.425 96.6% j i X #50 0.300 93.3% h #60 0.250 91.7% 20% 1 - 20% #80 0.180 84.4% #100 0.150 80.4% •- 10% - 1096 #140 0:108 65.8% I - #170 0.090 58.9% _ ' #200 0.075 51'.2% 0% 0% `DATE TESTED TESTED:BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/14[13 BJR. ♦ sieve sixes -0-sieve data �r"'------ ^ This raped may not be reproduced except in full without prior written auttotration by Columbia West Engineering,Inc COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature CWE-s12-r07/1 Geotechnical is Environmental ■ Special Inspections 11917 NE 95"'Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 to Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 Co lumb'.a West www.columbiawestengineering.com psiA E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT PROJECT CUENT PROJECT NO. ;LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing _ !, 13116 S13-293 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood IREPORT DATE 'FIELD ID 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB2.1 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED !SAMPLED.BY 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED ,MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy SILT Soil Boring SB-02 ML,Sandy Silt depth=2.5 feet LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Liquid Limit Machine,Hand Rolled ASTM D4318 ATTERBERG UMITS ; LIQUID LIMIT DETERMINATION LIQUID LIMIT 0 0 0 0 liquid limit= 31 wet soil+pan weight,g=_ 42.23 38.42 41.71 so% .. plastic limit= 25 dry soil+pan weight,g= 37.35 34.18 36.55 _ 80% plasticity index= 6 pan weight,g= 20:88 20.93 20.75 a 70% N(blows)= 30 20 16 L 6" - = 50% moisture,%= 29.6% 32.0% 32.7% 0 40% SHRINKAGE PLASTIC LIMIT DETERMINATION E 30% ` " = 0 0 0 0 20% shrinkage limit= We wet soil+pan weight,g= 28.44 28.17 0% shrinkage ratio= n/a dry soil+pan weight,g= 26.91 26.71 _ 10 25 100 pan weight,g= 20.72 20.83 number of blows,"N" moisture,%= 24.7% 24.8% ADDITIONAL DATA PLASTICITY CHART - 80 %gravel= 0.0% %sand= 48.8% 70 - %silt and clay= 51.2% ',"U"Line %silt= n/a %clay= n/a 60 moisture content= 28.5% x 50 a - "A"Line c - or CH or OH V 40 - ,r/• In - is a 30 - /' 20 CLOrOL , MN or OH 10 1 ICL•ML 0 ML orOL DATE TESTED I TESTED BY 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 eo 70 80 90 100 06/19/13 M,IR liquid limit — This report may not be reproduced except In full without prior wrfltan authorization by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authortoed signature CWE-s14-r12/09 Geotechnicai a Environmental a Special Inspections 11917 Phone: 6 82 Street,Vancouver, 3-2901 98682 Columbia West Phone:36D=823-29D0, Fax:360=823-2901 www.columbiewestengineerrng.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. . LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S 13-294 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT;DATE . FIELD lD 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB2.6 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED' SAMPLED'BY 06/10/13 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCS SOIL TYPE Sandy SILT Soil Boring SB-02 ML, Sandy Silt depth=20 feet SPECIFICATIONS- AASHTO SOIL TYPE . , none A-4(0) LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Rainhart"Mary Ann" Sifter 637 ASTM D6913, D422 ADDITIONAL DATA • SIEVEDATA initial dry mass(g)= 104.5 . %gravel= 0.0% as-received moisture content= 32.9% coefficient of curvature,Cc= n/a - %sand= 40.9% liquid limit= 0 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a %-silt and clay= 59.1% plastic limit= . 0 effective size,Dow= n/a plasticity index= 0 No)= n/a PERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= n/a D(60.)= 0.077 mm SIEVE SIZE SIEVE I SPECS US .I mm act. I inters. max I min 6.00• 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00• 100.0 100.0% 00 3.00' 75.0 100,0% e..N 1r4 •hhh h 14 a it& ;I ? a V a at Vg 2.50' 63.0 199A% 100% % ,.a %%r,s vas)% • . r % %' % _.--.-e - 100% 2.00' 50.0 100.0% ' Qs 1.75' 45.0 100.0% 90% _ 90% 1.50' 37.5 100.0% 1.25 31.5 100.0% too• 25.0 100.0% 80% _ 80% 0 7/8" 22.4 100.0% . I 3/4' 19.0 100.0% 70% 4 70% 5/8' 16.0 100.0% 1/2' 12.5 100.0% I 3/8" 9.50 100.0% 60% i 60% 1/4' 8.30 100.0% ! e - #4 4.75 100.0% o #8 2.36 99.9% / 50% 50% o. - j #10 2.00 99.9% e - #16 1.18 99:6% 40% 40% #20 0.850 99.5% #30 0.600 99.2% 30% ! 30% 0: #40 0.425 98.8% _ z #50 0.300 96.8% . ' #60 0250 95.8% 20% i i 20% #80 0.180 88.4% _ , #100 0.150 84.4% 10% 10% ., #140 0.106 71.7% #170 0.090 65:8% #200 0.075 59.1% 0% I i 0% DATE TESTED I TESTED BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/14/13 BJR * sieve sizes -0-sieve data G. ' /`R This report may not be reproduced accept in full without prior written authorization by Cobartia West Engineering,Inc COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature CWE-s12-r07/1 Geotechnical a Environmental ■ Special inspections 11917 NE 95"'Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:360.823-2900, Fax:360.8232901 Columbia West www.columbiawestenglneering:com Engineering , I n c PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS REPORT . PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. LAB ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SI3-295 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE FIELD ID 3220 State st. Suite 200 06/20/13 SB3.3 Salem,Oregon 97301 :DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY '06/10/1.3 ASR MATERIAL DATA MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL SOURCE USCSSOIL TYPE Lean CLAY with Sand Soil Boring SB-03 CL,Lean Clay with Sand depth= 15 feet SPECIFICATIONS • AASHTO SOIL TYPE none A-7-6(15) LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Rainhart"Mary Ann" Sifter 637 ASTM D6913, D422 ADDITIONAL DATA 'SIEVE DATA initial dry mass(g)= 105.6 %gravel= 0.7% as-received moisture content= 27.2% coefficient of curvature,Cc= i n/a ' '%sand= 23.0% liquid limit= 41 coefficient of uniformity,Cu= n/a •%silt and clay t= 76.3% plastic limit= 21 effective size,Dow= n/a plasticity index= 20 D(30)= n/a PERCENT PASSING fineness modulus= . n/a DNo1= n/a SIEVE SIZE SIEVE SPECS • US I mm act. I interp. I max I min. 6.00" 150.0 100.0% GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION 4.00' 100.0 100.0% c a S,c� maN L N 6 a WE # l Q a Z1 Eg 2.50' 63.0 100.0% 'V F'IN t��i-i�1wt.� 100% o '° 'eo mm ° o a e� -,,o - 100% 2:00" 50.0 100.0% e o : ° + ° _ 1.75' 45.0 100.0% 90% ® 90% W 1:50' 37.5 100.0% : i> 1:25 31.5 100.0% 80% _ - - 80% 1.00 25.0 100.0% 718" 22.4 100.0% 3/4' 19.0 100.0% • 70% I TO% 5/8" 16.0 100.0% : 112' 12.5 100.0% I '+. - 3/8" 9:50 100.0% 60% i ! _ 60% 114' 6.30 100.0% co c ! #4 4.75 99.3% ca E. 50% .. .. - 50% #8 2.36 :::5% _ #10 2.00 98.3% at #16 1.18 97.3% 40% - _ 40% #20 0.850 96.7% . : - #30 0.600 95.7%-30% I I 30% 0, #40 0.425 94.7% : ;Q #50 0.300 92.7% : h' #60 0.250 91.7% 20% i - t 20% #80 0.180 :+:.2`Yo : ! ! : #100 0.150 86.3% 10% - 100 #140 0.108 81.3% #170 0.090 78.9% _ #200 0.075 76.3% 0% { 0% DATE TESTED, .. TESTED BY 100.00 10.00 1.00 0.10 0.01 particle size(mm) 06/14/13 BJR`� t sieve sizes - 0-sieve data �""-' �---�'�-'�'� This report may not be reproduced except in full athaut prior written authorization by Cotumda West Engineering,Inc COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.iwthor!red signature CWE-s12-r07/12 .Geotechnlcai ...Environmental e-Special Inspectione NE95ei Street,Vancouver,Washington 98682 Columbia West Phone:hone:360523-2900,Fax 360.823-2901 www.calumbiewestengineering.eom E n g ii. n e e r i n g , i n c ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT PROJECT CLIENT - PROJECT NO. ; IA8ID Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 S 13-295 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE FIELD 11) 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/20/13 SB3.3 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED ; SAMPLEDBY, 06/10/13 ASR • MATERIAL DATA • MATERIAL SAMPLED MATERIAL•SOURCE USCS•SOIL TYPE Lean CLAY with Sand Soil Boring SB-03 CL,Lean Clay with Sand depth= 15 feet LABORATORY TEST DATA • LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Liquid Limit Machine,Hand Rolled ASTM D4318 ATTERBERG LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT DETERMINATION UQUID LIMB 0 0 0 0 100% - liquid limit= 41 wet soil+pan weight,g= 42.89 41.22 3832 so% .._..... plastic limit= 21 dry soil+pan weight,g= 36.60 35.27 33.17 80% - - - : .; ° s 20.68 20.70 20.89 To% ....... .. plasticity index= 20 pan weight,g= . N(blows)= 35+ 26 17 60% - I o1 50%moisture,%= 39.5% 40.8% 41.9% . . 40% , SHRINKAGE PLASTIC LIMIT DETERMINATION E 30% '•O 0 ® ® 20% . . .............:.. . 10% i shrinkage limit= n/a welsoil+pan weight,g= 27.25 _ 27.53 0% • shrinkage ratio= n/a dry soil+pan weight,g= 26.11 26.35 10 25 100 pan weight,g= 20.74 20.78 number of blows,"N" moisture,%= 21.2% 21.2% ADDITIONAL DATA PLASTICITY CHART 80 _ %gravel= 0.7% # %sand= 23.0% %silt and•clay= 76.3% - ••"U"Line %silt= n/a •• %clay= n/a 60 - ;" moisture content= 27.2% • 50 a, "A"Line c - CH or OH u 40 `• Z. 30 /• , • - - CL or OL 20 MH or OH 10 / CL.ML _ ML or OL ' r DATE TESTED' TESTED BY 0 10 20 30 40 5o eo 10 80 90 100 06/19/1'3 MJR liquid limit c� -- This report may not be reproduced'except In tug without prior written authorization by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature CWE-s14-r1210 a�„ CO 1111 III a WSS Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360.823-2901 www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c MOISTURE CONTENT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE PAGE 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/18/13 1 of 3 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY 06/10/13 ASR LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Despatch LEB2 ASTM D2216,Method B MOIST DRY CONTAINER LAB ID FIELD ID MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND SOURCE MASS+PAN MASS+PAN MASS MOISTURE,CONTENT OVEN TEMP. S 13-296 S.B 1.7 grayish brown sandy silt/clay 1 87.74 163.35 86.25 31.6% 110 t 5°C Soil Boring SB-01,depth=25 feet S13-297 SB 1.8 grayish brown silty/clayey sand 206.37 178.17 87.20 31.0% 110 t 5°C Soil Boring SB-01,depth=30 feet S13-298 SB1.9 brown sand 207.39 179.93 86.90 29.5% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-01,depth=35 feet S13-299 SB1.10 light brown sandy silt/clay 192.81 169.38 87.72 28.7% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-01,depth=40 feet - S13-300 SB1.11 light brown silty/clayey sand 195.97 165.97 87.06 38.0% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-01,depth=45 feet S 13-301 SB 1.12 light brown silty/clayey sand 195.21 161.00 87.04 46.3% 110#5°C Soil Boring SB-01,depth=50 feet S13-302 SB2.2 light brown silty/clayey sand 201.42 171.65 87.05 35.2% 110 t 5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=5 feet S13-303 SB2.3 brown sand 204.61 175.72 86.69 32.4% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=7.5 feet S13-304 SB2.4 brown sand with silt/clay 208.70 176.42 86.68. 36.0% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth= 10 feet S13-305 SB2.5 brown sand with silt/clay 215.64 186.10 86.88 29.8% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth= 17 feet NOTES: This report may not be reproduced except in full without prior written asilsodzation by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. DATE TESTED TESTED BY 06/14/13 I BJR COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.adhodzed sigsame r..wl=_c 11-rM/1 n . : y.,..., GO 'II a we s Phone:360-823-29000,Fax:366 0823-2901 www.columbiawestengineering.com E n. g i n e e r i n g , I n c MOISTURE CONTENT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE PAGE 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/1.8/13 2 of 3 Salem,Oregon 97301 `DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY 06/10/13 ASR LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 'TEST PROCEDURE Despatch LEB2 ASTM D2216,Method B MOIST DRY CONTAINER LAB.ID FIELD ID MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND SOURCE MASS+PAN MASS+PAN MASS MOISTURE CONTENT OVEN TEMP. S 13-306 SB2.7 brown sand with silt/clay 207.47 179.66 85.64 29.6% 110 t 5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=25 feet S13-307 SB2.8 brown sand 200.43 176.50 87.15 26.8% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=30 feet S13-308 SB2.9 brown sand 202.00 169.60 86.84 39.1% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=35 feet S13-309 SB2.10 brown sand 211.64 182.74 86.96 30.2% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=40 feet S13-310 SB2.11 brown silt/clay with sand 199.98 174.59 85.99 28.7% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=45 feet S13-311 SB2..12 brown silty/clayey sand 199.01 171.68 87.60 32.5% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-02,depth=50 feet S13-312 SB3.2 brown silty/clayey sand 197.75 170.60 86.90 32.4% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-03,depth= 10 feet S 13-313 SB4.1 brown silty/clayey sand 199.99 169.47 86.95 37.0% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-04,depth=5 feet S13-314 SB4.2 brown sand with silt/clay 108.96 84.35 10.50 . 33.3% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-04,depth= 10 feet S13-315 SB4.3 brown sand 115.31 89.70 10.42 32.3% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-04,depth= 15 feet NOTES: • This report may not be reproduced except in fun whhcut prior mitten authorization by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. DATE TESTED I TESTED BY 06/14/13 I BJR COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature r1AUF-e 11-419/1 n Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 CO I I In w ive s www.columbiawestengineering.com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n e MOISTURE CONTENT PROJECT CLIENT PROJECT NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard Parcel Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 Tigard,Oregon Robert Underwood REPORT DATE PAGE 3220 State st.Suite 200 06/18/13 3 of 3 Salem,Oregon 97301 DATE SAMPLED SAMPLED BY 06/10/13 ASR LABORATORY TEST DATA LABORATORY EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURE Despatch LEB2 ASTM D2216,Method B MOIST DRY CONTAINER LAB ID FIELD ID MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND SOURCE MASS+PAN MASS+PAN MASS MOISTURE CONTENT OVEN TEMP. S13-316 SB5.2 brown sand 1 15.64 91.48 10.08 29.7% 110 t 5°C Soil Boring SB-05,depth= 10 feet S13-317 SB5.4 grayish brown sandy silt/clay 111.42 88.61 10.21 29.1% 110±5°C Soil Boring SB-05,depth=20 feet NOTES: This report may not be reproduced except intuit without prior written authorization by Columbia West Engineering,Inc. DATE TESTED TESTED BY 06/14/13 I BJR COLUMBIA WEST ENGINEERING,INC.authorized signature (.WF-c11-x(1711A APPENDIX B EXPLORATION LOGS 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver.Washington 98682 Gboteahniaat•Environmental•spentatinspeotions Phone:36D823�engi Fax.3130-823-2901 2901 Columbia West tMww columblawestenginearing com E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CLIENT PROJECT NO.. BORING NO. I • Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-1 PROJECT LOCATION DRILLINGCONTRACTOR DRILL RIG ENGINEER PAGE NO. Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich B50 Turbo ASR 1 of 2 I BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPLING METHOD STARTOATE START TIME see Figure 2 mud rotary split spoon 6110/13 830 REMARKS APPROX SURFACE ELEVATION GROUND WATER DEPTH FINISH DATE FINISH TIME 206 feet not encountered 6/10/13 1100 Depth Sastile DIM/ SPT Semple USCS Graphic P,_ �4 to oiteu Type Recovery Stow Field ID Depth Sol Lag UTHOLOGIC DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS a""' 0E6E4 Coot Poi) ..- 4•4 :,• Topsoil. Light brown,sandy`SILT with fine roots. _ /iSiiiS CL- MOM Light brown,medium stiff,very moist,sandy SILT with - ML i;i 4S gray mottling and sandy lean CLAY.[Soil Type I] i',i'M I rrrrr� SPT 18 18 3 Lt 2.5 ,,y„s; 32.8 65.2 37 15 3 �r•rr0 /01,111 - 3 iriiiii rirlrri 5— iiiiiiS rrrrrr� SPT IS 18 3 1.2 5 iii0iii 35.1 663 34 7 - 3 rrrrrri rr//r/� rrrrrre rrrrrrr �rii%ii SM .' Brown to gray;loose,very moist to wet,silty SAND. - SPT 18 18 3 1.3 7.5 [Soil Type 2] 30.3 36.5 0 0 4 I_ 10— - .. :• :: _SPT 18 18 3 1.4 10 Light;groundwater seepage observed at 10 feet bgs. 31.0 26.4 0 0 2 I 15— ▪ :: - K•wi;•s —SPT 18 18 3 1.5 17 CL- iiiiiiS Brown,medium stiff to stiff very moist,silty CLAY 29.9 73.7 27 6 �+ :.i.'i� [Soil Type 3] 2 ML with Sand. - i - 7 SP ; Brown to gray,medium dense,wet.clean SAND.[Soil i; ".....;;;:..if..... Tyler 2] Z• 20-- / a SPT 18 18 5 1.6 20 CL Brown,gray,blue,and red,stiff to very stiff very moist, 26.6 71.3 48 27 $ - 7 lean CLAY with Sand.[Soil Type 3] 9 S - 2 25— I $ SPT 1818 5 1.7 25 31.6 J - g L WØ • - re 11917 NE 95th Street Vancouver,Washington 98682 Phone:380}823-29th Fax:360-823-2901 Gcotochniaal+Environmental Spacial Inspacttons wwwcolumbiawestengnneeringcom Columbia West p'sa E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CLIENT PROJECT NO. BORING NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-1 PROJECT LOCATION DRILLING CONTRACTOR DRILL RIG ENGINEER PAGE NO. Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich B50 Turbo ASR 2 of 2 BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPLING METHOD START DATE START TIME see Figure 2 mud rotary split spoon 6/10/13 830 REMARKS APPROX.SURFACE ELEVATION GROUND WATER DEPTH FINISH DATE FINISH TIME 206 feet not encountered 6/10/13 1100 A DePth Sample Drivel SPT 11SCS Graphic its 1 Type Recovery eori Reid ID DePlhg Lag LITHOLOGIC DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS l i" Geed Count (feet) Type SPT 18 18 12 1.8 30 CL , Brown.gray,blue,and red,stiff to very stiff,very moist. 31.0 A 17 lean CLAY with Sand.[Soil Type 3][continued] 35-- -SPT 1818 10 1.9 35 SP 7 ?: Brown to multicolored,dense,moist,poorly graded 29.5 14 SAND.[Soil Type 2] 15 40-- -SPT 18 18 12 1.10 40 ML Light brown to tan,hard,moist,sandy SILT,with thin 28.7 16 iron banded layers and lenses of sand.[Soil Type 1] 20 45— SPT 18 18 6 1.11 45 CL / lied to tan.very stiff,very moist,lean CLAY with sand. 38.0 10 [Soil Type 3] 13 8 c1 --- 5 0 SPT 1818 6 1.12 50 / 46.3 — 7 11 u — Bottom ofborehole at 51.5 feet. Ground water not encountered. — Borehole backfilled with bentonite on 6 10 2013. z 55— a7 • m e'1 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver.Washington 98882 Geotacfinicel a Environmental a Special Inspections Phone:36O 823-29OO.•Fax:380823-2901 vrwwmlu awesreng+nearingz„ Columbia West i E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CLIENT • PROJECT NO. BORING NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-2 PROJECT LOCATION DRILLING CONTRACTOR DRILL RIG ENGINEER ;PAGE NO. Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich B50 Turbo ASR 1 of 2 I BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPLING METHOD START DATE START TIME see Figure 2 mud rotary split spoon 6/10/13 1100 REMARKS APPROK SURFACE ELEVATION GROUND NEATER DEPTH FINISH DATE FINISH TIME 206 feet - not encountered 6/10/13 1330 Depth sample ec°vI SPT sample Sot Gt�hb LITHOLOGIC DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS i►eeq Type Oren)Recovely Field ID D Type log $� a5 F •• *. Topsoil. Light brown,sandy SILT with fine roots. ' ML Light brown,medium stiffvery moist,sandy SILT with – gray mottling.[Soil Type 1] –SPT 1818 2 2.1 2.5 28.5 51.2 31 6 – 3 3 SPT 18 18 2 2.2 5 SM Brown,loose,wet,silty SAND.[Sail Type 2] 35.2 :.V:*; - I –SPT 18 18 2 2.3 7.5 ` ••••• 2 32.4 •.• 10- SPT. 18 18• 2 2.4 10 .•.; t. Light groundwater seepage observed at 10 feet bgs. 36.0 3 5 jai ` -. : .'r� I ///iI CL- w• Bcown,medium stiff to stiff~veq•moist,silty CLAY I – ML iiiii with'Sand.[Soil Type 3] iiiii SPT 18 12 4 23 17 ML Red brown,stiff to very stilt very moist,sandy SILT. 29.8 c – 4 [Soil Type 1] S – 3 6 n 20— SPT 18 18 3 2.6 20 . 32.9 59.t 0 0 I – 10 – 12 S 3 – z 25— I oc 2 SPT 18 18 9 2.7 25 SP • :.7 Brown to multicolored,medium dense to dense.moist. 2.9.6 -r – 10 poorly graded SAND with interlayering of silty 8 16 1:.:,:t• SAND and clean coarse SAND.[Soil Type 2] •'.` a- ,' I 11917 NE 95th Street Vancouver,Washington 98682 GoateeImtc&t•Environmental• Rona 360823.2900,Fax 360.823.2901 Spacial Inspections www.calumbtawestengineeringcom Columbia West iii- Engineering , I n c SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CLIENT PROJECT NO. BORING NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-2 PROJECT LOCATION ORI.UNG CONTRACTOR DRILL RIG ENGINEER PAGE NO. Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich:B50 Turbo ASR. 2 of 2 BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPUNG'taETHO) START DATE START TIME see Figure 2 mud rotary split spoon 6/10/13 1100 REMARKS APPROX SURFACE ELEVATION GROUNDWATER DEPTH FINISH DATE FINISH TIME 206 feet not encountered 6/10/13 1350 DePlh 814/Ple Drivel SPT a _Sol UTFt01 OGIC DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS ii ., (keg Type Remove Blow Reid 10 Depth T Log :9- g •sF (nohesl Count Pet) 1 \ SPT 18 18 12 2.8 30 CL Brown to multicolored,very stiff to hard,very moist. 26.8 — 18 / lean CLAY with Sand.[Soil Type 3] 29 4 35— .ti> SPT 1818 8 2.9 35 SM ,;:4' Brown to multicolored,medium dense to dense,wet, 39.1 8 ..•.• silty SAND.[Soil Type 2] 15 . — ti ti 40-- ":� —SPT 18 18 17 2.10 40 • ..' 30.2 77 ,`r • — •i • i ,':J — `• .:' • 45— :',.. .r —SPT 18 18 9 2.11 45 28.7 ,rte• 9 '• "- — .::: Iti g - • r\ ,50— '� a SPT • 18 t 8© i S 2.12 50 .: 32.5 g — © 25 od — Bottom of borehole at 51.5 feet. es Ground water not encountered. — Borehole bacltfilled with bentonite on 6 10 2013. N 1 55— - 8 P1 (Jy 2' - 1 11917 ME•95th Street,Vancouver,Washington 986B2 Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360823-2901 liaataehnieat■'Envi►onnrontal r Spacial Inspection www.columbiawestengirieecing,com Columbia West ga E n p I n e e r I n g , t h e SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CLIENT PROJECT NO. BORING NO. I Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-3 PROJECT LOCATION DRILLING CONTRACTOR DRILL RIG ENGINEER PAGE NO. Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich 1350 Turbo ASR 1 of 1 BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPLING METHOD START DATE START TIME see Figure 2 hollow stem split spoon 6/10/13 1350 REMARKS APPROX SURFACE'ELEVATION GROUND WATER DEPTH FINISH DATE FINISH TIME 206 feet not encountered 6/10/13 1450 ffi I �i Semple DM! SPT Sample 3� Graphic LITHOLOGIC DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS g�$am'^�, g Oaeg Type (i Count FxtdID its' Type Log PE a s .. .• „,: Topsoil. Light brown,sandy SILT with fine roots. ML Light brown,medium stilt moist,sandy SILT with gray — mottling.[Soil Type I,] — I 5-- SPT ;1818 2 3.1 5 3 I 5 ^ , .s.. SM '.r Brown,loose.moist,silty SAND.[Soil Type 2] 10— ▪ r; I SPT 1818 2 3.2 10 .'` Light groundwater seepage observed at 10 feet bgs. 32.4 7 1 . I I • t w .I,, r)• 15- • SPT 18 18 3 3.3 15 CL 4 Brown to gray,medium stiff to stiff:very moist.lean 27.2 76.3 41 20 i — 7 / CLAY with:sand.[Soil Type 3] 6 8 I ca I u, $ 20— t, SPT 1818 5 3.4 20 z — 7 / $ — Bottom of borehole at 21.5 feet Ground water not encountered. ✓ — • Borehole backf hied with bentonite on 6 10 2013. I J — l 11917 NE 85th Street.Vancouver,Washington 88582 Geotechnical•Environments!•Special inspections Phone:lumbla 36043232900,Fair g.com 2801 Columbia West ! www columfuewesbengineering.com E n t I i n e e r i n g , I n c SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CUENT PROJECT NO BORING NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-4 PROJECT LOCATION DRILUNGCONTRACTOR DRILL RIG " ENGINEER PAGE NO. Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich B50 Turbo ASR I of 1 BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPLING METHOD START DATE START TIME see Figure 2 hollow stem split spoon 6/10/13 1500 REMARKS APPROX.SURFACE ELEVATION GROUND WATER DEPTH FINISH DATE FINISH TIME _ 206 feet not encountered 6/10/13 1550 -Met SPT Sample USCS 31— —v v '` DePth T Sample Recovers Blow FNId ID Depth Sot Groot UTHOI.OGIC DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS ". ' �t � 6.51 YPe c�` cI�`!4 a. f- . ,, Topsoil. Light brown,sandy SILT with fine roots. . ' SM • ."•:•. Brown,loose,wet,silty SAND.[Soil Type 21 , �r 5 r SPT 18 12 3 4.1 5 37.0 5 .:C ' • — .:/h - •...:":A' ice:' - :~ .± 10—SPT 18 12 2 4.2 10 SP '•:'" Brown,loose,wet,fine.SAND.[Soil Type 21 333 4 Light groundwater seepage•observed at 10 feet bgs. ;4 . itL •i i•:L v 15--- •• SPT 18 12 2 4.3 15 --.••1:::..... 32.3 4— K 3 t= ± , - 0 `t 0 20—SPT [8 18 2 4.4 20 , SM :4 Light brown,medium dense,wet,fine silty SAND.[Soil• re — 5 e Type 3] g 5 ,ti,.•J gi — Bottom of borehole at 21.5 feet. to Ground water not encountered. Borehole backfilled with bentonite on 6 10 2013. 2 - 11917 NE 95th Street,Vancouver.Washington 98882 Phone:360$232900,Fax:3605232901 neotechnicet•Environmental a Spacial Inspections www.columbiawestengineering.com Columbia. West pr j+�a E n g i n e e r i n g , I n c rf SOIL BORING LOG PROJECT NAME CLIENT PROJECT NO. BORING NO. Bonaventure Senior Living Bonaventure Senior Housing 13116 SB-5 PROJECT LOCATION DRILLING CONTRACTOR DRILL RIG ENGINEER PACE NO Tigard,Oregon Subsurface Technologies Diedrich B50 Turbo ASR 1 of 1 i BORING LOCATION DRILLING METHOD SAMPLING METHOD START DATE START TIME see Figure 2 hollow stem split spoon • 6/10/13 1600 REMARKS APPROX.SURFACE ELEVATION GROUNDWAATERDEPTH FINISHDATE FINISH TIME ' 206 feet not encountered 6/10/13 1700 i Depth Sample Recopy Moor mew ID. e Sa• l�hb LITHOIOGIC DESCRIPTION'AND REMARKS iig N ,. t i ig LIE ono Ih� Count . (feel) Type a i- _ .... Topsoil. Light brown,sandy SILT with fine roots. ML Light brown,medium stiff very moist,sandy SILT with . gray mottling.[Soil Type 1] -. f 5— .••:,. , SPT 18 12 3 5.1 5 ' SM .;-t; Brown,loose,wet,silty SAND.[SoilType 2] 5 :,f1 C. - :. - :.ti` j .... r 14 'ti SPT 181_ – � 2 S.Z 10 ='+' I:ightground�vater seepage observed at 10 feet bgs. ?9.7 3 •.f i SPT 18 12 2 5.3 15 CL fJ Brown,still;very moist.,lean CLAY with Sand.[Soil s - 5 T>t3] o z - E 2 a o y � g 20- 2 1 5.4 20 f z 29.1 SPT 1818 _ 2 — 8 m J g - Bottom of borehole at 21.5 feet. V. Ground water not encountered. - Boreholetackfilled with bentonite on 6 10 2013. I 0 ' APPENDIX C SOIL CLASSIFICATION INFORMATION SOIL DESCRIPTION AND CLASSIFICATION GUIDELINES Particle-Size Classification ASTM!USCS AASHTO COMPONENT size range sieve size range size range sieve size range Cobbles >75 mm greater than 3 Inches >75 mm greater than 3 inches Gravel 75 mm—4.75 mm 3 inches to No.4 sieve 75 mm—2.00 mm 3 inches to No. 10 sieve Coarse 75 mm—19.0 mm 3 inches to 3/4-inch sieve - - Fine 19.0 mm—4.75 mm 3/4-inch to No.4 sieve - - Sand 4.75 mm—0:075 mm No.4 to No.200 sieve 2:00 mm—0.075 mm No.10 to No.200 sieve Coarse 4.75 mm—2:00 mm No.4 to No.10 sieve 2.00 mm—0.425 mm No.10 to No.40 sieve Medium 2.00 mm—0:425 mm No.10 to No.40 sieve - - Fine 0.425 mm—0:075 mm No.40 to No.200 sieve 0.425 mm—0.075 mm No.40 to No.200 sieve Fines(Silt and Clay) <0.075 mm Passing No.200 sieve <0.075 mm Passing No.200 sieve Consistency for Cohesive Soil POCKET PENETROMETER SPT N-VALUE (UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE CONSISTENCY (BLOWS PER FOOT) STRENGTH,tsf) Very Soft 2 less than 0.25 Soft 2 to 4 0.25 to 0.50 Medium Stiff 4 to 8 0.50 to 1.0 Stiff 8 to 15 1.0 to 2.0 Very Stiff 15.to 30 2.0 to 4.0 Hard 30 to 60 greater than 4.0 Very Hard greater than 60 - Relative Density for Granular Soil SPT N-VALUE RELATIVE DENSITY (BLOWS PER FOOT) Very Loose 0 to 4 Loose 4 to 10 Medium Dense ` 10 to 30 Dense 30 to 50 Very Dense more than 50 Moisture Designations TERM FIELD IDENTIFICATION Dry No moisture. Dusty or dry. Damp Some moisture. Cohesive soils are usually below plastic limit and are • moldable. Moist Grains appear darkened,but no visible water is present. Cohesive soils will clump. Sand will bulk. Soils are often at or near plastic limit. Wet Visible water on larger grains. Sand and silt exhibit dilatancy. Cohesive soil can be readily remolded. Soil leaves wetness on the hand when squeezed. Soil is much wetter than optimum moisture content and is above plastic limit. AASHTO SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TABLE 1.Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Granular Materials Silt-Clay Materials General Classification (35 Percent or Less Passing.075 mm) (More than 35 Percent Passing 0.075) Group Classification A-1 A-3 A-2 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 Sieve analysis,percent passing: 2.00 mm(No.10) - - - 0.425 mm(No.40) 50 max 51 min - - - - - 0.075 mm(No.200) 25 max 10 max 35 max 36 min 36 min 36 min 36 min Characteristics of fraction passing 0.425.mm.(No.401 Liquid limit 40 max 41 min 40 max 41 min Plasticity index 6 max N.P. 10 max 10 max 11 min 11 min General retina as subarade Excellent to aood Fair to poor Note:The placing of A-3 before A-2 is necessary in the left to right elimination process"and does not indicate superiority of A-3 over A-2. TABLE.2.Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Granular Materials Silt-Clay Materials General Classification - (35 Percent or Less Passina 0.075 mm) (More than 35 Percent Passing 0.075 n)m) A-1 A-2 A-7 A-7-5, Grouo-Classification - A-1-a A-1-b A-3 A-2-4 A-2-5 A-2-6 A-2-7 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7-6 Sieve analysis.percent passim: 2.00 mm(No.10) 50 max - - - - - - - - - - 0.425 mm(No.40) 30 max 50 max 51 min - - - - - - - - 0.075 mm(No.200) 15 max 25 max 10-max 35 max 35 max 35 max 35 max 36 min 36 min 36 min 36 min Characteristics of fraction passim 0.425 mm(No.401 ).,iguid limit 40 max 41 min 40 max 41 min 49 max 41 min 40 max 41 mitt plasticity index 6 max N.P. 10 max 10 max 11 min 11 min 10 max 10 max 11 min 11 min Usual types of significant constituent materials Stone fragments, Fine gravel and sand sand Silty or clayey gravel and sand Silty soils Clayey soils General retinas as.subgrade. Excellent to Good Fair to Door Note:Plasticity index of A-7-5 subgroup is equal to or less than LL minus 30.Plasticity index of A-7-6 subgroup is greater than LL minus 30(see Figure 2). AASHTO=American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials II] 3 all l ii g I=ii Si ; pig; �ir i VW V g $T p E 3 T T t 1 11111 11 '1 s t i 1111 1111 iiIII ii y iiii 3J I 1111 WM 3a 33 aaaa mimw s a 3$$ a a ws uwr Net S if £3 $8 mil 1iiiill WI m111) ;HI !Will l 11111111 1111 11111111111111 1111 ? i1111 1111 ♦iiii11 '11111 ♦ •1111 111111 iiii nnuu uunn 1 '/ Itf/i n 1111 L 1111! 1111 II! IYVY I I!! N lg1 Nf oIH� !mil Nf l NxI 7v ffff fff b fff ffff^f fgff b b gg b fff fneb fn _ �gmm flmmmm flmmmm fim�mm f:gmrii ,1 V 7 mn 1/ V N N V N V N V N rp Y N V N V N V N Y N V N V N i uu - 7 / g l v i -g 1 1 €f 1 1 :1 1 1 :1 1 y ;i g g 1 1 a 1. % 3 3 n. H f n y m 1f f II f f f f II f f a f f t7 • • • • ♦ • • • • ♦ • % CC aR F i ni ° g �r E g g � n Eg a v f f v f f v f f v V f l 1 7 V i V 1 V j i _7 i # a x ; z 3 i , a A I R § E i $ 1 § § g e M a .# s b a gg a go a $ m 2 g 2 $ f 2 £ $ 3 f 1 s t i 2 2 t i.. 1 Y $ d b s d g I d d i 1 1 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 i n o n o o n o 0 1 i E i 111 E 1 @ t 1 ! I i 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 i V . v v g • V V - V 'A U . V 1? I eV V '4 i' 1 !.i 2 t) 1 g: 3 3 5 3 3 3 d 1 K U u 1 o 6 I o 7 j 1 il 1 1 1 i 1 1 I M / $ �� ee yy�� $ m s n o s I o h & 7b4 tit; ` v a t v av' a1 S Sa : � S i 1 Si Sa 1 8 31j II ! I I 1 s $ 5 orb is f ff APPENDIX D REPORT LIMITATIONS AND IMPORTANT INFORMATION Gecitachnicei 0 Envinwittw414 a Spatial Moog,,., , Columbia West davi--,.n e t Xi r i g #' I n ` , Date: June 20, 2013 Project: Bonaventure Senior Living Tigard, Oregon Geotechnical and Environmental Report Limitations and Important Information Report Purpose, Use,and Standard of Care This report has been prepared in accordance with standard fundamental principles and practices of geotechnical engineering and/or environmental consulting, and in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill typical of currently practicing local engineers and consultants. This report has been prepared to meet the specific needs of specific individuals for the indicated site. It may not be adequate for use by other consultants, contractors, or engineers, or if change in project ownership has occurred. It should not be used for any other reason than its stated purpose without prior consultation with Columbia West Engineering, Inc. (Columbia West). It is a unique report and not applicable for any other site or project. If site conditions are altered, or if modifications to the project description or proposed plans are made after the date of this report, it may not be valid. Columbia West cannot accept responsibility for use of this report by other individuals for unauthorized purposes, or if problems occur resulting from changes in site conditions for which Columbia West was not aware or informed. Report Conclusions and Preliminary Nature This geotechnical or environmental report should be considered preliminary and summary in nature. The recommendations contained herein have been established by engineering interpretations of subsurface soils based upon conditions observed during site exploration. The exploration and associated laboratory analysis of collected representative samples identifies soil conditions at specific discreet locations. It is assumed that these conditions are indicative of actual conditions throughout the subject property. However, soil conditions may differ between tested locations at different seasonal times of the year, either by natural causes or human activity. Distinction between soil types may be more abrupt or gradual than'indicated on the soil logs. This report is not intended to stand alone without understanding of concomitant instructions, correspondence, communication, or potential supplemental reports that may have been provided to the client. Because this report is based upon observations obtained at the time of exploration, its adequacy may be compromised with time. This is particularly relevant in the case of natural disasters, earthquakes, floods, or other significant events. Report conclusions or interpretations may also be subject to revision if significant development or other manmade impacts occur within or in proximity to the subject property. Groundwater conditions, if presented in this report, reflect observed conditions at the time of investigation. These conditions may change annually, seasonally or as a result of adjacent development. Additional'Investigation and Construction QA/QC Columbia West should be consulted prior to construction to assess whether additional investigation above and beyond that presented in this report is necessary. Even slight variations in soil or site conditions may produce impacts to the performance of structural facilities if not adequately addressed. This underscores the importance of diligent QA/QC construction observation and testing to verify soil conditions do not differ materially or significantly from the interpreted conditions utilized for preparation of this report. Therefore, this report contains several recommendations for field observation and testing by Columbia West personnel during construction activities. Actual subsurface conditions are more readily observed and discerned during the earthwork phase of construction when soils are exposed. Columbia West cannot accept responsibility for deviations from recommendations described in this report or future Geotechnical•Environmental•Special Inspections•Materials Testing 11917 NE 95° Street Vancouver,Washington 98682 •Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 14.1 ,14 columbiawestengmeenng corn Geotechnical and Enwronmema/Report Limitations and Important Info,ynation Page 2 of 2 Columbia West Engineering,Inc. performance of structural facilities if another consultant is retained during the construction phase or Columbia West is not engaged to provide construction observation to the full extent recommended. Collected Samples Uncontaminated samples of soil or rock collected in connection.with this report will be retained for thirty days. Retention of such samples beyond thirty days will occur only at client's request and in return for payment of storage charges incurred. All contaminated or environmentally impacted materials or samples are the sole property of the client. Client maintains responsibility for proper disposal. Report Contents This geotechnical or environmental report should not be copied or duplicated unless in full, and even then only under prior written consent by Columbia West, as indicated in further detail in the following text section entitled Report Ownership. The recommendations, interpretations, and suggestions presented in this report are only understandable in context of reference to the whole report. Under no circumstances should the soil boring or test pit excavation logs, monitor well logs, or laboratory analytical reports be separated from the remainder of the report. The logs or reports should not be redrawn or summarized by other entities for inclusion in architectural or civil drawings, or other relevant applications. Report Limitations for Contractors Geotechnical or environmental reports, unless otherwise specifically noted, are not prepared for the purpose of developing cost estimates or bids by contractors. The extent of exploration or investigation conducted as part of this report is usually less than that necessary for contractor's needs. Contractors should be advised of these report limitations, particularly as they relate to development of cost estimates. Contractors may gain valuable information from this report, but should rely upon their own interpretations as to how subsurface conditions may affect cost, feasibility, accessibility and other components of the project work. If believed necessary or relevant, contractors should conduct additional exploratory investigation to obtain satisfactory data for the purposes of developing adequate cost estimates. Clients or developers cannot insulate themselves from attendant liability by disclaiming accuracy for subsurface ground conditions without advising contractors appropriately and providing the best information possible to limit potential for cost overruns, construction problems; or misunderstandings. Report Ownership Columbia West retains the ownership and copyright property rights to this entire report and its contents, which may include, but may not be limited to, figures, text, logs, electronic media, drawings, laboratory reports, and appendices. This report was prepared solely for the client, and other relevant approved users or parties, and its distribution must be contingent upon prior express written consent by Columbia West. Furthermore, client or approved users may not use, lend, sell, copy, or distribute this document without express written consent by Columbia West. Client does not own nor have rights to electronic media files that constitute this report, and under no circumstances should said electronic files be distributed or copied. Electronic media is susceptible to unauthorized manipulation or modification, and may not be reliable. Consultant Responsibility Geotechnical and environmental engineering and consulting is much less exact than other scientific or engineering disciplines, and relies heavily upon experience,judgment, interpretation, and opinion often based upon media (soils) that are variable, anisotropic, and non-homogenous. This often results in unrealistic expectations, unwarranted claims, and uninformed disputes against a .geotechnical or environmental consultant. To reduce potential for these problems and assist relevant parties in better understanding of risk, liability, and responsibility, geotechnical and environmental reports often provide definitive statements or clauses defining and outlining consultant responsibility. The client is encouraged to read these statements carefully and request additional information from Columbia West if necessary. Geotechnical•Environmental•Special Inspections•Materials Testing 11917 NE 95-Street Vancouver,Washington 98682 •Phone:360-823-2900,Fax:360-823-2901 www calumbiawestengineer ing.cam SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 STANDARD FORM A. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", as modified by Owner and based on AIA Document A201, 2007 edition, is hereby made part of these Specifications as fully as if hereto attached or herein repeated. B. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall read and be governed by them. C. Copies of the General Conditions may be seen at the Owner's corporate office. END OF SECTION MASTER 00700 General Conditions.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 00700 pl of 1 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises the construction of a new Senior Living Facility comprised of Independent Living, Assisted Living, and Memory Care units, connected by a common core building consisting of activity, dining, and administrative spaces. B. Typical Construction consists of wood-frame, type V-A construction up to four stories high with a sloped, composition-shingle roof and a slab on grade. C. Mechanical system consists of individual PTAC or PTHP in each typical units with common spaces typically conditioned with large residential rooftop units and/or small light commercial roof top units. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENT SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Base Bid&Alternate Bids: Section 01200 1.3 WORK BY OTHERS UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT A. Concurrently with Work of this Contract: None Identified 1.4 WORK PERFORMED BY OWNER A. Concurrently with Work of this Contract: B. Products furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor: 1. Appliances where indicated on Drawings as OFCI 1. Equipment where indicated on Drawings as OFCI 2. Other Work identified on Drawings as Owner Furnished& Contractor Installed(OFCI) C. Products furnished and installed by Owner: 1. Telephones 2. Television Sets 3. Computers 4. Furniture 5. Equipment not included in this Contract 6. Other Work identified on Drawings as Owner Furnished&Owner Installed (OFOI) 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. Except as otherwise stipulated above, Contractor will have complete and exclusive use of the Premises for the execution of the Work. MASTER 01110 summary of work.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01110 p 1 of 4 • B. If and where necessary and when directed,move any stored Products, Equipment, or Vehicles which are under Contractor's control, and which interfere with operations of Owner or separate Contractor. C. Obtain and pay for any necessary additional Storage or Work Areas at no additional cost to Owner. D. Contractor shall conduct his operations as to insure the least reasonable inconvenience to the General Public. 1.6 WORK WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY A. The Contractor shall obtain any required Right-Of-Way Work Permits,pay Permit Fees, and comply with governing Regulatory Agency requirements, including providing any additional Insurance required by Public Authority. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FURNISHED BY OWNER& INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. In compliance with approved Construction Progress Schedule: 2. Arrange for and deliver necessary Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 3. Arrange and pay for Product delivery to Site. 4. Deliver Supplier's Bill of Materials to Contractor. 5. Inspect Product deliveries jointly with Contractor. 6. Submit claims for transportation damage. 7. Arrange for replacement of damaged,defective,missing, or otherwise unacceptable Items. 8. Arrange for required Manufacturer's inspections, service,bonds,and warranties. B. Contractor's.Responsibilities: 1. Designate in Construction Schedule delivery date for each Product. 2. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Notify Architect about any discrepancies or problems anticipated in Product installation or use. 3. Receive Product and unload at Project Site. 4. Inspect Product jointly with Owner. Record any damage, shortage, or defect. 5. Protect Products against damage and discoloration. 6. Assemble, install,connect, adjust, and finish Products as stipulated in respective Specification Sections. 7. Clean, repair and touch-up,or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled,discolored,or damaged by Contractor. 2.2 PROTECTING EXISTING UTILITIES MASTER 01110 summary of work.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01110 p2 of 4 A. Drawings indicate approximate location of any known, concealed Utility Lines. Before starting work, Contractor shall determine exact location of any of these Lines that could be damaged by Contract Work. B. Contractor shall assume that other unknown Utility Lines do exist,and Contractor shall proceed with caution when working in areas that could conceal unknown Utilities. If such Utility Lines are encountered, immediately request disposition instructions from Architect. C. If Utility Lines are damaged,remove, repair, or replace Lines as directed. Additional compensation and/or extensions of time, if any, caused by removing,repairing, or replacing Lines will be determined in accordance with General Conditions. 2.3 RESPONSE TIME FOR CORRECTING NON-COMPLYING WORK A. Contractor's response to notice of Work to be Corrected shall be accomplished during the following time periods: 1. Emergency Work: a. Failures or deficiencies constituting immediate danger or health hazard to People or likely damage to Property. b. Response Time: 24 hours per day 7 days per week 2. Urgent Work: c. Failures or deficiencies which do not immediately endanger Persons or Property,but would soon do so if not corrected. d. Response Time: Between 7:00 AM&4:00 PM on Mondays thru Fridays and within 3 calendar days following receipt of Notice. 3. Routine Work: e. Failures or deficiencies of less importance that do not meet criteria of Emergency or Urgent Work. f. Response Time: Between 7:00 AM& 4:00 PM on Mondays thru Fridays and within 5 calendar days following receipt of Notice. END OF SECTION MASTER 01110 summary of work.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01110 p3 of 4 MASTER 01110 summary of work.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01110 p4 of 4 DESIGNATED DESIGN-BUILD REOUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION SCOPE A. Certain Work Components of this Project have not been designed or detailed by the Architect or the Architect's Consultants, and the Components must be designed,engineered,and built by the Contractor. B. Design-Build Components are defined as either or both of the following: 1. Complete and operational Systems that perform their intended use. 2. Structural Elements which will be subject to Lateral or Vertical Loads. C. The Contractor shall coordinate and assume (or assign to Subcontractor) complete responsibility for design, engineering, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and installation of this Work. D. Prior to starting Work, the Contractor shall submit all Design-Build documents to the governing building department or other authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for review and approval. Each Design-Build item may require a separate Permit and Fee,which shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.2 DESIGN-BUILD COMPONENTS OF THE WORK A. Plywood Web Joists: Section 06174 B. Plate Connected Wood Trusses: Section 06176 C. Glue-laminated Structural Wood Units: Section 06180 D. Ceiling Suspension Systems: Sections 09100& 09500 E. Elevators: Section 14200 F. Fire Sprinkler System: Division 15 G. Fire Alarm Systems: Division 15 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with AHJ requirements. B. Include design criteria, design assumptions, structural calculations, fabrication and construction details,required clearances, and interface requirements. C. Affix appropriate Design Professional's valid seal on all Submittals. 1.4 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will not pay for progress delays, additional Work, additional products, restocking, or reworking required by Contractor's failure to coordinate Design-Build Work with other Project Work. END OF SECTION MASTER 01115 design build regts.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01115 p1 of 1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Conditions: Section 00700 B. Supplementary Conditions: Section 00800 C. Summary of Work: Section 01110 D. Contract Closeout: Section 01770 1.2 FORMAT&DATA REQUIRED A. Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, together with Continuation Sheets AIA Document G703. B. Forms can be ordered from: 1. American Institute of Architects; P.O. Box 60; Williston,VT 05495-0060; (800) 365-2724 2. Local AIA Chapters 1.3 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information. 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on Continuation Sheets. 3. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of Contracting Firm. B. Continuation Sheets: 1. Identify each major item of Work by number and title matching those listed in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 2. Fill in scheduled Dollar Value for each Item. 3. Fill in Dollar Value in each Column for each scheduled Line Item when Work has been performed or Products stored. 4. Round off Values to nearest dollar. 5. List each Change Order,executed prior to date of submission, at end of Continuation Sheets. Include Change Order Number and brief description. MASTER 01295 applications for payment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p1 of 3 1.4 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. Submit,when requested by Architect, to justify Line Item amounts. 1.5 PAYMENT FOR PRODUCTS STORED OFF THE PROJECT SITE A. When delay or added cost to Owner can be avoided by storing Products off Site, Owner will make payment to Contractor for said Products provided that Contractor shall: 1. Locate Storage Facilities within 10 miles of Project Site. 2. Make Storage Facilities available for Architect's visual inspection. 3. Segregate and label Stored Products for specified Project. 4. Assume all risk for loss. 5. Assume responsibility for exceeding Product"shelf life". 6. Protect Stored Products and provide applicable Insurance against their damage,discoloration, and theft, naming the Owner and any Mortgagee as Additional Insureds. 7. Submit itemized Inventory and Schedule of Values for Stored Products together with Certificate of Insurance. 8. Submit payment requests to Owner as part of Contractor's regular Progress Payment Request. 9. Reimburse Owner for damages sustained if Stored Products are not delivered to Jobsite when needed. 10. Submit to Owner,with copy to Architect, a written Waiver of Lien insuring Owner against claims for unpaid Storage Costs. 11. Upon receipt of payment from Owner prepare and issue to Owner, with a copy for Architect and any Mortgagee, a Bill of Sale for Stored Products. (See required Bill of Sale Form bound hereinafter.) 1.6 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. On or before 24th day of month for which payment is due: 1. Submit Application for Payment to Architect's Representative. B. On or before 8th day of month following submittal of approved Application: 1. Until Substantial Completion, Owner will pay Ninety-five Percent (95%)of value of Work acceptably performed, and of materials stored as defined in General Conditions during the previous month, as estimated by Architect. C. Upon execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion: 1. Balance due under Contract will be paid, excluding Retainage Amount of at least double the estimated value of uncompleted and/or unacceptable portions of Work, or$5,000.00,whichever is the greater amount. MASTER 01295 applications for payment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 3 D. 30 days after final inspection and acceptance by Owner: 1. Balance due under Contract will be paid, provided Work be then fully completed and Contract be then fully performed. 1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect at times stipulated above. B. Required Application Copies with each Submittal: 3 C. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate for Payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor. END OF SECTION MASTER 01295 applications for payment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p3 of 3 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01110 B. Project Meetings: Section 01315 C. Progress Schedules: Section 01320 D. Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Samples: Section 01330 E. Temporary Facilities: Section 01500 F. Cutting& Patching: Section 01730 G. Cleaning: Section 01740 H. Contract Closeout: Section 01770 1.2 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION& START-UP A. Establish on-site Lines of Authority and Communications including the following: 1. Preconstruction Meeting and Progress Meetings as specified in Section 01315. 2. Establish procedures for Intra-project Communications including: 3. Submittals 4. Reports& Records 5. Recommendations 6. Coordination Drawings 7. Schedules 8. Resolution of Conflicts 9. Contract Documents Interpretation: 10. Consult with Architect to obtain interpretation 11. Assist in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise 12. Transmit written interpretations to Subcontractors and to other concerned parties 13. Permits&Approvals: 14. Verify that Subcontractors have obtained required Permits and Inspections for Work and for Temporary Facilities. 15. Control use of Site: 16. Supervise Field Engineering and Project Layout. 17. Allocate Field Office Space and Work and Storage Areas for use of each Subcontractor. 1.3 COORDINATING SUBCONTRACTORS' WORK A. Coordinate the Work of all Subcontractors and make certain that, where the Work of one Trade is dependent upon the Work of another Trade,the Work MASTER 01310 project coordination.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p 1 of 3 first installed is properly placed, installed, aligned, and finished as specified or required to properly receive subsequent Materials applied or attached thereto. B. Direct Subcontractors to correct defects in Substrates they install when Subcontractors of subsequent Materials have a reasonable and justifiable • objection to such surfaces. C. Do not force Subcontractors to apply or install Product over improperly installed or improperly finished Substrate that would result in an unsatisfactory or unacceptable finished Product. 1.4 COORDINATING WORK WITH OWNER'S WORK A. Coordinate,and make certain that,where Work of either party is dependent upon the other party, the Work first performed is properly placed, installed, aligned, and finished as required to permit the proper installation of the following Work. B. If the Owner's Work in any way interferes with the Contractor's Work, so notify the Owner sufficiently in advance so that the Owner has reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. C. If the Contractor's Work in any way interferes with the Owner's Work, so notify the Owner as soon as possible. If the Contractor's Work must be modified to accommodate the Owner's Work,the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time will, when necessary,be adjusted by a Change Order. 1.5 COORDINATING WORK WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS' WORK A. Coordinate, and make certain that,where Work of either party is dependent upon the other party, the Work first performed is properly placed, installed, aligned, and finished as required to permit the proper installation of the following Work. B. If Other Contractors' Work in any way interferes with this Contractor's Work, so notify Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance so that the Owner has reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. C. If this Contractor's Work in any way interferes with Other Contractors' Work, so notify Owner's Representative as soon as possible. If this Contractor's Work must be modified to accommodate Other Contractors' Work, the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time will, when necessary,be adjusted by a Change Order. 1.6 CLOSE-OUT DUTIES A. Mechanical &Electrical Equipment start-up: 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01750. B. At completion of Work of each Subcontract,conduct inspection to assure that: 1. Work is acceptable. 2. Specified cleaning has been accomplished. 3. Temporary Facilities and Debris have been removed from Site. MASTER 01310 project coordination.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 3 C. Substantial Completion: 1. Conduct inspection and prepare list of Work to be completed or corrected. 2. Assist Architect in inspection. 3. Supervise correction and completion of Work as established in Architect's Inspection Reports. D. Final Completion: 1. Assist Architect in inspection. 2. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01770: END OF SECTION • MASTER 01310 project coordination.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p3 of 3 SECTION 01315 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING: A. Owner's Representative will: 1. Schedule Meeting 2. Make physical arrangements for Meeting 3. Prepare Meeting Agenda 4. Preside at Meeting 5. Record, reproduce,and distribute copies of Minutes to: a. Meeting participants b. Parties affected by decisions made at Meeting 1.2 PERIODIC PROGRESS MEETINGS AND SPECIALLY CALLED MEETINGS THROUGHOUT THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK: A. Contractor shall: 1. Prepare Meeting agenda 2. Distribute Notice of each Meeting four days in advance of Meeting date 3. Make physical arrangements for Meetings 4. Preside at Meetings 5. Record Meeting minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Reproduce and distribute copies of Minutes within 3 days after each Meeting to each of the following: 7. All Meeting participants 8. All parties affected by decisions made at Meeting 9. Architect 10. Owner's Representative • B. Representatives of Contractor, Subcontractors,and Suppliers attending Meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. C. Architect, other Design Consultants, and Owner's Representative may attend Meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and Construction Schedules. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01110 B. Construction Schedules: Section 01320 1.4 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: Central site,convenient for all parties, designated by Owner's Representative. MASTER 01315 project meetings.doc 7/1 9/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01315 pi of 3 C. Required Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative 2. Architect 3. Design Consultants 4. Contractor's Superintendent 5. Major Subcontractors 6. Major Suppliers 7. Others as appropriate D. Minimum Agenda: 1. Identify Owner's&Contractor's authorized Representatives 2. Distribution and discussion of a. List of major Subcontractors and Suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 3. Critical work sequencing -4: Major Equipment deliveries and priorities 5. Project coordination 6. Designation of responsible personnel 7. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment 8. Adequacy of Contract Documents distribution 9. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 10. Use of premises: a. Office, Staging, Storage,and Work areas. b. Owner's requirements 11. Construction Facilities,Controls, and Construction Aids. 12. Temporary Utilities 13. Safety and First-aid procedures 14. Hazardous Materials 15. Security procedures 16. Housekeeping procedures 17. Product recycling& Waste management 18. Laboratory Testing Services 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. When appropriate,meetings shall be held at the Jobsite to coordinate the Work, answer questions, and resolve problems. B. The following shall attend: 1. General Contractor's Superintendent 2. Mechanical Contractor's Superintendent 3. Electrical Contractor's Superintendent 4. Others with interest in Project may attend and shall attend when invited. C. Minimum Agenda: MASTER 01315 project meetings.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01315 p2 of 3 1. Review and approval of previous meeting Minutes 2. Review Work progress since previous meeting 3. Field observations, problems,conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule 5. Review off-site fabrication and delivery schedules 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule 8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards 12. Pending changes and substitutions 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other Project Contracts 14. Other business 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When specified in individual Specification Section, convene Pre-installation Conference at Project site prior to commencing work. B. Require attendance of those specified. C. Notify Architect at least 4 days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare Agenda,preside at Conference, and record and distribute Minutes. E. Minimum Agenda: 1. Contract Documents 2. Options 3. Related Change Orders 4. Products purchase, delivery, storage, & handling. 5. Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Samples,when required. 6. Compatibility of Products 7. Possible conflicts 8. Effects of Work on Progress Schedule 9. Weather limitations 10. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations 11. Acceptability of Substrate 12. Temporary Facilities 13. Work space and access 14. Governing regulations 15. Safety 16. Inspection and testing requirements 17. Maintenance requirements 18. Protection END OF SECTION MASTER 01315 project meetings.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01315 p3 of 3 SECTION 01320 PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Prepare and submit to Architect estimated Progress Schedules for the Work, with Sub-schedules of Related Activities which are essential to its progress. B. Revise Schedules when appropriate. C. If Contractor fails to deliver Schedule on time or properly update Schedule, Architect may withhold Progress Payment approval until such time as Contractor complies with these requirements. D. If, in Architect's opinion, Work progress falls behind approved Schedule, Contractor shall take necessary action to regain lost time. Contractor shall increase Work amount,or number of shifts, or establish overtime operations, or all three, and submit for review Schedule revisions in which progress rate will be regained, all without additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor's failure to comply with these requirements shall be grounds for determination that Contractor is not prosecuting Work with such diligence as will insure Project completion within specified time. Upon such determination Owner may terminate Contractor's right to proceed with Work, or any separable part thereof, in accordance with General Conditions. F. The Contractor and all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers shall schedule material deliveries and installations to conform to the Schedule, and provisions to this effect shall be included in all Subcontracts. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01110 B. Project Meetings: Section 01315 1.3 SCHEDULES A. Form: Bar Graph B. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify first Work Day of each Week. C. Scale and Spacing: Allow space for notations and future revisions. D. Headings: Include separate heading for each Specification Section Title and Section Number listed in Project Manual Table of Contents. 1.4 SCHEDULE CONTENTS A. Construction Activities: 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, including any Work performed by Owner. MASTER 01320 progress schedule.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01320 pl of 2 2. Show dates for beginning, and completion,of each major element of Work. B. Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: 1. Show dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. Show dates Submittals will be required for Owner-furnished Products. 3. Show dates Approved Submittals will be required from the Architect. C. Products Delivery Schedule: Show delivery dates for Products furnished by Owner. 1.5 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each Activity up to date of each Schedule submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous Schedule submission, including the following: 1. Major changes in scope - 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a Narrative Report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and related impact on Schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended,and expected effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other Prime Contractors. 1.6 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Schedule by or before Pre-construction Conference. B. Architect will review Schedules and return Review Copy within 10 days after receipt. Architect's review will be for Schedule Format and Content only, and will not include Schedule"achievability", which is Contractor's responsibility. C. If required, resubmit within 7 days after return of Review Copy. D. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. E. Submit 2 approved opaque copies of each submission for Architect's permanent use. 1.7 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of Schedules to: 1. Jobsite file 2. Subcontractors 3. Architect 4. Owner's Representative 5. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by projections shown in Schedules. END OF SECTION MASTER 01320 progress schedule.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01320 p2 of 2 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 EXTENT OF WORK: A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples only for those Items specifically required. The Architect will not be obligated to review Shop Drawings,Product Data, or Samples other than those required by the Contract Documents. B. Incomplete Submittals will be returned without review. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Definitions, and additional requirements.; see Gene ra l Conditions, Section 00700. 1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE: A. Designate in Construction Schedule, or in separate coordinated Schedule, submission dates and dates that reviewed Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples will be needed. 1.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Identify Shop Drawing Details by reference to Drawing Sheet, Detail, Schedule, or Room Number shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Sheet Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inch, or folded to that size to facilitate filing. B. Product Data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent Products. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and required clearances. 4. Show wiring and piping diagrams, and controls. 5. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 6. Modify to delete information not applicable to Work. 7. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to Work. C. Samples: 1. Size&Quantity: See respective Specification Sections. 2. Show full range of color, texture and pattern. 3. Deliver to Architect's office, unless otherwise specified, 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review and approve Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: MASTER 01330 submittals.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01330 p 1 of 3 • 1. Field measurements 2. Product Quantities 3. Field construction criteria 4. Catalog numbers and similar data 5. Conformance with Specifications C. Comply with Contract Documents. D. Coordinate each Submittal with requirements of Work. E. Notify Architect in writing, at submission time, of any deviations in Submittals from Contract Document requirements. F. Perform no Work or Fabrication requiring Submittal until Architect approves Submittal. 1.6 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Including attached Submittal Transmittal (CSI Form 12.1A);make submittals promptly in accordance with approved Progress Schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no Work delay. B. Quantity of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit 2 opaque copies for Architect's review(4 copies when Architect's Consultants'review is required). Architect will return 1 copy with comments and corrections. Contractor shall resubmit 2 copies of corrected Drawings for Architect's permanent files. 2. Product Data: Submit sufficient copies for Contractor's needs,plus 2 copies which will be retained by Architect. 3. Samples: Submit quantity stated in respective Specification Section. C.' Submittal shall contain: 1. Project Title and names of Contractor, Supplier, and Manufacturer, all visible when Drawings are folded. 2. Project identification complete with Specification Section number. 3. Field measurements clearly identified as such. 4.. Applicable Standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Identification of resubmittal revisions. 7. At least 6x8 inch space on each page for Contractor's and Architect's Approval Stamps. 8. Contractor's Stamp, signed and certifying that Products, field measurements, field construction criteria, and information submitted has been reviewed and accepted by Contractor as accurate and conforming with Contract Documents. Submittals not bearing Contractor's signed Approval Stamp will be returned unreviewed. 1.7 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Architect and resubmit until approved. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: MASTER 01330 submittals.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01.330 p2 of 3 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Identify any changes made other than those requested by Architect. C. Samples: D. Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.8 ARCHITECT'S RES'PONS'IBILITIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. B. Affix signature and indicate approval, or requirements for resubmittal. C. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission. 1.9 ARCHITECT-FURNISHED COMPUTERIZED DATA A. Upon 48 hour advance notice,Architect will make 1 copy of Architect's Computerized Data showing related portions of Architect's Drawings,available for Contractor's and Subcontractors' use for the preparation of Shop Drawings. B. Delivery Method: Disk or E-Mail C. Cost to Contractor(Payable to Architect): None D. Liability: E. To the best of the Architect's belief and understanding, the submitted information is accurate, however the Architect makes the Data available as a convenience to the Contractor, and the Architect does not guarantee the accuracy of the Drawings or the Dimensions thereon. The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of the furnished information. END OF SECTION MASTER 01330 submittals:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01330 p3 of 3 SECTION 01420 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS&STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1,1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Conditions: Section 00700 B. Supplementary Conditions: Section 00800 1.2 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS & STANDARDS A. Products or workmanship specified by Referenced Specification or Standard shall comply with requirements of the Specification or Standard, except when more rigid requirements are noted on Drawings, or are specified herewith,or are required by governing Codes. B. Should Referenced Specification or Standard conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Architect before proceeding with Work. C. Contractual relationships of Parties to Contract shall not be altered from those described in Contract Documents by mention or inference in Referenced Specifications or Standards. D. Except where a specific date is specified, the date of the Referenced Specification or Standard is that in effect as of the date of the Owner- Contractor Agreement. 1.3 TRADE ASSOCIATION REFERENCES A. See specific Specification Sections. 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway&Transportation Officials 444 North Capital Street,N.W. Washington, D.C. 20001 (202)624-5800 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Equal Employment Opportunity Commission U.S. Dept. of Justice U.S. Government Printing Office Mail Stop: SSOP Washington D.C. 20402-9328 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1819 L St.NW- Suite 600 Washington DC 20036 (202)293-8020 MASTER 01420 reference standards.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01420 p1 of 3 REGULATORY AGENCIES REFERENCES (Cont.) • ASA American Standards Association (Now known as ANSI: See above) ASTM ASTM International Formerly known as American Society for Testing& Materials 100 Barr Harbor Dr. West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 (610) 832-9585 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission National Injury Information Clearinghouse 5401 Westbard Ave. Rm. 625 Washington, DC 20207 (301)492-6580 CS Commercial Standards Commodities Division Department of Commerce Washington, D.C. 20006 EPA US Environmental Protection Agency Region 10-The Pacific Northwest 1200 Sixth Ave. Seattle, WA 98101 (206) 553-1200 FM Factory Mutual Engineering&Research Corp 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood,MA 02062 (617) 762-4300 Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications of US General Services Administration Specifications&Consumer Information Distribution Sect. (WFSIS) Washington Navy Yard,Bldg. 197 Washington, D.C. 20407 IBC International Building Code published by International Code Conference(ICC) 5203 Leesburg Pike- Suite 708 Falls Church, VA 22041 IMC International Mechanical Code published by ICC (See IBC above) MASTER 01420 reference standards.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01420 p2 of 3 IPC International Plumbing Code published by ICC (See IBC above) NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters 85 John Street New York,NY 10017 NBS National Bureau of Standards U.S. Dept. of Commerce Quince Orchard& Clopper Rds. Gaithersburg, MD 20878 (301)975-2000 NEC National Electric Code published by National Fire Protection Association (see NFPA below) NFPA National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02169 (617) 770-3000 OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration 200 Constitution Ave.NW-Room N3468 Washington, DC 20210 (202)693-2020 PS Product Standards of Commodities Division Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 USAS United States of America Standards Institute (Now known as ANSI: See above) UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 272-8800 END OF SECTION MASTER 01420 reference standards.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01420 p3 of 3 01450 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Testing Laboratory Services: Section 01453 1.2 EXTENT OF WORK A. Contractor shall implement and maintain aggressive Quality Control Program conforming to the following requirements: 1. Monitor quality of all Work, including that of Subcontractors and Service Providers, to ensure that Work complies with Contract Documents. 2. Include compliance with currently approved Progress Schedule. 3. Include continuing inspections of Work. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: A. Prior to submission to Architect, and in compliance with requirements specified in Section 01330,review and approve Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for compliance with Contract Documents. B. Prior to starting Work,review appropriate Contract Drawings& Specifications, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Contract Modifications, as well as affected Existing Conditions. C. Work closely and cooperate with Architect, attend required Meetings,and execute decisions reached by Architect. D. Assign and maintain at Jobsite, Supervisory Personnel acceptable to Owner, who have authority to act in Contractor's behalf at all times Work is being performed, including any Overtime Periods. E. Schedule and coordinate inspections and tests with Regulatory Agency Inspectors and with Testing Agency Personnel. F. Submit to Architect and Owner's Representative signed Reports of Inspections and Tests made by Building Officials, Special.Inspectors,and any others performing inspections or tests. G. Schedule and coordinate required Pre-Installation Conferences.. H. Assure that Record Documents, including those prepared by Subcontractors, are accurately maintained and up to date. I. Schedule and coordinate specified System and Equipment demonstrations and training sessions for Owner's Personnel. J. Make final inspections with Subcontractors of all Work to determine that Work is in compliance with Contract Documents. Prior to calling for Architect's and Owner's Substantial Completion and Final Inspections, verify that Work MASTER 01450 quality control.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01450 p of 2 deficiencies discovered during Contractor's inspections have been satisfactorily corrected. K. Unless otherwise directed,accompany Architect and Owner during their inspections. L. Coordinate final closeout procedures,including those of Subcontractors,to assure compliance with procedures specified in Section 01770. END OF SECTION MASTER 01450 quality control.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01450 p2 of 2 SECTION 01453 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations,and orders of Public Authorities; See General Conditions: Section 00700. B. Product Certification: See respective Specification Sections. C. Equipment testing,adjusting, and balancing: See respective Specification Sections. 1.2 COSTS A. Paid by Owner: 1. For Testing Laboratory services specified in this Section. 2. For Code-required Special Inspections of Masonry, Welding, Bolting, Epoxy Anchoring, and Concrete Placing. B. Paid by Contractor: 1. For retesting required because of defective Work or ill-timed notices, and for reinspections. 1.3 LABORATORY'S QUALIFICATIONS 1.4 INDEPENDENT LABORATORY ACCEPTABLE TO ARCHITECT AND BUILDING OFFICIAL. A. Meet"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," latest edition,published by American Council of Independent Laboratories; 1725 K Street,N.W.;Washington,D.C. 20036. B. Meet ASTM E-329 latest edition, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing agencies for Concrete and Steel as used in Construction". 1.5 LABORATORY'S DUTIES A. Provide qualified Personnel for specified inspections, sampling, and testing. B. Ascertain and certify compliance with Contract Documents. C. When requested by Architect,provide interpretation of Test results. D. Promptly submit written Inspection& Test Reports to: 1. Owner's Representative 2. Building Official 3. Contractor 4. Architect E. Additionally, submit copies of the following Reports to: MASTER 01453 testing laboratory services.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 011453 p1 of 4 1. Tested Earthwork: Geotechnical Engineer 2. Tested Asphaltic Concrete: Civil Engineer 3. Tested Structural Work: Structural Engineer F. Include the following in Test Reports: 1. Date issued 2. Project title, location,and Building Permit number. 3. Testing Laboratory name and address 4. Inspector's name 5. Date of inspection or sampling 6. Record of temperature and weather 7. Date of test 8. Identification of Product tested 9. Test location in Project 10. Type of inspection or test 11. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents G. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release,revoke,alter, or enlarge on Contract Documents requirements. 2. Approve or accept any portion of Work 3. Assume any duties of Contractor 4. Stop Work 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with Laboratory Personnel, and provide access to Work and to Manufacturer's operations. B. Provide to Laboratory representative samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. C. Furnish casual labor and facilities: 1. For access to Work to be tested 2. To obtain and handle Test Samples at Site 3. To facilitate inspections and tests 4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of Test Samples until removed to Laboratory D. Notify Laboratory at least 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for Personnel assignments and Test scheduling. E. Repair any Test Holes to match original conditions. 1.7 LIABILITY A. Laboratory service is provided for Owner's self-assurance, and does not relieve Contractor's responsibility to comply with Contract Documents. PART 2 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS 2.1 EARTHWORK DENSITY A. Method: Nuclear Gauge MASTER 01453 testing laboratory services.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 011453 p2 of 4 B. Provide Tests for each layer of Fill and Backfill placed in any 1 day, for Pavement Beds in cuts, if any, and for any Earthwork Construction which will support Finished Surfaces or Structures. • 2.2 ASPHALT PAVEMENT A. Conduct 1 test for each 20,000 sq. ft., or less, of Pavement placed in any 1 day as follows: 1. Compacted Base Rock field-density using Nuclear Gauge. 2. Placement Tests to determine Asphalt-Cement content, gradation of Aggregate,Voids,Temperature, and Marshall Stability of Mix. 3. Finished product Core Sample to check Compaction and Voids. 2.3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE A. Test Samples shall be taken at the following locations: B. At Pumped Concrete, if any: At Pump Hose discharge end C. At Rotary Mixer: At Mixer Chute discharge end D. Test Concrete Slump as follows: E. Follow ASTM C-143 and C-172. F. Prepare tests from same batch as that employed in preparing Strength-test Specimens,unless otherwise directed. G. If Measured Slump falls outside specified limits retest immediately from another portion of same load. In event of second failure Concrete shall be considered as failing Specification requirements. 2.4 TEST CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AS FOLLOWS: A. Follow ASTM C-31, C-39,and C-172. B. Prepare not less than 5 Test Cylinders for each 100 cu. yds. or less for each strength of Concrete cast in any 1 day. C. Test-break two Cylinders at 7 days of age, two at 28 days, and remaining Cylinder if and when directed to do so. D. If any set of two Cylinders does not develop full design strength at 28 days of age, Cores and Load-testing may be called for. All Coring and Load-testing costs shall be paid by Contractor. 2.5 TEST CONCRETE AIR-CONTENT AS FOLLOWS: A. Follow ASTM C-231. B. Test each Cylinder containing Air-Entrainment. 2.6 MASONRY A. Mortar: MASTER 01453 testing laboratory services.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 011453 p3 of 4 1. Test Method: 'UBC Std 21-16 2. Test Specimens: Four 2 inch diameter by 4 inch long Cylinders for each 2000 sq. ft. of Masonry 3. Cylinder-Breaking: 2 at 7 days of age, and unless otherwise directed, remainder at 28 days of age. B. Compressive.Strength Prisms: 1. Test Method: UBC Std 21-17 2. Minimum Prism Compressive Strength: 1500 psi C. Grout: 1. Test-Method: UBC Std 21-18 2. Test Specimens: 4 Cubes approximately 3x3x6 inches for each 20 cu. yds. of Grout 3. Cube Breaking: 2 at 7 days of age,and unless otherwise directed, remainder at 28 days of age. 2.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Inspection at Fabrication Shop and Jobsite as follows: B. Qualification of Bolting and Welding procedures and personnel. C. Inspection of Specification conformance of fabricated Structural Steel Members and Assemblies. 2.8 TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT A. At least 5 days after Repellent application,conduct Rilem Uptake Tests as follows: B. Minimum Tests per each 500 sq. ft. of Treated Surface: 1 C. Minimum Test Duration: 20 minutes D. Maximum Absorption Rate per Test: 0.5 ml or at least 90% improvement over Untreated Sample. 2.9 CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB MOISTURE&VAPOR CONTENT A. At 30 days and at 5 days prior to Flooring placement, and in accordance with ASTM F-1869,determine Moisture-content and Vapor-emission rate of Concrete to receive Flooring. END OF SECTION MASTER 01453 testing laboratory services.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 011453 p4 of 4 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES AND REGULATIONS. A. Pay any required Fees or Easement Assessments. B. Enforce safe and sanitary practices. C. Maintain clean Facilities. D. Prevent wasteful Utility uses. E. Should Owner occupy part of Facility, Owner will pay Owner's proportional Utility cost. 1.3 PROJECT SIGN A. Owner will furnish Sign for installation by Contractor(OFIC). B. Locate Sign Board where directed by Owner, and secure to 2 nominal 4x4 inch Posts securely set into the Ground. C. Place no other Signs or Advertisements on Premises without Owner's written approval. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE A. Provide substantial, weather-tight Office Building on Premises where directed. B. At Contractor's option, Contractor may use Portable Buildings suitable for office-use. C. Provide with Heat, Electric Light, and Janitorial Service. D. Do not use Field Office or Storage Buildings for Personnel housing. E. Furnish as necessary to fulfill job-site responsibilities and activities, such as holding meetings, storing and using record drawings, and filing project records 1.5 OWNER'S ON-SITE SALES OFFICE A. Owner will furnish and install. B. Where located and as shown on Drawings, Contractor shall provide paved area to receive Building, Parking Area, and Temporary Utilities. 1.6 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT MASTER 01500 temporary facilities.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01500 pl of 5 A. In Contractor's Field Office provide communications equipement with dedicated lines for telephone with answering machine and recorder, fax, internet and WIFI B. Provide wall-mounted Directory at each Instrument listing Name and Business Phone Number of at least the following: 1. Each Contractor and Subcontractor 2. Architect 3. Architect's Consulting Engineers 4. Testing Laboratories 5. Physicians 6. Hospitals 7. Ambulance 8. Local Fire Department 1.7 TEMPORARY WATER A. Provide and maintain adequate Water service for the following purposes: 1. Construction activities 2. Drinking Water 3. Temporary Toilet Facilities 4. Fire Protection B. Extend services to work areas as needed and to temporary fixtures and facilities, including Contractor's Temporary Field Office and Owner's On- site Sales Office C. Provide required meters, valves, and utility connections, and distribution system; D. Water costs shall be paid by General Contractor. 1.8 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES A. Provide Toilet and Washing Facilities in accordance with governing Regulations. B. If both Men and Women are working,provide separate Facilities for each sex. C. Maintain each Toilet in clean and hygienic conditions,using regularly scheduled maintenance services when available. 1.9 TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. Provide all necessary to protect Public and Workers against injury and to protect Project against damage and unauthorized intrusion. 1.10 TEMPORARY EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide sufficient Enclosures to prevent infiltration of Rainwater, Wind, and other Elements, and prevent undue Heat Loss from within Enclosed Area. MASTER 01500 temporary facilities.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01500 p2 of 5 B. At no additional cost to Owner, clean,repair, and,when directed, replace any Building Materials or Contents which have been damaged or discolored because of lack of enclosure. 1.11 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Provide 6 ft. minimum height Chain Link Fencing around limits of construction or as otherwise agreed to by owner. B. Provide vehicle and pedestrian gates in a serviceable and secure manner 1.12 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide and maintain necessary Facilities and Equipment to safeguard Project against Fire Damage, and in accordance with requirements of local fire department. 1.13 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide and maintain structurally and electrically sound, Code-approved, Temporary Power Distribution System as follows: B. Sufficient 20 amp Load Centers that any Work Area can be reached with 100 ft. long Extension Cord. General Contractor and each Subcontractor shall provide their own grounded,UL approved Extension Cords. C. Load Centers shall include: 1. Weatherproof Distribution Boxes 2. Circuit Breakers for each Outlet 3. Equipment Grounding Continuity for entire System 4. Power at proper voltage for: a. Contractor's Temporary Field Office b. Owner's On-site Sales Office c. Temporary Storage and Construction Buildings d. Temporary Lighting and Power e. Temporary Heating and Ventilating f. Temporary Fire Alarm System g. Pumping h. Testing and checking Equipment 5. Owner's Facilities continuous operation during Electrical Services change-over D. Provide required meters and connections, and extend System to Work Area. E. Power costs are paid by General Contractor F. General Contractor and each Subcontractor shall provide their own power and distribution system for Field Welders and any other Special Power beyond that specified herein. G. Maintain Cords clear of Walkways and other Heavy-traffic Areas. 1.14 TEMPORARY LIGHTING: MASTER 01500 temporary facilities.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01500 p3 of 5 A. Provide and maintain Temporary Lighting at least as follows: 1. 30 ft. candles measured 3 ft. above Floor in spaces during work. Energize permanent Lighting Fixtures prior to painting, except where Fixtures are mounted on Walls or Ceilings to be painted. Maintain from 15 minutes prior to until 15 minutes past scheduled Work hours. 2. 5 ft. candles measured 3 ft.above Floor where necessary to prevent damage or injury. Maintain when authorized Personnel are present. Provide Light Control Switches at Area Entrances and successive Areas so Personnel access to Project can be through lighted Areas. 3. Unless otherwise protected, cover exposed Interior Lamps with Guards. 1.15 TEMPORARY HEATING&VENTILATING A. Provide Temporary Heat and Ventilation throughout enclosed construction areas to: 1. Facilitate Work progress. 2. Protect Work and Products against Dampness and Cold. 3. Prevent Moisture Condensation on Surfaces. 4. Provide suitable Ambient Temperatures and Humidity Levels for installation and curing of Products. 5. Provide adequate Ventilation to meet health regulations for Safe Working Environment. B. If temporary Portable Heaters are used, exhaust Heater Exhaust Fumes by Ductwork directly to Building Exterior. C. Continue Temporary Heating and Ventilating until Owner occupies or finally accepts Project,whichever is sooner. D. Maintain Ventilated Areas in clean condition to avoid undue circulation of Dust and Air-borne Particles. E. Maintain the following Interior Conditions: 1. Temperature(24 hours a day)unless otherwise specified in Trade Sections: 55°F to 75°F 2. Minimum Air Changes: 1 each 2 hours 3. Maximum Relative Humidity: 50% F. Permanent Building System use: 1. Operate no permanent Heating or Ventilating Equipment without Mechanical Engineer's authorization that Equipment is properly installed,has clean Air Filters,and is otherwise suitable for use. 2. Use of permanent Equipment for"temporary" purposes shall not alter Equipment Warranty Period start-date,which shall remain date of Project Substantial Completion. 3. Maintain System for proper operation. 4. If adjacent Site Work is producing Dust, do not intake Outside Air, and cover Outside Air Intakes with 30%minimum-efficiency Air Filters. 5. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion of Project replace Air Filters with new Units, and restore System to like-new condition. MASTER 01500 temporary facilities.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01500 p4 of 5 G. Fuel costs shall be paid by Contractor. 1.16 TEMPORARY MOLD-PREVENTION VENTILATION A. Provide sufficient Ventilation within Project to exhaust Moisture from Ambient Air and Products as required to prevent development of Mold or Mycotoxins. B. Test Air and Products to assure that moisture-contents do not exceed specified limits. C. At least 30 calendar days prior to Project Substantial Completion Date, _ submit Moisture Test Readings for Architect's review and acceptance. If Test Readings exceed specified Moisture Limits, and at no additional cost to Owner, continue Ventilation until acceptable Readings are met and maintained. 1.17 TEMPORARY VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION A. General Contractor shall provide and pay costs for Temporary Stairs, Ramps,Material Hoists, Personnel Hoists, Chutes, etc., required for execution of Work of all Trades, including that required for other Prime Contractors. Subcontractors and other Prime Contractors shall provide their own Ladders, and Scaffolds. B. Do not use permanent Elevators for temporary hoisting without Owner's written approval. If permission is granted, guarantee protection of Equipment and Component Parts, do not exceed posted Load Capacity, maintain neat and clean, abide by Owner's terms of use, and bear all costs including Elevator Maintenance. Contractor's use of Equipment for Temporary Hoisting in no way implies Owner's acceptance of Work, and Warranty-period commencement shall remain unchanged from that specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.18 MISCELLANEOUS TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT A. Thermometer: Maintain one 10 inch minimum size Outdoor Thermometer. Mount at convenient location not in direct sunlight. Temperature Range: Minus 30°F to plus 110°F. B. Protective Headgear: For Visitors'use,provide 6 adjustable-size, OSHA approved Protective Helmets. 1.19 TEMPORARY FACILITIES REMOVAL • A. Remove Temporary Facilities at Project completion or sooner, if directed. B. Repair damage, if any, resulting from Temporary Facilities. END OF SECTION MASTER 01500 temporary facilities.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01500 p5 of 5 • SECTION 01565 PROJECT SECURITY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Establish and maintain Project Security Program to protect Work, Stored Products, and Construction Equipment against Theft and Vandalism. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Storage and Protection of Products: Section 01600 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY A. Maintain Security Program throughout construction period, until Owner- occupancy or Owner-acceptance precludes the need for Contractor-security. END OF SECTION MASTER 01565 project security.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01565 p 1 of 1 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS &EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO WORK SHALL: A. Conform to applicable Specifications and Standards. B. Comply with size,make,type, and quantity specified, unless otherwise approved in writing. 1.2 MANUFACTURED AND FABRICATED PRODUCTS: A. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, and to be interchangeable. B. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, and by same Manufacturer. C. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. D. Equipment shall comply with capacity, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified, unless otherwise approved in writing. E. Do not use Materials or Equipment for any purpose other than that for which designed or specified. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Summary of Work: Section 01 110 B. Shop Drawings, Product Data,& Samples: Section 01330 C. Product Substitutions: Section 01630 D. Cleaning: Section 01740 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For Products specified only by Referenced Standard, select any Product meeting Standard. B. For Products specified by naming several Products, select any one complying with Specifications. C. For Products specified by naming one or more Products and "or approved", select any one specified Product or submit request for substitution as specified below. 1.5 INAPPROPRIATE PRODUCTS & METHODS A. If Contractor believes that any specified Product,Method, or System is inappropriate for use he shall, if possible, so notify Architect at least 5 Working Days prior to Contract award, and if not possible such notice shall be given as soon as possible before performing Work in question. MASTER 01600 materials and equp..doe 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01600 p'1 of 3 B. If notice of objection is not received within the time limits specified above, it will be assumed by the Owner that the Contractor agrees that the specified Products,Methods, and Systems are not inappropriate for use on this Project. 1.6 QUANTITY OF PRODUCTS REQUIRED A. Whenever in Specifications a Product is referred to in singular number,such reference shall include as many such Products as are shown on Drawings or are required to complete the Work. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS 1.8 PERFORM WORK IN ACCORD WITH MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS. A. Do not omit preparatory or installation procedures required by Manufacturer, unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. B. When Contract Documents Yequire Work to comply with Manufacturers' instructions, obtain and distribute such instructions to parties performing work including 2 copies to Architect. Maintain 1 set at jobsite during installation and until acceptance. C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust Products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformance with specified requirements. D. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' instructions,consult Architect for further instructions. E. Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions. 1.9 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 01630. 1.10 'TRANSPORTATION& HANDLING A. Arrange Product deliveries in accord with Construction Progress Schedule. Coordinate to avoid conflict with work and site conditions. B. Deliver Products undamaged, in Manufacturer's original containers or packaging, and with legible identifying labels intact. C. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with Contract Documents and approved Submittals requirements, and assure that Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.11 STORAGE&PROTECTION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain Product Identity Labels intact. C. Store Products subject to weather-damage in weather-tight enclosures. D. Maintain Storage Room temperature and humidity within ranges required by Manufacturer's instructions. MASTER 01600 materials and equp..doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01600 p2 of 3 E. Maintain reasonable protection against Product theft and vandalism. F. Exterior Storage: 1. Store fabricated Products above ground,on blocking or skids;prevent Product damage and discoloration. 2. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. 3. Store loose Granular Materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Inspection of Stored Products: 1. Arrange Storage to permit easy access for inspection. 2. Make periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained as specified and are free from damage, discoloration, and deterioration. ____ H. Protection after Installation: Provide substantial Coverings as necessary to protect installed Products against damage and discoloration. Remove Covering when no longer needed. 1.12 DAMAGED&REJECTED PRODUCTS DISPOSAL A. Immediately remove from Project Site, and lawfully dispose, any Damaged or Rejected Products. END OF SECTION MASTER 01600 materials and equp..doe 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01600 p3 of 3 SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Wherever a Material, Article, or piece of Equipment is identified on the Drawings or in the Specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalog numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any material, article, or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article, or piece of equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance, and function. The substituted Product shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor_- without the Architect's written approval. B. The Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution. C. Only approved substitutions may be used on Contract Work. D. Each request for substitution approval shall include: 1. Identity of Product for which substitution is requested; include Specification page and line number. 2. Identity of substitution including complete Product description, drawings, photographs,performance and test data, and all other information necessary for evaluation. 3. Quality comparison of proposed substitution with specified Product. 4. Changes in other Work required because of substitution. 5. Effect on construction progress schedule. 6. Cost of proposed substitution compared with specified Product. 7. Any required license fees or royalties. 8. Availability of maintenance service. 9. Source of replacement materials. 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BIDDING PERIOD A. No request for substitution approval will be considered unless written request has been submitted and has been received by Architect at least 5 Working Days prior to Subbid submission dates. B. If approved, Architect will issue Addenda prior to Subbid submissions listing all approved substitutions. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD A. In accordance with General Conditions, approval will be granted only when recommended by Architect, when approved by Owner, and when: 1. Specified Product cannot be delivered without Project delay, or MASTER 01630 substitutions.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01630 p1 of 2 2. Specified Product has been discontinued, or 3. Specified Product has been replaced by superior Product, or 4. Specified Product cannot be guaranteed as specified, or 5. Specified Product will not perform properly, or 6. Specified Product will not fit within designated space, or 7. Specified Product does not comply with governing codes, or 8. Substitution will be clearly in Owner's interest. B. If and when approved, Architect will issue Change Order for Owner's signature authorizing approved substitution and revising Contract Sum where appropriate. 1.4 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE A. Substitution approval does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper execution of the Work and for compliance with the original Contract requirements. _ _ END OF SECTION MASTER 01630 substitutions.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01630 p2 of 2 SECTION 01730 CUTTING&PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Perform all cutting, fitting, and patching, including related excavation or backfill required to complete Work, and to: B. Make Work fit properly C. Integrate with other Work D. Uncover Work for installation of ill-timed Work E. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work F. Remove samples of installed Work for testing - G. Provide penetrations through non-structural surfaces for Mechanical and Electrical Work 1.2 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request for Cutting Approval to Architect well in advance of any cutting which affects: 1. Work of Owner or any separate Contractors 2. Structural integrity of any completed or existing Work 3. Waterproof integrity of any weather-exposed or moisture-resistant Work 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of any complete or existing Work 5. Visual qualities of any sight-exposed Work B. Request shall include: 1. Project identification 2. Location and description of affected Work 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration 4. Effect upon Owner's Work 5. Effect upon other Contractors' Work 6. Description of proposed Work including: 7. Extent of cutting,patching, alteration, or excavation. 8. Trades who will execute Work 9. Products proposed for use 10. Extent of required refmishing - 11. Alternatives to cutting and patching 12. Cost proposal, when applicable. 13. Written permission of any affected separate Contractor C. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time Work will be performed. PART 2 PRODUCTS MASTER 01730 cutting and patching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01730 p1 of 3 2.1 MATERIALS A. Follow specifications in this project manual for cutting and patching materials of specified Products,where applicable; B. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and requirements for other materials not specified, or Architect's direction where none other are available. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Inspect existing conditions and identify Work subject to damage or movement caused by proposed cutting and patching. B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. C. Report unsatisfactory and questionable conditions to Architect. D. Do not proceed with Work until Architect provides further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Maintain adequate Temporary Support necessary to assure structural integrity of affected Work. B. Protect other portions of Project Work against damage and discoloration. C. Protect Work exposed by cutting against damage and discoloration. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Provide proper surfaces for patching and fmishing. B. Employ qualified Installer or Fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant surfaces. 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. C. Cut Concrete and other Rigid Materials with Masonry Saw or Core Drill. Do not over-cut at Corners. D. Restore cut or removed Work with new Products to provide Work complete in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain any original Fire-resistance Rating. E. Fit Work air-tight to Pipes, Sleeves,Ducts,Conduits, and other surface penetrations. F. Where patching occurs,refinish entire surface to provide even finish to match adjacent Work as follows: 1. Continuous Surfaces: Refinish to nearest Intersection or Joint. 2. Assemblies: Refinish entire Unit. 3A CUTTING STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Exposed Members, including any Columns&Posts: MASTER 01730 cutting and patching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01730 p2 of 3 1. Not permitted,unless shown on Drawings or otherwise pre-approved. B. Concealed Horizontal Lumber Framing Members: 1. Notches Prohibited: a. In Tension Edge of nominal 4 inch or deeper Members, except at Member Ends. b. In middle 1/3 of Member length. c. Greater than 1/4 of Member depth at Member Ends, and greater than 1/6 of Member depth elsewhere. 2. Cover Notches with Metal Plate; Simpson SS Stud Shoe, or approved. 3. Bored Holes prohibited: a. Greater than 1/3 of Member depth. b. Within 2 inches of Member top or bottom. c. Cover Member edge at Bored Holes with Metal Plate; Simpson NS Nail Stopper,or approved. C. Concealed Lumber Wall Framing Members: -- -- - l. Maximum Notching Depth: a. At Exterior&Bearing Walls: 25%of Member width. b. At all other locations: 40% of Member width. 2. Cover Notches with Metal Plate; Simpson SS Stud Shoe, or approved. 3. Bored Holes Prohibited: a. Within 5/8 inch of Member edge. b. Within same section as Cut or Notch. 4. Maximum Size of Bored Holes: a. At Bearing Walls: 40% of Member width. b. At all other locations: 60% of Member width. 5. Cover Stud edge at Bored Hole with Metal Plate; Simpson NS Nail Stopper,or approved. D. Trusses&Plywood Web Joists: a. Do not cut,notch, or drill Chord Members. b. Cut or drill Plywood Webs only in compliance with Joist Manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING &REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 01730 cutting and patching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01730 p3 of 3 SECTION 01740 CLEANING& TRASH REMOVAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 EXTENT OF WORK A. Execute Cleaning and Trash removal during Work progress;and at Work completion; as required by Contract Conditions, and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Cleaning specific Products or Work: See respective Specification Sections. 1.3 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Section 01200 for possible effect upon Work of this Section. 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with governing Codes, Regulations, Ordinances, and Antipollution requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use only those which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage Surfaces. B. Use only those recommended by Manufacturer of Surface to be cleaned. C. Use only on Surfaces recommended by Cleaning Material Manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Follow Cleaning Material and Surface Manufacturers' instructions. 3.2 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Periodically, and when directed by Architect,clean to maintain Work, Site, and adjacent Properties free from accumulations of Waste, Rubbish, and Windblown Debris, resulting from Construction Operations. B. Provide on-site Containers for collection of Waste, Debris,and Rubbish. C. Periodically remove Waste,Debris, and Rubbish; legally dispose of away from Project Site. 3.3 DUST CONTROL A. Clean Interior Surfaces prior to painting,and continue cleaning as needed until painting is complete. MASTER 01740 final cleaning.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01740 p1 of 2 B. Schedule cleaning so that resultant Dust and Contaminants will not fall on wet or newly-coated Surfaces. 3.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove Waste,Debris, and Surplus Material from Project Site and Adjacent Property. B. Clean Grounds as follows: 1. Paved Surfaces: Remove Stains, Spills,and Foreign Substances; and hose- clean. 2. Other Surfaces: Rake-clean. C. In addition to debris-removal and cleaning specified in other Sections, clean exposed-to-view Exterior and Interior Surfaces. D. Employ skilled Workers to perform cleaning. E. Remove any Temporary Protection and Labels not required to remain. F. From sight-exposed Exterior and Interior Surfaces, remove Grease, Adhesive, Mastic, Paint, Dust, Dirt, Stains, Fingerprints, and other Foreign Substances. G. Clean Glazing, including any Mirrors. H. Polish Glossy Surfaces to clear shine. I. Vacuum-clean Carpet and similar Soft Materials. J. Clean Equipment Surfaces, and remove excess Lubricants. K. Clean and sanitize Food Service Equipment,Appliances, and, Plumbing Fixtures. L. Ventilating System, if used during construction: 1. Ducts, Blowers, Coils, Etc.: Clean 2. Disposable Filters: Replace 3. Permanent Filters: Clean M. Clean Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. N. Remove Waste, Debris, and Foreign Substances from Roof and Roof Drainage System. O. Maintain Structure and Components clean until Project Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MASTER 01740 final cleaning.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01740 p2 of 2 SECTION 01750 EQUIPMENT&SYSTEMS START UP PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate start up schedules for all Equipment and Systems, and verify that: 1. Each piece of Equipment or System has been checked for proper Lubrication, Drive Rotation, Belt Tension, Control Sequence, and other Conditions which could damage Equipment or Systems. 2. Tests,Meter Readings,and specified Electrical Characteristics agree with those required by Equipment or System Manufacturer. 3. Equipment and Systems Wiring and Support Components are complete, and have successfully passed all required Tests. B. Submit copies of all required Inspections and Tests to Architect's and Owner's Representatives. C. Certify in writing that Equipment and Systems are properly installed and correctly functioning 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Record Documents: Section 01820 B. Operating&Maintenance Data: Section 01830 C. Mechanical Work: Div. 15 D. Electrical Work: Div. 16 1.3 ADVANCE NOTICES A. Notify Architect's and Owner's Representatives at least 5 working days prior to specified Tests and Inspections. 1.4 START UP REQUIREMENTS A. Execute start up in accordance with Contract Specifications and Manufacturers' instructions. B. When so specified,require Manufacturers' authorized Representatives to inspect and approve Equipment and Systems prior to start up, and to supervise placing Equipment and Systems in operation. C. Prior to testing, Contractor shall complete Adjusting and Balancing requirements specified in Division 15. 1.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Comply with Specifications requirements. MASTER 01750 systems equipment startup.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01750 p1 of 3 B. Perform required Tests in presence of Architect's and Owner's authorized Representatives. C. Conduct Tests under specified Design Operating Conditions. D. Tests shall clearly demonstrate that the Equipment and Systems comply with Specifications, including proper installation,adjustment,calibration, and connections. E. Perform Tests in the following sequence: 1. Test Equipment individually. 2. Test Equipment Subsystems separately. 3. Test complete Systems. 4. Test Interties with other Systems. F. Obtain Architect's and Owner's written certification of acceptable Tests. G. Contractor shall furnish all required Testing Equipment and Materials. 1.6 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Immediately upon written acceptance of Functional Tests, operate Equipment and Systems for at least 30 consecutive days to demonstrate that Equipment and Systems comply with specified Performance Requirements. B. In event of Performance Test failure, immediately discontinue 30 day Test, make necessary repairs,adjustments, or replacements, and repeat 30 day Test. C. Satisfactory completion of 30 day'Performance Test does not relieve Contractor of Contract Warranty requirements. D. Systems and Equipment to be tested include,but are not limited to: 1. Equipment: a. Commercial &Residential Appliances 2. Mechanical: a. Irrigation b. Fire Protection c. Plumbing d. Heating, Ventilating, &Air Conditioning e. Controls f. Elevators 3. Electrical: a. Power b. Lighting c. Fire Detection&Alarm Systems d. Security e. Communications f. Elevators 1.7 TESTING PROCEDURES APPROVAL MASTER 01750 systems equipment startup.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01750 p2 of 3 A. At least 30 calendar days prior to starting Tests,prepare and submit, for Architect's and Owner's approval, detailed description of Contractor's proposed Testing Procedures. Do not begin Tests until Procedures have been approved. 1.8 DOCUMENTING TESTS A. Contractor shall prepare Check-off Sheet(s)for each Component of each System. B. In addition to Test results, Check-off Sheets shall include the following: 1.. Project Name 2. Equipment/System Item 3. Tag Number 4. Description 5. Calibration 6. Manufacturer&Model 7. Installation Bulletin 8. Specification Page and Line Number 9. Test Conductors' identities and signatures 10. Space for Architect's &Owner's signature of acceptance END OF SECTION MASTER 01750 systems equipment startup.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01750 p3 of 3 SECTION 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Section 00800 B. Cleaning& Trash Removal: Section 01740 C. Equipment& Systems Start Up: Section 01750 D. Warranties&Bonds: Section 01780 E. Record Documents: Section 01820 F. Operating& Maintenance Data: Section 01830 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION A. When Contractor considers Work substantially complete, as defined in General Conditions,he shall submit to the Architect's Representative: 1. Written notice that Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. List of Items to be completed or corrected. B. Architect will, as soon as possible thereafter, make inspection to determine completion status. C. If Architect's Representative should determine that Work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect's Representative will promptly notify Contractor in writing, giving reasons therefore. 2. Contractor shall remedy Work deficiencies, and send second notice of substantial completion to Architect's Representative. 3. Architect's Representative will reinspect Work. D. When Architect's Representative concurs that Work is substantially complete, Architect's Representative will: 1. Prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion using AIA Document G704, accompanied with Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by Architect. 2. Submit Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. 1.3 FINAL INSPECTION A. When Contractor considers Work complete,he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Contractor has inspected Work for compliance with Contract Documents. MASTER 01770 contract closeout.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01770 p1 of 4 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and Systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative and are operational. 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. Architect's Representative will inspect Work to verify completion status as soon as possible after receipt of Contractor's Certification. C. If Architect's Representative should consider Work incomplete or defective: 1. Architect's Representative will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective Work. 2. Contractor shall immediately remedy deficiencies,,and send second written certification to Architect's Representative that Work is complete. D. Architect's Representative will reinspect Work. E. When Architect's Representative finds Work acceptable under Contract Documents, he will request Contractor to make closeout submittals. 1.4 REINSPECTION FEES A. Architect's Representative will make one Substantial Completion Inspection to determine any Work Deficiencies and one Final Completion Inspection to ascertain that Deficiencies have been satisfactorily completed. B. If Architect's Representative should be required to make more than two Inspections: 1. Owner will compensate Architect's Representative for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct Architect's Representative's compensation amount from Contractor's final payment as follows: a. Architect's Representative's time at current Billing Rates. b. Architect's Representative 's Employees'time at current Billing Rates. c. Others at direct cost incurred. d. Charges will be made for necessary travel time, inspection time, inspection report writing time;commercial air fare;room and board; and all other expenses incurred in making inspections. 1.5 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS &RELEASE OF LIENS A. Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims,AIA Doc. G706. 2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Doc. G706A including the following: a. Consent of Contractor's Surety, if any,to Final Payment,AIA Doc. G707. b. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens. c. Separate releases or waivers of lien for Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others with lien rights against Owner's Property,together with list of those parties. MASTER 01770 contract closeout.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01770 p2 of 4 B. Sign and execute all Submittals,before delivery to Architect's Representative. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT A. Certificate of Insurance for Products&Completed Operations: See Section 00800 B. Project Record Documents: See Section 01820 C. Owner's Operating& Maintenance Manual: See Section 01830 D. State Elevator Acceptance Certificate E. Certificate of Domestic Water Disinfection F. Building Official's Certificates of Inspections G. Building Official's Certificate of Occupancy 1.7 SPARE PARTS & MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS TO OWNER A. Specific Requirements: See Specification Sections B. Products: Identical to those included in Project Work C. Storage Location: On Project premises where directed by Owner D. Required Submittals: 1. Extra Irrigation Equipment: See Section 02810 2. Extra Ceramic&Quarry Tile: See Section 09310 3. Extra Acoustic Tile: See Section 09500 4. Extra Resilient Floor Covering: See Section 09650 5. Extra Carpet: See Section 09680 6. Extra Paint: See Section 09900 7. Others required by Specifications 1.8 DEMONSTRATIONS A. Instruct Owner in operation of all Systems and Equipment in accordance with Section 01830. 1.9 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect, including the following: B. Original Contract Sum C. Additions and deductions resulting from: 1. Previous Change Orders 2. Other adjustments 3. Deductions for uncompleted Work 4. Bonuses 5. Deductions for Liquidated Damages MASTER 01770 contract closeoutdoc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01770 p3 of 4 6. Deductions for Reinspection Payments D. Total Contract Sum,as adjusted E. Previous payments F. Sum remaining due G. Architect will prepare and issue final Change Order,reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Orders. 1.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Follow procedures specified in Section 01295. END OF SECTION MASTER 01770 contract closeout.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7111/14 01770 p4 of 4 SECTION 01780 WARRANTIES&BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile specified Bonds, if any,and Warranties. B. Compile specified Service and Maintenance Contracts. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Performance& Labor& Material Payment Bonds: Section 00200 B. General Warranty for Construction: Section 00700& 00800 C. Contract Closeout: Section 01770 D. Operating&Maintenance Data: Section 01830 E. Warranties or Bonds required for Specific Products: See respective Specification Sections 1.3 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. Assemble Bonds,Warranties, and Service&Maintenance Contracts executed by Contractor, and each of respective Manufacturers, Suppliers, and Subcontractors. B. Number of Original Signed Copies Required: Provide 1 for each volume of Owner's Operating &Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01830. C. Table of Contents: Neatly type in orderly sequence. D. Provide complete information for each of the following: 1. Product or Work Item 2. Firm, with name of Principal, Address, and Telephone Number 3. Beginning date and duration of Bond, Warranty, or Service&Maintenance Contract. 4. The following information for Owner's Personnel: a. Procedure in event of failure or malfunction. b. Instances which affect Bond, Warranty, or Service& Maintenance Contract. 5. Contractor,name of responsible Principal,Address, and Telephone Number. 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORM A. Punch sheets for standard 3-ring Binder. B. Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches C. Fold larger sheets to fit into Binder. MASTER 01780 warranties and bonds:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01780 p1 of 2 D. Cover: Identify each Packet with printed title "WARRANTIES & BONDS". E. List: 1. Title of Project 2. Name of Contractor 1.5 SUBMITTAL LOCATION A. Bind into Owner's Operating&Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01830. 1.6 SUBMITTAL TIME - A. See Section 01830. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES A. In addition to Contractor's Warranty, Manufacturers' Warranties shall pass to Owner and shall not take effect until affected Work has been accepted in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION MASTER 01780 warranties and bonds.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01780 p2 of 2 SECTION 01820 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Maintain at Project Site for Owner, 1 record copy of: 1. Contract Drawings& Specifications 2. Addenda 3. Change Orders &other Contract Modifications 4. Field Orders &other Written Instructions 5. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Samples. 6. Field Test Reports 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Contract Conditions: Sections 00700 & 00800 B. Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Samples: Section 01330 C. Operating&Maintenance Data: Section 01830 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS & SAMPLES A. Store in Contractor's Field Office apart from Documents used for Construction. B. Provide Files, Shelving, and Cabinets necessary to safely and securely store Documents and Samples. C. Maintain Documents clean, dry, legible, and in good order. D. Do not use Record Documents for Construction purposes. E. Make Documents available at all time for Architect's inspection. F. Architect will monitor Record Documents prior to each Contractor's Application for Payment. Up-to-date Record Documents are prerequisite to acceptance and approval of Payment Application. 1.4 DRAFTER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Drafting must be accurate and legible. B. If Architect deems submitted Drafting to be unacceptable, redraft until acceptable at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 WORK SET MARKING DEVICES A. Type: Waterproof soft-tip B. Color Code,unless otherwise directed or approved: C. Green: Document changes D. Red: Work deleted E. Other Contrasting Color: Revised Dimensions and other Notations MASTER 01820 project record documents.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01820 p 1 of 3 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain 1 complete set of Black-line or Blue-line Prints of Contract Drawings as Work-set;use Marking Devices specified above to record all Contract changes. B. Show actual conditions where installation varies substantially from Work shown on Drawings. Give particular attention to Concealed Work that would be difficult or impossible to record at later date. Record Backing and other Concealed Items required for installation of Future Work by Owner. C. -Mark whichever Contract Drawing or Shop Drawing is most appropriate and most capable of accurately and clearly showing actual "field conditions". Where Shop Drawings are used to record changes,record cross-reference on appropriate Contract Drawing. D. Where applicable, indicate Change Order numbers with each Change. E. Note related Specification or Product Data revisions, where applicable. F. Upon Work completion, transfer Recorded Information for submission to Owner as follows: 1. Div. 15 & 16 Work: Computer Disc 2. Other Work: 1 additional clean set of Black-line or Blue-line Prints G. Contractor may retain Work-set for his Records. 1.7 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Maintain 1 complete copy of Project Manual including Specifications; any Addenda; and other Written Documents such as Change Orders, Supplemental Instructions, and similar written Modifications issued during course of Work. B: Mark Documents to show actual conditions where installation varies substantially from specified Work. Give particular attention to Concealed Work that would be difficult or impossible to record at later date. C. Note related Record Drawing and Product Data revisions, where applicable. 1.8 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Maintain 1 copy of each Product Data submittal. B. Mark documents to show actual conditions where installation varies substantially from Contract Specifications or Drawings. Include any variations in installed Products or in Manufacturer's installation instructions. Give particular attention to Concealed Work that would be difficult or impossible to record at later date. C. Note related Record Drawing and Specifications revisions, where applicable. 1.9 RECORD SAMPLES A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion date, Contractor shall coordinate with Architect to determine which, if any, Contractor-maintained Samples shall be submitted for Owner's permanent record. MASTER 01820 project record documents.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01820 p2 of 3 1.10 RECORDING A. Label each Document PROJECT RECORD in neat, large,printed letters. B. Record Information concurrently with Construction progress. C. Do not conceal any Work until required Information is recorded. D. Legibly mark Drawings to record the following Actual Construction: 1. Depth of Foundation Elements in relation to adjacent Ground Floor elevation. 2. Horizontal and Vertical Locations of Underground Utilities and Appurtenances,referenced to permanent Surface Improvements. 3. Location of Internal Utilities and Appurtenances concealed in Construction, referenced to visible and accessible Features of Structure. • 4. Field Changes of Dimensions and Details. --5. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. - - 6. Details not shown on original Contract Drawings. E. Legibly mark Specifications and any Addenda to record the following: 1. Manufacturer,Trade Name, Catalog Number, and Supplier of each Product actually installed. 2. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 1.11 SUBMITTAL A. Organize Record Documents into manageable Sets,bind together with durable Cover Sheet, and print on Cover of each Set the following: 1. Project title 2. Date 3. Contractor's Name&Address 4. Title and number of each Record Document 5. Name of Person who prepared Sheet 6. Signature of Contractor or his authorized Representative B. Submit to Architect for forwarding to Owner END OF SECTION MASTER 01820 project record documents.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01820 p3 of 3 SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Blasting& Burning: None permitted. B. Comply with applicable jurisdictional requirements for materials toxic or hazardous. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HERBICIDE A. Type: Use products necessary to satisfy work required by this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points, if disturbed or destroyed,replace as directed. B. Protect workmen,passersby, and neighboring property against injury and damage. C. Maintain pavement and sidewalks clean. D. Protect existing construction to remain, if any. Leave in as good condition as found. 3.2 CLEARING A. Completely clear areas to be occupied by structures and pavements, and other improvements as required. B. Remove vegetation,rubbish,pavement, and debris, unless shown to remain by drawings 1. Removal of trees that do not interfere with final structures or pavements should be discussed with Owner's site representative prior to removal 2. Cut other Trees,Stumps, Shrubs, and Brush flush with or slightly below original ground surface or as required to not interfere with final construction product or landscaping. 3.3 GRUBBING MASTER 02230 site clearing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02230 p1 of 2 A. Remove Stumps, Roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter, Rocks larger than 4 inches, and existing Construction not suitable for bearing, to the following levels: 1. In areas to receive Lawn or Plants: To not less than 12 inches below Finish Grade. 2. In areas to receive structures or pavements: To not less than 18 inches below Subgrade. 3. In other areas: To not less than 6 inches below Finish Grade. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED&GRUBBED MATERIAL A. Remove from site daily, and lawfully dispose. 3.5 VEGETATION POISONING AND WEED CONTROL A. Treat any Stumps or Roots or other vegetation for weed control, with Herbicide to prevent regrowth. B. Apply and handle-herbicide in accordance with manufacturer's labeled instructions and applicable environmental use regulations END OF SECTION MASTER 02230 site clearing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02230 p2 of 2 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide complete earthwork operations including removing and storing topsoil, general excavation, excavation for the structure and footing excavation; rough grading; fill and backfill; and finish grading. B. Notify the utility companies to locate and flag all existing underground utilities. C. Materials at site are expected to be in accordance with materials indicated on logs and test holes included. Bids shall be based on recommendations made in the soils investigation report. Special fill or backfill materials shall be as specified in the soils investigation recommendations or indicated on Drawings. _. _ No allowance or extra payments will be made by reason of variation in types of soil encountered or variations in their moisture contents. Additional fill material required shall be furnished and included as a part of the work. Removal of excess or objectionable materials shall be included as a part of the work. 1.2 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS A. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. B. Unforeseen work included, reimbursed by Owner per construction agreement: 1. Rock as defined below be encountered, other than any shown in Geotechnical Report,or any shown on Drawings, or any exposed to view during Bidding Period, Owner will pay extra for any necessary Rock removal and take credit for omitted Earth excavation, in accordance with Contract Conditions. 2. Unstable Soil as defined below or excessive Water be encountered,other than any shown in Geotechnical Report,or any shown on Drawings, or any exposed to view during Bidding Period, Owner will pay extra for necessary site dewatering or soil removal, in accordance with Contract Conditions. Owner will not pay for removal or dewatering of Unstable Soil caused by reasonably anticipated inclement weather or by Contractor's work at the Site. 3. Wells, Cisterns,Tanks, Cesspools, Garbage Pits, Foundations,Rubble, etc., (significant unforeseen obstructions)be encountered, other than any shown on Geotechnical Report, or any shown on Drawings, or any exposed to view during Bidding Period, Owner will pay extra for any necessary removal and take credit for omitted Earth excavation, in accordance with Contract Conditions 1.3 DEFINITIONS MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p1 of 9 A. Rock: Material that can not be removed by Pick and Shovel, by 1 cu. yd. Shovel, by Backhoe with 9500 lb. Digging Force, or by 200 HP Crawler fitted with normal Excavating Equipment. Ripper Attachment as might be hooked into Rock Seam is not considered "normal" Excavating Equipment. B. Unstable Soil: Soft, loose, or wet Ground that is incapable of supporting Material, Equipment, Personnel, or Structure as determined by geotech engineer. C. Unsuitable Fill Material: Soil with more than 2% Organic Fragments by volume, and/or with more than Optimum Moisture Content for compaction, and/or with Debris. D. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 341 National Press Building,Washington, D.C., 20004 E. Weed-free: Material containing less than 5 objectionable Weeds per 100 sq. ft. Weeds include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quack Grass, Horsetail, Mustard, Canadian Thistle, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Lambs Quarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, and any other similar objectionable growth. 1.4 RELATED INFORMATION SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Geotechnical Data: Section 00320 15 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Testing and Lab services: Section 01453 B. Site Clearing: Section 02230 C. Utility Trenching: Section 02315 D. Site Concrete Subgrade Preaparation: Section 02770 E. Landscape Soil Preparation: Section 02900 F. Concrete Subgrade Preparation: Section 03300 G. Drilling& backfilling for Elevator Drive Piston: Section 14200 H. adequately evaluate the soil. 1.6 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM C136—Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates: B. ANSUASTM D698—Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 inch Drop. C. ANSUASTM D1556—Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. D. ANSI/ASTM D1557=Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixture Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 inch Drop. E. ANSUASTM D2922 and D3017—Density of Soil in Place by the Nuclear Methods. MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p2 of 9 1.7 SAMPLES A. Submit samples of materials as required below. Samples of earth materials shall be delivered to job site in sufficient quantity necessary for Owner and laboratory to SOIL BEARING TESTS 1.8 TESTING A. Provide 24 hour notice to geotech firm for inspections, monitoring and testing services B. Compaction and other soil tests and monitoring will be performed per Testing Section 01453 1.9 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. B. Protect benchmarks, sidewalks,paving, and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities that are to remain. Notify utility companies to verify locations of buried lines near the excavation areas. D. Protect excavations by shoring,bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Protect adjacent structures that may be damaged by excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases. Underpin as required F. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost, snow,or ice. G. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation. Provide for removal of water trapped in excavations by either mechanical means or "sloped to drain" grading. H. Traffic Control: Unless otherwise approved by Governing Authorities, provide necessary Barricades, Detours, Warning Devices, Flaggers, and coordinate Equipment movement to maintain Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic on Public and Private Streets, and Walks. I. Street Cleaning: Maintain Public and Private Streets and Walkways clean and Drains open at all times. J. Dust Control: Protect Persons and Property against damage and discomfort caused by Dust;water where necessary to settle Dust and where directed. K. Protect Graded Material against damage and compaction from Traffic. L. Protect against soil erosion. Comply with erosion control plans and applicable regulatory requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p3 of 9 2.1 EARTHWORK MATERIALS A. Provide materials complying with recommendations for materials as described in geotech report for structural fills, general fills,backfills, and trench bedding. B. Provide materials complying with specific details and specifications in Civil Drawings C. When materials are not described or included in geotech report or civil drawings, meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Gravel a. Material: Round;water-worn;washed;sound; durable Rock which is free of soft, friable,thin, elongated, or laminated Pieces; disintegrated Material; organic Matter; Oil;Alkali; or other Deleterious Substances. b. Maximum Size: See Filling under Part 3 - Execution c. Minimum Size: 5%maximum passing#200 Sieve d. Gradation: Even 2.. Crushed Rock a. Material: Washed; sound; durable Rock which is free of soft, friable, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces;disintegrated Material; organic Matter; Oil; Alkali;or other Deleterious Substance. b. Shape: Mechanically crushed;Fracture at least 70% of Particles on at least 2 Faces. c. Maximum Unfractured Particles: d. 3/8 inch and larger Rock: 10% e. Smaller than 3/8 inch Rock: 5% f. Maximum Size: See Filling under Part 3 -Execution g. Minimum Size: 5%maximum passing#200 Sieve h. Gradation: Even 3. Native Soil a. Existing Soil excavated from Project Site and stockpiled on Project Site for future use. 4. Imported Loam a. Material: Fertile, friable,natural,native of locality, and reasonably free of Subsoil, Clay, Silt, Stones, Lumps, Plants, Roots, Sticks, Weeds, Seeds, and other. Extraneous Matter. Material need not be processed and screened. b. Extent of Work: Provide if stockpiled Existing Topsoil is not sufficient to complete Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Prior to starting Work of this Section, verify that Site Clearing has been properly completed and that existing Grades agree with Drawings. 1. Notify Owner about defects requiring correction. 2. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p4 of 9 B. Should any suspected Contaminated Soil be encountered perform the following: 1. Immediately notify Owner. 2. Comply with Owner's directions and Regulatory Agency requirements. 3. Perform no Work that could disturb or spread suspected Contaminated Soil. 4. Owner will employ and pay Testing Lab to confirm presence of Contaminated Soil. 5. If Laboratory Tests confirm presence of Contaminated Soil, Owner will remove Contaminated Soil and will issue Change Order increasing Contract Sum for any proven additional cost to the -Contractor and extending Contract Completion Date for any proven Contractor's lost time. 3.2 CUTTING EXISTING PAVEMENT A. Comply with jurisdiction requirements and standards for work in public right of ways. B. Meet the following minimum requirements when not in R.O.W. or when not in conflict with public work standards: 1. Cut,prior to excavating, with vertical, straight-line Joints using Pavement Saw or other Tool designed for cutting Pavement. 2. Make Cuts parallel or perpendicular to Pavement centerline. 3. Pavement Cut Width: Extend Cut 1 ft. beyond each side of Excavation. 4. Replace Pavement to condition at least as good as existing prior to cutting. Comply with Project Specifications. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Comply with recommendations for excavations and project earthwork as described in geotech report. B. Preparation: if not otherwise directed by geotech report, prepare for excavation after site clearing work is completed, as follows: 1. At Lawn and Planting Areas: Break up remaining Sod-like Vegetation to approximately 4 inch depth. 2. Elsewhere: Strip at least 6 inches of existing Topsoil, and stockpile for possible future use. 3. Remove from Topsoil any Vegetation, Sticks,Clods, Rocks larger than 1- 1/2 inches, excessive Gravel, Subsoil, and Debris. C. Excavating: if not otherwise directed by geotech report, excavate after preparation work is completed, as follows: 1. Excavate with square-edge Buckets as necessary for Work shown on Drawings or specified. 2. Allow ample space for Concrete Formwork and Utility Trenching. 3. Do not weave, pump, rut, or otherwise disturb Excavated Grade Surfaces with Equipment. MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p5 of 9 4. Protect any Excavation Slopes with securely anchored Plastic Sheeting. Install as soon as practical following excavation, and maintain as long as necessary to prevent Soil erosion. 5. Remove any unsuitable material as directed by geotech engineer. 6. Leave bearing surfaces undisturbed, level, and true. Where necessary, compact as specified below. D. Blasting, Explosives: None permitted. E. Extent of Excavation: 1. Excavate to elevations shown on Drawings. 2. Drawings indicate extent of excavations; adjustments for variations will be made in accordance with General Conditions. 3. Where excavation, through Contractor's error,is carried to levels lower than those shown on drawings, fill and compact with suitable material as directed by geotech engineer. F. Temporary Stockpiling of Excavated Material: 1. Locate within Construction Area as directed by Owner's project manager 2. Do not obstruct private or public streets, drives, or walkways. 3. Locate sufficiently far from Excavation edges to prevent Stockpiled Material from falling into Excavation, and as required to eliminate effect on Excavation stability. 4. At stockpiles remaining during rainy periods, grade and cover stockpile as required to prevent Compaction, Erosion, and Water Infiltration. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, stockpiling topsoil is not required if Topsoil can be distributed directly to final position. G. Shoring: 1. Brace, shore sides, or increase width of excavations as necessary to prevent Cave-ins and to comply with regulatory requirements 2. Repair any slides or cave-ins. 3. Remove shoring before backfilling. H. Water, Snow, Ice, & Frost: 1. Keep bearing under foundations dry and free of snow, ice, and frost. 2. Provide and operate de-watering equipment necessary to keep excavations free from standing water. Do not reduce ground water level to extent that could endanger or damage adjacent Structures or Property. 3. Do not discharge "removed" Water into permanent, on-site Utilities or Trenches without Sediment Control. 4. If Bearing Surfaces are softened by Water, Snow, Ice, or Frost, re-excavate fill, and compact as directed by geotech engineer. 3.4 EXCESS OR SHORTAGE OF EARTH A. Provide additional Material herein specified or needed for Fills. B. Stockpile, on Project Site where directed excess Earth Material suitable for filling. Remove from Site unused and unsuitable Fill Material. 3.5 PROOF-ROLLING SUBGRADE MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p6 of 9 A. Comply with recommendations for project earthworks and subgrade preparations as described in geotech report. B. When not addressed by geotech, comply with the following minimum requirements: 1. Following Subgrade preparation and within 24 hours prior to Fill or Base Course placement,proof-roll Subgrade beneath Building and Pavement Areas with fully-loaded 10 to 12 cu. yd. Dump Truck. 2. If any areas pump,weave, or appear soft, immediately notify Owner's Project Manager and Owner's Geotechnical Engineer about encountered conditions. Unless otherwise directed and at no additional cost to Owner, over-excavate areas 12 inches minimum, and fill with Crushed Rock compacted as specified below. 3. If significant length of time has passed between completion of Fill placement and construction start, or if vehicle traffic has been routed across area, repeat proof-rolling specified above. 3.6 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. Comply with recommendations for project earthworks and fill as described in geotech report. B. When not addressed by geotech, comply with the following minimum requirements: 1. Before proceeding, remove any Snow,Ice, Frozen Material, Debris or Decayable Matter from areas to be filled. 2. To insure bond,scarify any Sloping Ground to receive Fill. 3. Make Fills as soon as feasible to assure thorough settlement. 4. Uniformly place Fills adjacent to Structures to prevent unbalanced loading. 5. Place Fills in the following maximum loose-lift thicknesses: a. Where Compacted with Heavy Equipment Compactors: 8 inches b. Where Compacted with Hand-operated Compactors: 4 inches 6. Fills directly under Concrete Flatwork: a. Base Course: 1 1/2"max Crushed Rock; Fill space between underside of Leveling Course above and existing Subgrade below. b. Leveling Course: 3/4"max gravel, 6"thick 7. Fills beneath Sloping Concrete Flatwork&Asphalt Pavement: a. Slope Fill to prevent reducing Concrete and Asphalt thicknesses. 8. Fills Against Walls: a. Fill with 1-1/2 inch maximum size Gravel. b. Extend from Footing Bottom to underside of fmish grade surfacing. c. When backfilling against underground walls do not damage waterproofing. 9. Fills at Planting Boxes: a. Fill Bottoms with 6-inch layer of 1/4 inch maximum size Gravel. b. Fill remainder with stockpiled Native Topsoil or Imported Loam. 10. Fills at Lawn&Planting Areas: a. Fill with stockpiled Native Topsoil or Imported Loam. MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p7 of 9 3.7 COMPACTION A. Comply with recommendations for compaction as described in geotech report. B. When not otherwise specified in geotech report, comply with the following" 1. Maintain optimum Moisture Content for compaction. 2. Minimum ASTM D-698 Relative Compaction: a. Under and within 2 ft. of Slabs and Pavements: 95% b. Within 2 ft. of Foundations: 95% c. Elsewhere: 90% 3. Extend Fill-compaction to at least-5 ft.beyond edges of Work to be supported. 3.8 GRADING A. Comply with recommendations for grading and project earthworks as described in geotech report. When not otherwise specified in geotech report,comply with the following: B. Rough Grading: 1. Grade entire area of Property to reasonably true and even surfaces. 2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, slope Ground at 5% rate for at least 10 ft. away from Building to facilitate drainage. 3. Prevent Water-ponding. 4. Grade to uniform levels or slopes between given Grade Points. 5. Round Surfaces at abrupt Grade changes. C. Levels: 1. Grade area around Building to the following levels: a. Paving, Walks, and other Hard-surfaced Areas: To underside of Surfacing, allowing for Gravel Base Course. b. Lawn & Planting Areas: To Finish Grades, allowing for 6 inches of stockpiled Native Topsoil or Imported Loam. D. Finish Grading: 1. If Subsoil has not been freshly graded, scarify at least 6 inches deep. 2. Spread available Stockpiled Topsoil and necessary Imported Loam over Lawn and Planting Areas to compacted levels shown on Drawings. 3. Without over-compacting, roll and tamp Soil to prevent future settlement. 4. Remove Stones and Clods larger than 3/4 inch in size; Twigs and Sticks; and any other Foreign Matter. 5. Leave Surfaces ready for Soil-preparation Work by Landscape Subcontractor. 6. Position Finish Grade within 0.10 ft. of Grades shown on Drawings. 3.9 RECONDITIONING FINISHED WORK A. Where completed Work has been disturbed by subsequent Work,Operations, or Adverse Weather; scarify Surface, re-shape, and re-compact to required Density at no additional cost to Owner. MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p8 of 9 3.10 PROTECTION, CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Work which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. C. Correct/repair any damage resulting from earthwork operations END OF SECTION MASTER 02300 earthwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02300 p9 of 9 SECTION 02315 UTILITY TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Excavate trenches, including the removal of all pavement, earth, boulders, brick, stone and concrete masonry, small structures, obstructions and other materials encountered as required for the construction of the underground utilities shown on the drawings. B. Backfill and compact utility trenches to the elevation of adjacent grades. 1.2 RELATED INFORMATION SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Geotechnical Data: Section 00320 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Landscaping: Section 02900 C. Division 15 Plumbing D. Division 16 Electrical 1.4 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS A. Notify Owner of unforeseen or unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. B. Unforeseen work is as described in Earthwork Section 02300. 1.5 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain and pay for any Permits and Inspections required by governing Agencies and Utility Companies. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify all locations and measurements prior to starting Work. System layout on Drawings, including existing Utility locations, is diagrammatic and may not be exact. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Owner prior to starting Work. 1.7 PROTECTION A. Provide for all applicable protections of people and property as described in Section 02300, Earthwork. 1.8 TESTING MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 pl of 7 A. Provide 24 hour notice to geotech firm for inspections, monitoring and testing services B. Compaction and other soil tests and monitoring will be performed per Testing Section 01453 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials complying with recommendations for materials as described in geotech report for structural fills,general fills,backfills, and trench bedding. B. Provide materials complying with specific details and specifications in Civil Drawings C. When applicable materials are not described or included in the geotech report or the civil drawings, meet the following minimum requirements: 1. CRUSHED ROCK a. Washed, sound, durable,uniform, evenly-graded Rock which is free of soft, friable, thin, elongated,or laminated pieces, disintegrated Material, Organic Matter, Oil,Alkali, or other Deleterious Substance. b. Mechanically crush as follows: c. Fracture at least 70 percent of Particles on at least 2 faces. d. Unfractured Particles: e. 3/8 inch and larger: 10%maximum f. Smaller than 3/8 inch: 5%maximum g. Gradation: h. Even from Coarse to Fine. i. Maximum Size: j. At Pipe Beds and Pipe Zones: 3/4 inch k. At Backfills: 1-1/2 inches 2. PEA GRAVEL a. Round,water-worn,washed, sound, durable, uniform, evenly graded Rock which is free of soft,friable,thin, elongated or laminated Pieces, disintegrated Material,Organic Matter, Oil,Alkali, or other Deleterious Substance. b. Maximum Size: 1/2 inch • 3. SAND a. Fine granular material naturally produced by Rock disintegration and free from Organic Material.,Mica,Loam, Clay, and other'Deleterious Substances. 4. NATIVE MATERIAL a. Excavated Soil native to Project Site and free of Solids larger than 3 inch diameter, Wood,and other Deleterious Materials. 2.2 BURIED UTILITY MARKERS A. Tracer Wire: 18 ga. min. solid Copper protected by Green Insulation. MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 p2 of 7 B. Metallic Foil: 1. Manufacturer&Brand: Reef Industries, Inc. Terra Tape, or approved. 2. Material: Metallic Foil inert to Soil Conditions 3. Thickness: 1 mil 4. Width: 3 inches 5. Imprinted Message: 6. "Caution(Type of Utility) Line buried below" 7. Repeat Message over full length of Tape. 8. Extent of Work: Provide both Markers directly above all metallic and non-metallic buried utilities 2.3 CASINGS FOR BORED CROSSINGS,IF ANY A. Material: Steel Pipe B. Minimum Wall Thickness: 1. At Casings less than 14 inches diameter: 0.188 inch 2. At 14 inch diameter Casings and larger: 0.281 inch C. Diameter: As required to provide adequate working space for Pipe installation. D. Joints: Continuously welded,rigid, smooth,and watertight PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify the location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required to make connections to existing utilities. 1. Maintain in operating condition existing active utilities encountered during utility installation. B. Prior to starting Work, verify that existing conditions are suitable to perform work. 1. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 2. Notify Owner about defects requiring correction. C. Should any suspected Contaminated Soil be encountered perform the following: 1. Immediately notify Owner and comply with Owner's directions 2. Comply with Regulatory Agency requirements. 3. Perform no Work that could disturb or spread suspected Contaminated Soil. 4. Owner will employ and pay Testing Lab to confirm presence of Contaminated Soil. 3.2 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Excavate trenches in an uphill direction where possible, beginning at the lowest elevation to facilitate groundwater removal and to prevent potential rainwater run-off accumulation in open trenches. In the event that the Contractor wishes MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 p3 of 7 to deviate from this, sufficient elevation checks shall be made of the eventual downstream terminus points and approval shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to beginning work. B. Trenching operations shall be performed in accordance with Local, State, and Federal Codes to provide protection for workers or adjacent pavements, utilities, and structures. This shall include provision for any and all lateral bracing, shoring or trench box support. C. The excavations shall be made to a level that allows pipe and structures to be placed to the lines and grades shown on the Contract Drawings. All excavations shall be of sufficient width to allow men to work efficiently in the trench and to allow proper backfilling below the pipe spring line. D. During excavation, materials suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner far enough from bank of the trench to avoid overloading, slides, or cave-ins. E. All obstructions including boulders and existing concrete foundations shall be removed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, except as described for unforeseen conditions in section 02300, Earthwork. F. The bottom of the excavation shall be shaped so that the entire length of the excavation is firm undisturbed soil. If obstructions are encountered at invert elevation they shall be removed and compacted granular material shall be placed so that the pipe is uniformly bedded. G. Surface water, snow, and ice shall be prevented from accumulating into trenches or other excavations by temporary grading or other methods, as required. No pipe or cable shall be placed in water. Accumulated water in trenches or other excavations shall be removed by pumping or other acceptable methods. H. Provide sump pumps and other equipment to dewater excavations. The water level shall be maintained a minimum of 6 inches below the invert elevation during pipe installation. Disposal of water shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and any authorities having jurisdiction. I. If the soils existing at invert grade are wet, soft, or otherwise unsuitable for adequate support of the utility being constructed, the geotech Engineer shall determine if additional excavation to more suitable material, or special foundation preparation is necessary. If removal and replacement is necessary, the Contractor shall excavate to firm soil as directed by the Engineer and backfill the over-excavation with bedding material specified in this Section. J. Remove all wet, soft soils which result from natural ground conditions or that becomes soft due to weather conditions or from personnel working in the trench. K. Excavated materials which cannot be reused as subgrade fill or general backfill shall be disposed of off-site,unless otherwise directed by Owner. MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 p4 of 7 L. Make appropriate provisions for public safety. Excavations left open overnight shall be adequately covered and fenced off as necessary to ensure safety. M. Field changes to pipe/structure invert elevations may be necessary due to conflicts with existing utilities. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer and any adjustments to the Contract Drawings shall be made by the Engineer. The Contractor shall perform these adjustments during construction at no additional cost to the Owner provided lines and grades do not deviate more than five (5) horizontal feet and one (1) vertical feet from the Contract Drawings. 3.3 CUTTING EXISTING PAVEMENT A. Comply with jurisdiction requirements and standards for work in public right of ways. B. Meet the following minimum requirements when not in R.O.W. or when not in conflict with public work standards: 1. Cut,prior to excavating, with vertical, straight-line Joints using Pavement Saw or other Tool designed for cutting Pavement. 2. Make Cuts parallel or perpendicular to Pavement centerline. 3. Pavement Cut Width: Extend Cut 1 ft. beyond each side of Excavation. 4. Replace Pavement to condition at least as good as existing prior to cutting. Comply with Project 3.4 TRENCHING-EXCAVATIONS: A. Comply with project earthwork recommendations in the geotech report and specific details and specifications on Construction Documents. B. Strip available topsoil from areas to be excavated and stockpile where and as directed by Owner. C. Excavate to Lines and Grades shown on Drawings or Specifications, unless otherwise directed by Owner. 1. Allow ample Space for Pipe and Pipe Bedding. 2. Leave Bearing Surfaces undisturbed, level, and true. 3. Hand-grade where necessary. 4. No blasting or explosives are permitted 5. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings or geotech report, allow for at least 24 inches cover over Pipe. D. Excavation Width: If not otherwise directed by geotech report on contract documents, excavate widths are as follows: 1. Where parallel Pipes are to be laid within single Trench: a. At least 18 inches wider than sum of inside diameters of parallel Pipes plus distance between Pipes. 2. Elsewhere: a. For 4 inch I.D. Pipes& Smaller: 18 inches minimum b. For 6 inch I.D. & larger Pipes: 24 inches minimum MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 p5 of 7 c. Increase widths where directed by Architect and where necessary to receive Shoring. E. Over-excavation: Where Excavation, through Contractor's error, is carried to levels lower than those shown on Drawings, fill and per geotech instructions. 3.5 PIPE BEDDING INSTALLATION A. Placement of bedding material shall not proceed until the Engineer has inspected and approved the subgrade. If necessary, the Contractor shall compact the subgrade using hand operated compaction equipment as required by the Engineer. B. Trench bedding for utility pipe, conduit, or cable installation shall be constructed as detailed on the Contract Drawings and per geotech engineer recommendations. In the absence of detail specifications, provide the following: 1. Provide sand bedding for plastic pipe or direct-buried wiring and crushed rock at all other bedding for the full width of trench. 2. Minimum thickness below Pipe bottom: 4 inches 3. Excavate Bell Holes at each Joint to permit proper Joint assembly and inspection. 4. Hand-shape Trench Bottom to provide uniform, even-support over bottom 120°of Pipe. Firmly support full Pipe length; do not rest Bell-to-Bell. C. Additional bedding materials shall be placed from the top of the bedding material around the pipe zone as detailed on drawings and compacted with the compaction equipment specified in this Section. 1. Sufficiently compact pipe zone material to prevent pipe movement during final backfilling. 2. At pipe smaller than 15 inches diameter: backfill with pipe zone material to 10 inches above Pipe top. 3. At 15 inch and larger diameter pipe: ,backfill up to pipe spring-line simultaneously on both sides and carefully pack under Pipe Haunches. 3.6 BURIED UTILITY MARKER INSTALLATION A. Install 10"min to 12"max above the top of Buried Pipe: 3.7 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Remove debris and decayable matter from areas to be filled before proceeding. B. Pipe backfill shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6-8 inches in thickness and each lift shall be compacted with a minimum of 4 passes using the appropriate equipment. Any backfill materials pumping or weaving under the compaction equipment shall be removed and replaced with properly compacted backfill. C. Boulders and cobbles larger than 6 inches shall not be placed as trench backfill. Any such materials may be disposed of or placed within general fill areas on the project site in areas as directed by the Owner. D. Compact to requirements outlined by Earthwork section 02300 MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 p6 of 7 E. Protect utility installation: 1. Do not drop sharp, heavy Material onto Pipe. 2. Do not use sharp Tamping Tool around Pipe. 3. Do not push Backfill Material into Trench allowing Material to free-fall into open Trench,until at least 2 feet of Cover is provided over Pipe. 3.8 PROTECTING,CLEANING, AND REPAIRING COMPLETED WORK A. Replace any Slabs and Pavement which develop Settlement Cracks during Warranty Period. B. Re-grade any Unsurfaced Areas where settlement develops during Warranty Period. C. Protect against displacement and intrusion by foreign Matter. D. Where completed areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. E. Remove debris from project site upon work completion. END OF SECTION MASTER 02315 utility trenching.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02350 p7 of 7 SECTION 02770 SITE CONCRETE - PAVEMENT. WALKS&CURBS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install concrete sidewalks, vehicular paving, curbs, gutters, planters, and transformer pads, including reinforcement and specified finishes. B. Include Formwork Design and Engineering when applicable 1.2 RELATED WORK. A. Section 02200—Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving, backfilling. B. Section 03346—Concrete Finishing: Non-slip surfacing. C. Section 07900—Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. If and where working within Public Right-of-way, comply with governing Public Agency Specifications, if more restrictive than specified herein. B. ACI 301 —Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. ACI 305 —Specifications for Hot Weather Concrete Placement D. ACI 306—Specifications for Cold Weather Concrete Placement E. ANSI/ASTM A185—Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ANSI/ASTM D1751 —Pre-formed Expansion Joint Fillers. G. ASTM A615—Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM C33—Concrete Aggregates. I. ASTM C94—Ready Mixed Concrete. J. ASTM C150—Portland Cement. K. ASTM C260—Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. L. ASTM C309—Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. M. ASTM C494—Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain materials from same source throughout. 1.5 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Hot Weather Placement: per ACI 305. B. Cold Weather Placement: per ACI 306. MASTER 02770 site concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p 1 of 7 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MIX AND MATERIALS A. Comply with specifications on contract drawings. Where none shown, comply with following: B. Cement: ASTM C150 Air Entraining-Type I or II A, Portland type, gray C. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: per ASTM C33, 1 '/2"max D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. E. Entrained Air:per ASTM C-260; 5%to 7% F. Admixtures: per ASTM C494, as determined by climatic conditions and as approved by testing laboratory and BSL 1. Water Reducing: Type: A 2. Water reducing and retarding, Type D 3. Water reducing and accelerating, Type E 4. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by testing laboratory. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 5. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by testing laboratory. G. Calcium Chloride: None permitted. H. Mix Design: 1. Readymix type conforming to ASTM C-94 2. Minimum 28 day compressive strength: 3500 psi, 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inch Slump. Add Water only with Owner's permission. 2.2 FORMS A. Conform to ACI 301. If using metal, material shall be free from deformities. If using wood, use good grade lumber or plywood, sound and free of warp and defect. Where radii of curves require thinner forms, use plywood bent to radii. B. Minimum Strength: Without Concrete deformation, support Concrete and withstand impact induced by Concrete placement and vibration. C. Provide each Form Section with positive Locking Device to align and secure Formwork in accurate position. D. Form Treatment: Non-staining Oil of Contractor's choice. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Provide type as shown and specified in Contract Drawings B. Where not shown,provide: MASTER 02770 site concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p2 of 7 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars,uncoated finish. 2. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type,ANSI/ASTM A185; in flat sheets or rolls; uncoated fmish. 3. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, minimum 16 gage size. 4. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade,plain steel,uncoated finish. Mesh Opening Size,: 6x6 inches C. Extent of Work: Provide in Flatwork where subject to Vehicular Loads. 2.4 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER A. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, provide ''Y2" asphalt-impregnated fiber, per ASTM D-1751 to extend through full slab depth and recessed below the top of slab as required for proper joint sealant installation. 2.5 CURNG COMPOUND A. Curing Compound: ASTM C-1315, Type II, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Prior to Formwork Installation: Verify that Earthwork is complete and Granular Base is compacted as specified. B. Prior to Reinforcement Installation: Verify that Surfaces and Formwork to receive Reinforcement are accurately sized and located, square, plumb, rigid, secure, and otherwise properly prepared. C. Prior to Concrete Placement: Verify that Formwork, Reinforcement, and Embedded Items are accurately and securely placed, clean, water and frost- free, and ready to receive Concrete. D. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile. B. Adequately brace to withstand loads applied during concrete placement. C. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. D. Make tight to prevent Concrete leakage and protect against undermining or settlement when placed on ground. E. Reposition to true alignment prior to, during, and after Concrete placement, if necessary. During Concrete placement, in areas where Formwork develops weakness, settlement, or distortion, stop Concrete placement, remove placed Concrete, and remove or strengthen Formwork. MASTER 02770 site concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p3 of 7 F. Lightly oil immediately prior to Concrete Placement 3.3 FORMWORK CLEANING,REMOVAL,AND REUSE A. Remove debris and foreign matter from Formwork prior to Concrete placement B. Remove loose rust and foreign matter from reusable Hardware prior to installation into Formwork. C. Leave Forms in place until Concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely support own weight and any imposed loads. D. Withdraw projecting Fasteners and clean Concrete Form contact surfaces. Replace with new material when necessary or when directed. E. Re-use Forms only when contact-surfaces equal those specified for original use 3.4 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Place reinforcement in middle of slabs-on-grade. B. Provide doweled joints at expansion joints with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement. C. Place reinforcement to achieve slab and curb alignment as detailed. D. Steel shall be free of rust, mill scale, dirt and oil. E. Install reinforcement as indicated in drawing details. If not shown, provide minimum 6 x 6 10-10 WWF in all exterior concrete flatwork and provide 6 x 6 6-6 WWF flat sheets in all vehicular paving. Welded wire roll fabric shall be lapped 6" at sides and ends of fabric. F. Reinforcing shall be continuous through all joints, unless specifically noted otherwise. G. If not indicated, minimum curb reinforcement to be #4 top and bottom continuous. 3.5 CONCRETE INSTALLATION A. Remove foreign matter from surfaces and areas to receive Concrete. B. Wet Granular Base and any other Porous Surfaces to eliminate suction. C. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will be obtained after vibrating and finishing operations. Minimize handling to prevent segregation. Consolidate concrete by suitable means to prevent formation of voids or honeycombs. Exercise care to prevent disturbance of forms. Convey and place by methods which will prevent material separation and loss. D. Comply with special procedures for hot or cold weather replacement, as applicable. E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. MASTER 02770 site concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p4 of 7 F. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. G. Comply with grades shown on drawings. 1. All walks and slabs shall slope a of 1/4"/ft MINIMUM and away from the buildings and in a direction to prevent ponding. 2. Slabs within 5' of any doorway and at accessible parking spaces and aisles shall slope a MAXIMUM of/4"/ft,but also away from the building and in a direction to prevent ponding. 3. All concrete slabs shall be puddle-free H. Coat Bonding Agent over existing Concrete to be joined with new Concrete, per manufacturer's directions. 3.6 CONCRETE COMPACTION A. Employ mechanical, high-frequency Vibrators to consolidate Concrete around Reinforcement, into corners and angles of Forms, and to exclude rock pockets, air bubbles,and honeycomb. B. Hold Vibrator in one spot no longer than 15 seconds; keep in constant motion, insert and withdraw at points approximately 18 inches o.c. C. Maintain Vibrator in vertical position when penetrating Concrete. D. Do not transport Concrete with Vibrator. E. Consolidate Concrete without segregation. 3.7 CONCRETE JOINTS A. Provide concrete joints as shown on drawings: 1. Make perpendicular to line of walkway, form to true, straight lines,and with slabs flush at joints. 2. All sawcut joints and expansion joints shall be filled with sealant as specified by Section 07920. Recess top of filler 1/2 inch for sealant placement. 3. When no detailed drawing information is provided, comply with the following: B. Construction Joints (at work stoppage, or wherever concrete is poured against hardened concrete and no expansion joint is require: 1. Provide a bulkhead of sufficient section to prevent deflection, shaped to concrete section. Provide formed construction joint or bulkhead to permit continuation of longitudinal reinforcing steel through construction joint. Thicken edge of slab for proper formed key-way or construction joint. 2. At unintended stoppage of concrete, place available concrete to a line and install bulkhead perpendicular to surface of pavement and at required elevation. Reinforcement shall continue through the stoppage or cold joint. Place and finish concrete to this bulkhead. Remove and dispose of concrete remaining on subgrade ahead of bulkhead. 3. When placing of concrete is resumed remove bulkhead, carefully preserve joint face and continue concrete pour. MASTER 02770 site concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p5 of 7 C. Control Joints(crack control): 1. Provide sawed control joints except where tooled control joints are specifically noted. 2. Saw joints after completion of finishing operations as soon as concrete has hardened to extent necessary to prevent reveling of joint or damage to adjacent concrete surfaces. 3. Saw joints same day that concrete is placed except that sawing of joints in concrete placed late in day may be delayed until morning of following day. In any event, saw joints within 18 hours after placing concrete. 4. Use a power-driven concrete saw made especially for sawing concrete and maintain in good operating condition. Saw blades shall make a clean, smooth cut, 5. Provide joints 1/8" - 3/16" wide and a depth equal to 1/3 of slab thickness ( 1" min. depth). 6. Spacing: - a. Vehicular Paving: Provide control joints at intervals of approx. 18' x 16' (approx. area 288 sq. ft. ±). Sawcut every two car width 18' and divide parking bay width (62' to 64') into four equal sections of approx. 16'. b. Sidewalks: Provide 3/4" deep, tooled joints in sidewalks at intervals not greater than width of walk, or in pattern as indicated. For large, featured, or decorative slabs, submit joint pattern for approval. c. Curbs: Provide 1" minimum deep intermediate sawcut joints at 15'- 18' on center along the length of curb, coordinated with parking space module. D. Expansion Joints(for movement): 1.. Place expansion joints between concrete paving or sidewalks and abutting buildings, curbs,planters, walls or other appurtenances. 2. Vehicular Paving and large slabs: Install expansion joints in pavements as shown on drawings, or if not shown, at a maximum 100' spacing and at all intersections that divide major expanses of pavement 3. Curbs: Provide 1/2" expansion joint fillers at every 45' on center. 4. Sidewalks: Provide 1/2" expansion joints in sidewalks at all re-entrant corners and at approximately 25' intervals along length, coordinated with control joint spacing. • 5. When work starts or stops at an expansion joint, install joint assembly for an expansion joint, with a bulkhead of sufficient section drilled to accommodate required dowels (minimum size #4 at 16" o.c.). Install 1/2" expansion joint filler drilled to fit dowels and cover dowels with expansion sleeves to form the expansion joint and allow for longitudinal movement. E. All control joints and expansion joints shall be filled with sealant as specified by Section 07900. Recess top of filler as required for proper sealant placement. 3.8 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After consolidating and screeding, float concrete level to within specified tolerances. Use a straight edge to level and test surface in longitudinal MASTER 02770 site concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p6 of 7 direction to required grade. Finish edges to provide a smooth dense surface with 1/4" radius. B. Finish Texture: 1. Vehicular Paving: Heavy broom. 2. Sidewalks, utility slabs: Light broom,tooled trowel joints and edges perpendicular to long slab dimension. 3. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom parallel to curb direction 4. Featured or Accent slabs: special finish as noted on drawings C. Install Detectable Warning Strips at accessible routes as shown on drawings : 1. Comply with local and jurisdictional requirements 2. In the absence of drawing details or specific jurisdictional requirements, provide texture of 1/8"d x 1/4"w grooves pressed into wet concrete with long axis of grooves perpendicular to adjacent Curb direction D. Curing: 1. Uniformly apply Compound in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, after final Concrete finishing is complete, and after all free Water has disappeared from Pavement Surface. Minimum Curing Period: 3 days 2. Apply to Concrete Edges immediately after Formwork removal. 3.9 PROTECTING, CLEANING, &REPAIRING COMPLETED WORK A. Cover Work specified herein against damage and discoloration. B. Replace any concrete work that is defective at no additional cost to Owner, including but not limited to slabs which show excessive cracks, are damaged or discolored, or do not drain properly. C. Clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products of other trades which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section. D. Remove debris from project site upon work completion. END OF SECTION MASTER 02770 site eoncrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02770 p7 of 7 SECTION 02820 CHAIN LINK FENCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide permanent, PVC-coated chain link fence: framework, fabric, and accessories, including excavation and concrete anchorage for posts, gates and related hardware. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Site Clearing: Section 02230 B. Site Grading: Section 02300 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. Comply with applicable requirements of specifications published by Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute; 9891 Broken Land Parkway; Suite 300; Columbia, MD 21046; (301) 596-2583. B. Specifications can be obtained from Institute. 1.4 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Employed by or acceptable to Fence Manufacturer 1.5 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE A. Submit Manufacturer's affidavit the Materials and Finishes conform to these Specifications. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Deliver with Manufacturer's Tags and Labels intact and legible. C. Labels or Tags shall identify Manufacturer, brand name, material, size, and applicable standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POSTS &FRAMES A. Material: Steel B. Coating: Black, 7 mil thick PVC extruded C. Shape: Round D. Diameter: 1. Line Posts: 2-3/8 inches 04. MASTER 02820 chain link fencing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02820 p 1 of 3 2. Top&Brace Rails: 1.66 inches o.d. 3. Terminal Posts: 2-7/8 inches o.d. E. Fence Height: 72 inches unless noted on drawings F. Required Brace Locations: 1. Between Post tops 2. End Posts 3. Pull Posts 4. Corner Posts, including adjustable, diagonal, 3/8 inch diameter Tension Rods. G. Tension Cables between Posts: Required at bottom only. 2.2 FABRIC A. Material: 9ga. Steel Wire B. Coating: Black, 7 mil thick PVC extruded, per ASTM F668 Class 1 C. Mesh Opening Size: 2 inches square D. Selvage: Knuckled top and bottom 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Follow Referenced Specifications. B. Provide all required for,complete installation. 2.4 CONCRETE A. Cement: ASTM C-150 type I-II B. Aggregate: ASTM C-33,3/4 inch maximum. C. Water: Clean&potable D. Entrained Air: ASTM C-160, 3% -5%of Concrete Volume. E. Max. Slump: 3 inches F. Min. 28 day Compressive Strength: 2,500 psi PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Site and Ground Work are accurately graded, completed, and in condition to receive Fencing. B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING OTHER WORK A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. MASTER 02820 chain link fencing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02820 p2 of 3 B. Protect contacting Dissimilar Materials against Galvanic Corrosion. 3.3 SITE CLEARING A. Completely clear areas within 1 ft. of Fence Post Footing, and within 6 inches of Fence Fabric. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Install rigid,plumb, true, in perfect alignment, and in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and Referenced Specifications. B. Posts: 1. Set plumb to 1/4 inch in 10 ft. and not more than 10 ft. apart. 2. Set not less than 36 inches deep into 12-inch diameter Concrete Footings; not less than 4 inches of Concrete below Post bottom. 3. Remove excess Earth. C. Fabric: 1. Install taut, cover full-height of Fence, and extend to within approximately 1 inch above adjacent Ground Surface at Posts. 2. Join Fabric ends by weaving with single strand of Fabric Wire to form continuous mesh pattern with Selvage twisted to match Fabric. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING &REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion,or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 02820 chain link fencing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02820 p3 of 3 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING See Landscaping Specifications on Drawings. END OF SECTION • MASTER 029001andscaping.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 02900 pl of 1 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 03100 concrete formwork.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 03100 p1 of 1 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 03200 concrete reinforcement.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 03200 pl of 1 SECTION 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 03300 cast in place concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 03300 p1 of 1 SECTION 03510 SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide self-leveling, gypsum-based, underlayment as shown on drawings B. Provide underlayment over sheathing of all wood-framed floors sheathing. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Plywood Sheathing to receive Underlayment: Section 06100 1.3 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Approved by Underlayment Manufacturer. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,undamaged Packages with legible Identifying Labels.intact, or in acceptable Bulk Handling Equipment. 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Store above ground, and protect against contamination, deterioration, and moisture. B. Remove from Jobsite and replace Materials showing signs of moisture damage, caking, deterioration, or contamination. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Follow Manufacturer's recommendations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work of this Section will bond to existing Substrates, and will not delaminate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENT A. Manufacturer&Brand: Maxxon Gyp-Crete 2000/3.2k, or approved. B. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2500 psi 2.2 PRIMER A. Floor Primer as approved by manufacturer. 2.3 SAND MASTER 03510,self leveling concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 03510 p1 of 3 A. Washed Masonry, Mortar, or Plaster Sand complying with manufacturer's requirements. 2.4 WATER A. Condition: Potable, free of Impurities, and conforming to Building Code. 2.5 OTHER MATERIALS A. Made or recommended by Manufacturer. 2.6 MIXING& PLACING EQUIPMENT A. Approved by Underlayment Manufacturer. 2.7 MIXING A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. 2.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Underlayment are clean, dry, free of Bond- reducing Substances, and are otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction, including any loose or unsound Substrate. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 2.9 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 2.10 TIME TO PERFORM WORK A. Delay Work as long as possible to minimize possible damage by Work of other Sections. 2.11 PREPARATORY WORK A. Remove any Dirt, Dust, Oil, Wax, Efflorescence, Sealer, Compound, loose Substrate, loose Debris, and any other Foreign Matter. 2.12 PRIMING A. Follow Underlayment Manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3,1 PREPARATION A. Subfloor should be structurally sound. Subfloor must be clean and free of all mud, oil, grease and any other contaminants prior to pouring the underlayment. Fill any cracks or voids in substrate to prevent material leakage B. Building envelope must be enclosed. MASTER 03510 self leveling conerete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 03510 p2 of 3 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT PLACEMENT A. Follow Underlayment Manufacturer's instructions. B. Exercise care to prevent Material segregation. C. Thickness: 3/4 inch D. Finish with Steel Trowel where necessary to produce smooth, dense,solid Surface suitable to receive Flooring. 3.3 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Underlayment Surface: True within 1/8 inch per 10 ft. 3.4 CURING A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 SURFACE SEALING A. Seal Underlayment with Primer. 3.6 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Until.Finish Covering is installed,protect Underlayment against damage by contamination, impact, or overloading. 3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 03510 self leveling concrete.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 03510 p3 of 3 SECTION 04100 MASONRY MORTARS &GROUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Mortar and grout for unit masonry. B. Provide as specified herein, except as otherwise noted by specifications or details on structural drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 01410—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 04300— Unit Masonry System: Installation of mortar. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C91 —Masonry Cement. B. ASTM C94—Ready-Mixed Concrete. C. ASTM C 144—Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. D. ASTM C150—Portland Cement. E. ASTM C207—Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. F. ASTM C270—Mortar for Unit Masonry. G. ASTM C387—Packaged,Dry,Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. H. ASTM C476—Grout for Reinforced and Non-reinforced Masonry. I. ASTM C780—Pre-construction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. J. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council(IMIAC)— Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. K. Brick Institute of America,Technical Notes 8, 8A and 8B. 1.4 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar mix cubes under provisions of Section 01410. B. Test grout mix cylinders under provisions of Section 01410. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. If ready-mixed Mortar or Grout is used, furnish certificate from Mixing Plant stating that delivered Mortar conforms to Specifications. 1.6 SUBMITTALS MASTER 04100 mortar&grout.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04100 pl of 3 A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01001. B. Include design mix, environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during,and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. If climatic conditions are prohibitive, see'B'below. B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC—Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS • A. General Portland. B. Gifford Hill. C. Approved Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01000. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM Ci.50,normal-Type I; gray color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91., for general use. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. D. Grout Course Aggregate: Maximum 3/8 inch size. E. Grout Fine Aggregate: Standard masonry type sand. F. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S. G. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387,using gray cement, Water: Clean and potable. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Rheomix 235 manufactured by Master Builders Co. Add water repellent to mortal mix as per recommended by the manufacture. B. Mortar Color: where required by drawings to match masonry units. 2.4 DESIGN MIX 1. Unit Masonry Mortar: 1800 psi. 2. Masonry Grout: 2000 psi. 3. Pointing Mortar: 750 psi. 2.5 GROUT FILL MASTER 04100 mortar&grout.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04100 p2 of 3 A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 7-8 inches slump;premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. 2.6 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270 and C476. Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight. Dry batch materials for 3—5 minutes before adding water. Only add as much water as necessary to produce workable consistency. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout. PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. After inspection of concrete grout spaces by BSL,plug cleanout holes with masonry units. Brace against wet grout pressure. B. Install mortar and grout in accordance with 04300. C. Work,grout into cores and cavities to eliminate voids. D. Do not displace reinforcing steel when placing grout. E. Use Mortar and Grout only within 2 hours after initial mixing. F. Clean concrete grout spaces of excess mortar and debris. 3.2 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 04100 mortar&grout.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04100 p3 of 3 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide and install concrete unit masonry as shown on drawings, including reinforcement, anchorages, loose lintels, and other accessories. B. Provide and install masonry flashings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Masonry Mortars& Grouts: Section 04100 B. Transparent Water Repellent: Section 07180 C. Joint Sealants: Section 07920 1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Steel Lintels: Section 05500 B. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07620 C. Hollow Steel Frames: Section 08110 D. Aluminum Frames: Section 08400 1.4 SAMPLES A. to accordance with Section 01330, submit full size samples of each masonry unit or blend when used as a finish material B. Show texture and full color range. 1.5 FIELD MOCK UP A. When requested by BSL, construct a mockup panel demonstrating masonry color range, texture, typical coursing, bond,reinforcing,joint treatment,mortar color, etc. B. Mockups of 4' x4' or less shall be included in cost of work. Larger or more elaborate mockups including adjacent materials and complex construction will be negotiated as an additional cost. C. No work shall be started until mock-up is reviewed and accepted. D. Accepted Mock-Up represents minimum acceptable workmanship standard. Work of lesser quality is subject to rejection and replacement. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.7 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS MASTER 04200 unit masonry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04200 p1 of 6 A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. If environmental conditions do not allow this, follow'B' below for cold weather. In hot weather(above 99 degrees F with less than 50%relative humidity) protect masonry construction from direct exposure to sun and wind. B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC—Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK A. None included in this project 2.2 STANDARD CONCRETE BLOCK A. Hollow Units: ASTM C90, Grade N,Type I; normal weight. B. Solid Units: ASTM C 145, Grade N, Type I; normal weight. C. Modular sized to 8 x 8 x 16 inch (other sizes as indicated); provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, caps, 45 degree corners, and lintels. D. Integral water-repellant admixture: W.R. Grace Dry Block, or approved. E. Gray Color, Standard Texture 2.3 SPLIT FACE CONCRETE BLOCK A. ASTM C90, Grade N,Type I; normal weight, l 900psi min compressive strength. B. Single-faced, split-face C. Modular sized to 8 x 8 x 16 inch(other sizes as indicated); provide special units for 90 degree corners,bond beams, caps,45 degree corners, and lintels. D. Integral water-repellant admixture: W.R. Grace Dry Block, or approved. E. Color as selected_by Owner from all manufacturers' standard selection, including those with white Portland cement. 2.4 ANCHORS AND REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement 1. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; galvanized steel construction; 3/16 inch side rods with 9 ga. cross ties; width slightly less MASTER 04200 unit masonry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04200 p2 of 6 than block width;Blok-Trus AA600 manufactured by AA Wire Products. Use pre-fabricated outside corners. B. Veneer Anchors 1. Not Included in this project C. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice D. Type: Permitting vertical and horizontal differential movement between Masonry Facing and Backup Support, and complying with IBC Sect.1405.5. E. Material: Galvanized Steel F. Size: Extend to within 1 inch of Masonry face. 2.5 SILL FLASHING A. Not Included in this project 2.6 MASONRY CLEANER A. Sure Klean Concrete Brick Cleaner by Prosoco, Kansas City,Missouri(800) 255-4255 2.7 MASONRY SEALER A. Masonry Sealer, by Prosoco, Kansa City, Missouri (800)255-4255 B. Select appropriate sealer for surfaces sealed. C. Coordinate with block mfr's use of integral water repellant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Masonry are accurately sized and located, solid, level, dry, clean, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Verify that foundations are constructed with tolerances and reinforcing dowels are positioned in accordance with Project Drawings C. Prior to starting Work notify BSL about defects requiring correction. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Establish Lines, Levels, and Coursing and protect lines from disturbance. B. Surface Preparation: Prior to placing Ultra-Brick remove laitance, loose aggregate or other material that would prevent mortar from bonding to the foundation. 3.3 COURSING A. Place Split Face to lines and levels indicated. MASTER 04200 unit masonry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04200 p3 of 6 B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. C. Place Split Face in 1/2 running bond unless otherwise noted. D. Course one Split Face and one mortar joint equal to 8 inches. 3.4 PLACING AND BONDING A. Bed and Head Joints: 1. Joint Thickness: a. Construct 3/8 inch bed and head joints unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construct bed joint at starting course on foundation not less than 'A inch and not more than 3/4 inch. 3. Fill holes not specified in exposed and below grade masonry with mortar. 4. Tool head and bed joints concave unless below grade or concealed and protected from weather. B. Concrete Masonry Unit Placement 1. Lay units with full width bed and head joints 2. Vertical cells to be grouted are aligned and unobstructed openings for grout are provided in accordance with drawings. 3. Keep cavity airspace and weep holes clean or mortar, clean out promptly if mortar falls into cavity airspace or plugs weep holes. 4. In-Progress Cleaning: a. Remove excess mortar. b. Dry brush exposed masonry prior to the end of each workday. c. Protect wall from mud splatter and mortar droppings. 5. Do not shift or tap Split Face after mortar has taken initial set. Remove unit and mortar and replace. 6. After joints are tooled, cut off mortar tailings with trowel and dry brush excess mortar burrs and dust from the face of the masonry 7. Fully bond external and internal corners and properly anchor intersecting wall. 3.5 TOLERANCES: A. Erect masonry within the following tolerances from specified dimensions: 1. Dimensions of Elements: a. In cross-section or elevation: -1/4 inch, +1/2 inch. b. Mortar joint thickness: c. Bed: Plus or minus 1/8 inch or plus 1/8 inch. d. Head:plus or minus 1/4 inch. 2. Elements: a. Variation from level: 1) Bed joints: plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 1/2 inch maximum. 2) Top of bearing walls: plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet; plus or minus 1/2 inch maximum. MASTER 04200 unit masonry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04200 p4 of 6 b. Variation from plumb: 1) plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet,plus or minus 3/8 inch in 20 feet,plus or minus 1/2 inch maximum. 3.6 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Place reinforcement and anchorages in accordance with the sizes, types, and locations indicated on the Drawings, and as specified. B. Completely embed reinforcement in grout C. Maintain clear distance between reinforcing bars and any face of masonry unit or formed surface: D. Place vertical reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement by means of bar positioners. E. Support bars other than vertical bars and tie to prevent displacement. F. Joint Reinforcement: 1. Install joint reinforcement at 16 inches on center vertically, except space at 8 inches on center in parapet walls and below finished floor unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first bed joints below top of masonry wall and bed joint 8 inches below first bed joint below top of wall. 3. Place joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wire are embedded in mortar: Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 4. Do not extend joint reinforcement through control joints. 3.7 WALL TIES: A. Not Included in this project 3.8 GROUT PLACEMENT A. Placement: 1. Place grout within 1-1/2 hours of introducing of mixing water and prior to initial set. 2. Prevent grout from flowing onto or otherwise staining faces of CMU intended to be exposed. B. Grout Lift Height: Place grout in lifts not to exceed 5 feet. C. Consolidation: Consolidate grout at the time of placement. 1. Consolidate grout pours 12 inches or less in height by mechanical vibration or puddling. 2. Consolidate grout pours exceeding 12 inches in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. 3.9 LINTELS MASTER 04200 unit masonry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04200 p5 of 6 A. Steel Lintels 1. Install loose steel lintels as scheduled. 2. Provide 9 gage Z-ties at each vertical joint of soap units covering steel lintels. Weld Z-ties to web of steel lintel. B. Concrete Masonry Lintels: 1. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. 2. Construct lintels using grout fill and reinforcing. a. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening unless otherwise noted on Drawings. b. Use reinforcing bars on one-piece lengths only. c. Place and consolidate grout without disturbing reinforcing. 3. Allow lintels to reach strength before removing temporary supports. 3.10 MOVEMENT JOINTS A. Control Joints: 1. Do not continue bond beams or joint reinforcing across control joints. 2. Install preformed control joint filler at locations indicated on Drawings. 3. Use proper size material to create sealant joint space. 4. Backer rod and sealant installed in accordance with Section 07900. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Install expansion joint filler material on centerline of wall at locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Backer rod and sealant installed in accordance with Section 07900. 3.11 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: clean unit masonry as Work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: 1. After mortar has set,reached initial curing; within 7 days of completion of work for custom masonry units, clean exposed masonry as follows: 2. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non- metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 3. Cut out any defective mortar joints and holes and re-point with mortar. 4. Protect non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaning solution by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent,polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 5. Clean Split Face units with masonry cleaner per mfr instructions. 3.12 SEALING A. Seal Split Face units with masonry sealer per manufacturer's END OF SECTION MASTER 04200 unit masonry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04200 p6 of 6 SECTION 04700 ADHERED MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adhered Manufactured Stone Veneer("Adhered Stone"on drawings) B. Manufactured Stone Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wall framing and blocking for stone veneer application. B. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:Weep screeds and wall and roof fleshings. C. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Sealers for treating gaps and penetrations. D. Section 09220-Portland Cement Plaster: Interior and exterior stucco applications. E. Section 10300-Fireplaces and Stoves: Fireplace facades, hearths and mantles. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(ACI). B. ASTM C 39-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. C. ASTM C 67-Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. D. ASTM C 177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. E. ASTM C 192-Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. F. ASTM C 270-Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. G. ASTM C 482-Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. H. ASTM.D 226-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. I. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): UL Listed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. MASTER 04700 adhered stone.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04700 p1 of 4 3. Color charts. 4. Installation methods. C. Detail Drawings: Submit detail drawings depicting proper installation and flashing techniques. Coordinate locations with those found on the Contract Drawings. D. Selection Samples: For each product specified,two samples representing manufacturer's product including textures and colors. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12 inches(305mm)square that depict the specified product, color, pattern and texture. F. Quality Assurance I Product Control Submittals: 1. 'Proof of manufacturer qualifications as described in Article-Quality Assurance. 2. Proof of installer qualifications as described in Article-Quality Assurance. 3. Current ICC-ES Report. 4. Certification of compliance with all code bodies having jurisdiction. 5. Test Reports for physical properties upon request. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Single manufacturer with at least five(5)years experience manufacturing and marketing all Manufactured Stone will provide all products in this section.. 2. Manufacturer will be affiliated with MSJC,ACI and ASTM. B. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including at least five(5)projects within a 400 mile(650km) radius of this Project. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Installation areas to be designated by Architect. 2. Selected areas may be part of area to receive stone finish. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship,color, laying pattern and grout are approved by Architect and I or others with approval authority. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Prior to installation protect material from precipitation combined with freezing temperatures: Product with visible frozen moisture should not'be installed. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. At project close-out, provide to the Owner an executed copy of the manufacturer's MASTER 04700 adhered stone.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04700 p2 of 4 standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sunset Stone,which is located at: 702 Prairie Hawk Dr. ; Castle Rock, CO 80109;Toll Free Tel: 800-598-8918; Tel:303-791-1233; Web: www.sunsetstone.net B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01630. 2.2 MANUFACTURED STONE A. Ledge: Narrow Stone 1 1/2"—3"inches high and 8"—22"inches long. B. Color and specific type to be selected by Owner/Architect 2.3 TRIM STONES AND ACCESSORIES A. Wainscot and Wall Caps: B. Trim Stones: 2.4 MORTAR A. Pre Mixed Mortar: Complying with ASTM C 270:type recommended by mfr. B. Portland Cement: Complying with ASTM C 150:Type I., gray C. Mortar Aggregate: Sand; Complying with ASTM C 144, standard masonry type. D. Hydrated Lime: Complying with ASTM C 207: E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Iron Oxide Pigments:ASTM C 979; Color'to be selected. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Wall Underlayment: 1. Asphalt Saturated Felt meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM D 226 Type I. 2. Weather Resistant Barrier meeting the requirements of ICC-ES AC-38 B. Metal Flashing: 1. 24 gauge galvanized steel;ASTM A 653. C. Metal Lath: 1. Type: Galvanized 2.5 lb.flat diamond mesh lath or as recommended by mfr. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 270. PART 3 EXECUTION MASTER 04700 adhered stone.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04700 p3 of 4 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Installations Over Wood Substrates: 1. Cover the approved substrate with a weather resistant barrier. Lap joints by applying felt horizontally with the upper layer lapped over the lower layer not less than 2 inches(51mm)and end laps not less than 6 inches(152mm). Install specified metal lath in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Use galvanized lath for exterior applications and black metal lath for interior applications. 2. Lap lath sides not less than 1 inch(25mm)and end laps not less than 1 inch (25mm). Lath must be attached with the small diamonds pointing upwards. On inside and outside corners, overlap at least 16 inches(406mm) in each direction. 3. Attach wire lath using 1 1/2 inch(38mm)minimum galvanized nails or Staples on 6 inch(152mm)centers penetrating each wall stud a minimum of I inch (25mm). 4. Apply a mortar scratch coat to cover the metal lath and apply the stone while the scratch coat is still moist. If the scratch coat dries before applying the stone,the scratch coat should be remoistened by spraying it with water. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Manufactured Stone in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Seal Sunset Stone products in areas of abnormal moisture contact and exposure to chemicals such as Magnesium Chloride(ice melt products). It is recommended using an impregnating breathable class of sealers,and applying per manufacture recommendation, in these areas of abnormal moisture exposure. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MASTER 04700 adhered stone.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 04700 p4 of 4 SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 05100 structural steel,doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 05100 pl of 1 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEEOUS FABRICATED STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide all Miscellaneous Fabricated Steel Work indicated, on Structural or Architectural Sheets, and as scheduled at the end of this section. B. Include all required Bolts and other Fastening Devices. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Steel Lintels installed under Section 04200. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED 1N OTHER SECTIONS A. Chain Link Fencing: Section 02820 B. Reinforcing Steel for Concrete: Section 03200 C. Anchors for Masonry: Section 04200 D. Steel Hardware for Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 E. Steel Supports for Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings: Section 09100 F. Steel Supports for Suspended Acoustic System Ceilings: Section 09500 G. Field Painting of Steel Items: Section 09900 H. Steel Rails for Elevators: Section 14200 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS A. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction; One East Wacker; S-3100; Chicago,IL 60601; (312)670-2400. B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute; 1819 L St. NW; 6th Floor; Washington DC 20036; (202)293-8020. C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials; 100 Barr Harbor Dr.; West Conshohocken,PA 19428; (610) 832-9585 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show locations, critical dimensions, required clearances, and construction details, installation methods including any splices, attachments, and anchors. 1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Store Fabricated Steel above ground on Platforms, Skids, or other approved Supports. B. Store other Materials in weather-tight and dry locations. MASTER 05500 miscellaneous steel.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 05500 p1 of 5 C. Store packaged Materials in original unbroken Containers. D. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify BSL prior to fabrication, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL SHAPES, BARS, &PLATES A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-36 or A-572 B. Minimum Yield Strength: 36 ksi 2.2 STEEL PIPE A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-53 B. Where Exposed to View: Type S C. Where Concealed from View: Type E D. Grade: A 2.3 STEEL TUBING A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-501 B. Minimum Yield Strength: 36 ksi 2.4 THREADED FASTENERS &ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturing Standard: 1. Bolts&Nuts: ASTM A 307,Grade A 2. Washers: ANSI Standard B 27 B. Size& Spacing: See Drawings C. Finish: 1, Where Fastening or Anchoring Galvanized Steel Items: Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-153 2. Elsewhere: Manufacturer's standard 2.5 WELDING ELECTRODES A. Series: E-70 B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use 2.6 SHOP PAINT A. Rust-Inhibiting Primer specified in Section 09900. MASTER 05500 miscellaneous steel.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 05500 p2 of 5 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form to accurate sizes and shapes, with sharp lines and angles, and in accordance with AISC Minimum Fabrication Standards. B. Punch and shear to leave clean Surfaces. C. Weld permanent Connections; grind exposed Welds smooth. D. Provide Holes and Connections for Work of other Trades. E. Cut abutting Members to fit with full bearing contact. F. Form Elbows and Bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists, and with finished Surfaces smooth. G. Miter and cope Member intersections within 2°, fit to within 0.02 inches, and weld all around. H. Where exposed to weather, form to exclude water; allow for expansion and contraction. I. Do not use Screws or Bolts when they can be avoided; when used countersink Heads, draw up tight, and nick Threads to prevent loosening. 2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum deviation of individual Members from dimensions shown on Drawings as follows: 1. Overall length of Members with both ends finished for compact bearing: 1/32 inch 2. Overall length of Members without finished ends: a. For Members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch b. For Members over 30 ft. long: 1/8 inch 3. Compressive Structural Member Straightness: 1/1000 of axial length between Lateral Support points, B. Twists, Bends, &Kinks: Unacceptable 2.9 SHOP TREATMENT A. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove Grease, Oil, Dirt, loose Rust, loose Mill Scale, and any other bond-reducing Materials. 2. Within 8 hours of Surface Preparation,apply the following: B. Treatment: 1. At Exterior Work, including Steel Lintels: Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-123. 2. At all other Steel: a. Apply 1 coat Shop Paint. b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 1.0 mil 3. Do not apply Shop Paint to the following: a. Within 2 inches of Surfaces to be field welded MASTER 05500 miscellaneous steel.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 05500 p3 of 5 • b. Surfaces to be encased in Concrete PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces and Structures to receive Fabricated Steel are accurately sized and located, square, plumb, true, rigid, secure, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Follow approved Shop Drawings. 2. Install to true lines, plumb and level, and as detailed or required for rigidity and permanence. B. Lintels: Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, provide not less than 8-inch bearing at each Lintel end. C. Corner Guards: Secure to Substrate with Steel Inserts and Bolts. D. Tube Railings: 1. Set vertical Members into Sleeves previously built into Concrete. 2. Position Railings parallel with adjacent Stair, Ramp, and/or Floor, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 3. Set true within 1/8 inch per 12 ft.;Brace as required. 4. Secure Railing Members cast into Concrete with Metal Wedges; caulk with Epoxy Grout. E. Steel Ladder: Install plumb, to true lines; anchor securely to adjacent Construction. F. Elevator Door Sill Supports: Secure to Substrate with Steel Inserts and Bolts. G. Pipe Bollards: 1. Bury lower section of Pipe at least 24 inches below adjacent Finish Surface. 2. Set Pipe plumb into 18 inch minimum diameter Concrete Footing. 3. Fill Pipe with Grout; slope Grout top for drainage and trowel smooth. Immediately remove any Grout Residual exposed on Pipe Surface. 3.3 TOUCH UP A. Touch up damaged Galvanized Surfaces with Zinc-Rich Paint. Match original Coating thickness, and apply in accordance with ASTM A-780. B. Touch up damaged Paint Surfaces with matching Paint. Apply in accordance with Paint Manufacturer's instructions. • MASTER 05500,miscellaneous steel.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 05500 p4 of 5 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Remove loose Rust, heavy Mill Scale, Oil, Dirt, and other bond-reducing Foreign Substances from Members scheduled to receive Finish Painting. B. Leave Surfaces ready for finishing specified in other Sections. C. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion,or sooner if directed. 3.5 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS STEEL A. Lintels: 1. Standard Steel shapes, sizes, and weights shown on Drawings. 2. Tap for other required Work. B. Corner Guards: 1. Standard Steel Angles, size shown on Drawings. C. Tube Railings: 1. Size noted on Drawings. 2. Fabricate to true lines;weld joints and grind smooth. 3. Provide Flanges and Fasteners for securing Horizontal Members. 4. Return Wall-mounted Handrail Ends to Wall. 5. Close exposed Open Railing Ends with 3/16 inch Welded Plate or Prefabricated Fitting. 6. Furnish 4 inch long Sleeves to General Contractor for casting Posts into Concrete. D. Steel Ladder: 1. Fabricate accurately; weld Joints and grind smooth. 2. Vertical Members: 3/8 x 2 inch Steel, spaced 18 inches apart and at least 7 inches clear of Wall. 3. Rungs: 3/4 inch round solid Steel Bars spaced 12 inches apart, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 4. Mortise Rungs into vertical Members, and weld securely. E. Pipe Bollards: Fabricate of Steel Pipe as shown on Drawings. F. Elevator Door Sill Supports: 1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, fabricate of Steel Angle as follows: 2. Size: 4x4 inches x 3/8" 3. Length: Match Elevator Door Sill 4. Extent of Work: Provide 1 at each Elevator Door Sill. END OF SECTION MASTER 05500 miscellaneous steel.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 05500 p5 of 5 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 06100 rough carpentry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06110 p1 of 1 SECTION 06174 PLYWOOD WEB JOISTS See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 06174 plywood web joists.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06174 p1 of 1 SECTION 06176 PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES See Structural Notes on Drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 06176 plate-connected wood trusses.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06176 p 1 of 1 SECTION 06180 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS SEE STRUCTURAL NOTES ON DRAWINGS. END OF SECTION MASTER 06180 glue-laminated structural units.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06180 p1 of 1 SECTION 06220 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide items of finish carpentry, including not limited to, exterior and interior trim,miscellaneous interior wood millwork, paneling, shelving, handrails, other railings,and stair parts 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 B. Custom-built Casework: Section 06410 C. Caulking& Sealing: Section 07920 D. Field Painting&Finishing: Section 09900 1.3 REFERENCED QUALITY STANDARDS A. General: 1. Unless otherwise modified herein, Quality Standards shall be determined by the Associations listed below. Standards can be obtained from Association. B. Material Standards: 1. Grading Rules of Western Wood Products Assn. (WWPA); 522 S.W. 5th Ave.;Portland, OR 97204; (503)224-3930; or Grading Rules of other Agency certified by Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. C. Workmanship.Standards: 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards published by American Woodwork Institute (AWI); 1952 Isaac Newton Sq.; Reston, VA 20190; (703) 733-0600. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Do not deliver Products to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is conditioned and prepared to handle and store Products without damage or discoloration. 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.6 TEMPERATURE&HUMIDITY A. Where Finish Carpentry Materials are located, maintain the following: 1. Minimum Temperature: 55°F MASTER 06220 finish carpentry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06220 pl of 4 2. Relative Humidity: 25%to 55% 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD-GENERAL A. Maximum Moisture Content at Installation Time: 12% 2.2 EXTERIOR FASCIAS A. Pre-primed pine or douglas fir 2x trim stock, s3s with R/S finish side, free of splits, tight sound knots, standard or better grade. Finger jointed boards not acceptable; longest pieces available; Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart 2.3 EXTERIOR RUNNING AND STANDING TRIM A. Primed MDF, Composite(fiber cement) or Red Cedar tight knot—Contractor's option. Sizes noted on drawings B. Use Composite battens on Board and Batten siding for consistent final finish. 2.4 INTERIOR RUNNING AND STANDING TRIM A. Primed MDF(painted),VG Hemlock(stained), unless otherwise noted. B. Typical Size and configurations unless noted otherwise on drawings. 1. Window sill: lx8 2. Window Apron: 1x3 3. Door Casing: 1x3 4. Bifold Dr jambs: 1x2 5. Bypass fascia: 1x3 6. Relite Casing: 1x4 7. Wall Caps: size detailed 8. Crown Moulding: 4" 9. Flat Ceiling.trim: 1x4 10. Fireplace Panel and trim: as detailed on drawings 11. Chair Rails,private dining: lx6 12. Wood Floor Base: 1x4, 1x6,or 1x8,per finish schedule C. Use Composite battens on Board and Batten siding D. Running Trim& Base: Longest lengths possible, Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart. MASTER 06220 finish carpentry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06220 p2 of 4 2.5 STAIRWAY SKIRTBOARDS, NEWELS, PANELING, WALL BASE, FIREPLACE PANEL AND TRIM, & OTHER STAINED INTERIOR MILLWORK A. VG Hemlock stain grade, unless otherwise noted. Size and configurations as noted on drawings. 2.6 CORRIDOR RAILING A. 2x6 Hemlock paint-grade,moulded to profile detailed. 2.7 METAL STAIR PARTS A. Bracket: Ives 05943 or equal , finish to match door hdw B. Balusters: crafted from ''/z" solid metal stock, smooth face, with single and dbl twists,per drawing details. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Finish Carpentry are straight,plumb, true, solid, rigid,and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install finish carpentry and millwork items,plumb, level and true, in accordance with industry standards. Blindnail where possible; set finish nails for puttying on exposed surfaces. Tool marks or abrasions on finish surfaces are not acceptable. Where attaching trim to drywall surfaces,use proper finish head drywall screws. Do not install trim until backs and unexposed edges have been backprimed. Accurately scribe and closely fit face plates, filler strips and trim strips to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. Miter corners. Ease sharp External Corners prior to finishing. B. Set exposed Nail Heads 1/16" below Wood surface. Counter-sink semi- concealed/larger anchorage devices used to wall mount components and conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush with surrounding surfaces. C. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting this Section of work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by BSL prior to commencement of installation. MASTER 06220 finish carpentry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06220 p3 of 4 D. Except as otherwise specified herein,comply with AWI Custom.Grade Workmanship Standards. E. Accurately scribe Filler Strips and Trim Strips to adjacent Surface irregularities.. 3.4 FASCIA, WALL BASE, STAIRWAY SKIRTBOARD, &TRIM INSTALLATION A. Fit carefully at Joints and against other Members. B. Locate Joints on solid bearing. C. Bevel-cut and glue End Joints. 3.5 RAILING INSTALLATION A. Secure Railing Brackets as recommended by Manufacturer with Noncorrosive Fasteners suitable for Wall and Railing Materials. B. Carefully align Railing and set parallel to adjacent Walking Surface. C. Fit carefully and locate Joints on Bearing. 3.6 MANTLE INSTALLATION A. Install in single, one-piece lengths. 3.7 PAINTING& FINISHING INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Before installing, finish concealed ends of Exterior Fascias and Trim as specified in Section 09900. 3.8 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Leave Surfaces ready for field-finishing specified in Section 09900. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 06220 finish carpentry.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06220 p4 of 4 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM BUILT CASEWORK& SHELVING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide custom-built cabinet and shelving as shown on drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish Carpentry: Section 06220 B. Field-applied Plastic Laminate Covering: Section 06415 C. Sinks&Fittings built into Casework, including plumbing connections: Division 15 D. Electrical Outlets& Conduit built into Casework, including electrical connections: Division 16 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Except as herein modified,Material and Workmanship Grades shall be as defined in 1994 edition of Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards published by American Woodwork Institute,hereinafter referred to as AWI; 1952 Isaac Newton Sq.; Reston, VA 20190; (703) 733-0600. B. Standards may be obtained from Institute. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces visible when Drawers and Doors are closed. 2. Cabinet bottoms, if any,42 inches or more above Floor. 3. Cabinet tops, if any, less than 72 inches above Floor. B. Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces which become visible after Drawers and Doors are opened, including backs of Doors. 2. Cabinet bottoms, if any, more than 30 inches but less than 42 inches above Floor. 3. Cabinet tops, if any, between 72 and 78 inches above Floor. C. Concealed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces not normally visible after installation. 2. Cabinet bottoms,if any, less than 30 inches above Floor. 3. Cabinet tops, if any, 78 inches or more above Floor. 4. Web Frames, Dust Panels, Stretchers, Blocking, and Backs behind Drawers. 1.5 COORDINATION MASTER 06410 custom built casework.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06410 p1 of 6 A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show locations,arrangements, shapes, dimensions,joint details, and other pertinent items. C. Show connections to adjacent Work, and complete assembly,whether or not Materials are furnished by Mill. -.D. Include Manufacturer's descriptive literature for Specialty Items. E. Identify Material Grades,Workmanship Grades,Wood Species, and Finishes. 1.7 SAMPLES A. In accordance with Section 01330, submit for review and acceptance 2 samples of each color of Plastic Laminate proposed for use. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Do not deliver Products to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is conditioned and prepared to handle and store Products without damage or discoloration. 1.9 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.10 TEMPERATURE& HUMIDITY A. Where Casework or Shelving is located, maintain the following: 1. Minimum Temperature: 55°F 2. Relative Humidity: 25%to 55% 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Wood and Thermafoil Finish Cabinets: Lanz Cabinets,Eugene, OR 541/485- 4050 B. Plastic Laminate Finish Casework and Countertops:Advance Cabinets, Eugene, OR 541/465-3394 MASTER 06410 custom built casework.doc"7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06410 p2 of 6 2.2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A. Wood Finish Cabinets 1. Style: 1 1/2"Overlay 2. Cabinet Front: Stained wood 3. Door Style: Chetco 4. Drawer construction: half-captive,butt joint, ''/z" body with '/4" bottom 5. Interior Concealed Surfaces/Case: 5/8"case white melanine/PB Core 6. Backs" 1/4" 1 sS white MDF 7. Finished Ends: 5/8" Maple/White MelanineLPB Core B. Therma Foil Finish Cabinets 1. Style: 1 'A"Overlay 2. Cabinet Front : white RTF,white lacquer frame 3. Door Style: Chetco 4. Drawer construction: half-captive, butt joint, 1/2" body with 1/4"bottom 5. Interior Concealed Surfaces/Case: 5/8"case white melanine/PB Core 6. Backs" '/4" 1 sS white MDF 7. Finished Ends: 5/8"Maple/White Melanine/PB Core C. HPL Plastic Laminate Finish Cabinets 1. Style: 1 '/2"Overlay 2. Cabinet Front: plastic laminate, color selected by BSL 3. Edge banding: matching .020 PVC 4. Door Style: Chetco 5. Typical Interior Concealed Surfaces/Case: 5/8"case white melanine/PB Core 6. Salad Bar/Wait station cabinet construction: marine grade plywood core throughout. 7. Backs '/4" 1S white MDF 8. Finished Ends: 5/8"Maple/White Melanine/PB Core D. Shelving: 1. Match Cabinet finish when exposed 2. White melanin when concealed or semi-exposed. E. Countertops: 1. Typical countertops: 1 /2" self edge plastic laminate with 4"integral splash; color to be selected by BSL 2. Other configurations as shown on drawings 3. Granite countertops as shown on drawings F. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Finished End Panels,Modesty panels, Support brackets,etc as noted on drawings. 2.3 CABINET MATERIALS: A. Wood: 3/4" solid Beech hardwood. Veneer of same species for finished back or side panels when shown on drawings. MASTER 06410 custom built casework.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06410 p3 of 6 B. Particle Board(PB): ANSI A208.1 grade M-S,45 pcf, 8%max M.C; Maximum 0.20 ppm Urea Formaldehyde Resin Emission per ANSI A208.1 C. Melamine Low Pressure Laminate: Thermal-pressed, Off-white D. Plastic Laminate: Material: High pressure type conforming to NEMA LD-1 and as specified in Section 06415. 1. At exposed Vertical Surfaces including Door and Drawer Fronts and Backs: 0.028" 2. At Semi-exposed Surfaces: 0.02" 3. Countertops: 0.050" 4. Color& Pattern: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. E. Edge Banding: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), .020"Thick, color to match cabinet 2.4 FINISH HARDWARE A. Case-mounted Adjustable Shelf Supports: 1. Manufacturer& Model: Knape& Vogt#346 with#129 Rubber Cushion, or approved. 2. Type: Dowel 3. Material: Steel 4. Finish: Anochrome B. Wall-mounted Adjustable Shelf Supports: 1. Manufacturer: Knape&Vogt, or approved. 2. Standards Model: 87 3. Brackets Model: 187 4. Material: Steel 5. Finish: Satin Anochrome C. Extension Drawer Slides: 1. Manufacturer: Accuride, or approved. 2. Model:. 3. At Drawers less than 8 inches high: 3832 4. At Drawers 8 inches and higher: 4034 5. Type: Full extension 6. Extent of Work: Provide on all Drawers. D. Door Hinges: 1. Manufacturer: Blum,or approved. 2. Type: Concealed, self-closing,and satisfying conditions of use. 3. Opening Angle: 125° 4. Finish: Nickel plated 5, Extent of Work: Provide 1 pair minimum on each Door Leaf. E. Drawer& Door Pulls: 1. 96mm Pull, STD M9500-BNI F. Cable Grommets: 1. Manufacturer: Doug Mockett(800)523-1269, or approved. MASTER 06410 custom built casework.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06410 p4 of 6 2. Series: TG Flip Top 3. Nominal Diameter: 2 inches 4. Material: Plastic 5. Color: Match adjacent Plastic Laminate Covering 6. Extent of Work: See Drawings G. Drawer&Door Locks: 1. Manufacturer: Olympus DCN, or approved. 2. Size: 1-7/16 inches 3. Required Accessory: Washers to prevent Lock movement 4. _Barr-el Length:_Satisfy conditions of use. - 5. Keying: Match Door Locks specified in Section 08710. 6. Finish: Match adjacent Door Hardware specified in Section 08710 7. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: 1. AWI Style: Flush Overlay 2. AWI Grade: Custom, unless otherwise noted on drawings 3. All Shelves adjustable, unless otherwise noted on drawings. 4. Fabricate to dimensions, configurations, and clearances noted on drawings. 5. Verify dimensions of Sinks and other Items to be built into Cases and Counters. 6. Pre-Assemble at Mill where feasible. 7. Fabricate exposed Joints tight and flush. 8. Fabricate any Curves in longest practicable segments by laminating and/or machining. Do not use"Chord Segments". 9. Assemble Cases with Adhesive. Use Screws and Bolts where required for strength and rigidity. Conceal Fastenings wherever possible. Where not possible,neatly countersink Exposed Fastener and fill with Material matching adjacent Surface. 10. Install Finish Hardware at Mill. B. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: Drill Holes in Case Wall to receive Shelf Support Dowels. Space Holes 1 inch o.c. maximum over full height of Wall. C. Drawer Slides, Locks,Grommets,&Pulls: Follow Manufacturer's instructions. D. Door Silencers:Provide Felt or Rubber Silencers where necessary to prevent noisy Door-to-Frame contact. E. Radius external corners of plastic laminate countertops PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Casework or Shelving are straight, plumb,true, solid,rigid, and otherwise properly prepared. MASTER 06410 custom built casework.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06410 p5 of 6 B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Miter Corners, and bevel-cut and glue Joints. B. Where Rubber Base is scheduled,provide continuous Wood Backing in Toe Space of adjacent in-line Base Cabinets C. Secure Work in place,plumb,square, true, level,and without distortion; level where necessary with concealed Shims. D. Secure Work to Backing with countersunk Screws. E. Accurately scribe Face Plates, Filler Strips, and Trim Strips to adjacent surface irregularities. Install with Finish Nails, set for puttying, except where Screws are required. F. Ease sharp External Corners prior to finishing. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS • A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. 3.5 SCHEDULE OF CABINET TYPES BY ROOM A. Refer Interior Elevations on drawings. END OF SECTION MASTER 06410 custom built casework.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06410 p6 of 6 SECTION 06415 FIELD-APPLIED PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Installation of plastic laminate as field applied finish. See Finish schedule. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS - - A. Mill-applied Plastic Laminate Facing for Custom-built Casework: Section 06410 B. Plastic Laminate Wall Covering for Elevators: Section 14200 1.3 SAMPLES A. Prior to application and in accordance with Section 01330, submit two 5x7 inch samples of Plastic Laminate. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.5 TEMPERATURE&HUMIDITY A. Where Plastic Laminate is located,maintain the following: 1. Minimum Temperature: 60°F 2. Relative Humidity: 25%to 55% 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Manufacturing Standard: NEMA LD-1 B. Manufacturer: Formica,Nevamar, Pionite, Wilsonart, or approved. C. Thickness: 0.050" D. Patterns& Colors: 1. Selected by BSL after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 2. Manufacturers listed above are approved, provided they are able to supply selected Patterns and Colors to Architect's satisfaction. MASTER 06415 plastic laminate.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06415 p1 of 3 2.2 SUBSTRATE FOR PANELS A. Material: Particle Board B. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice C. Minimum Density: 45 pcf D. Thickness: 3/4 inch 2.3 PRIMERS, SEALERS, &ADHESIVES A. Manufacturer&Brand Recommended by Covering Manufacturer B. Type: Water-resistant 2.4 JOINT SEALANT A. Manufacturer: Dow, GE,or approved. B. Type: Mildew-resistant Silicone C. Color: Clear translucent 2.5 METAL TRIM A. Manufacturer&Brand: B&T Metals Chromedge, Colotrym, or approved. B. Material: Aluminum C. Type: Suit conditions of use D. Extent of Work: Provide at exposed Wall Covering edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Covering are accurately sized and located, dry, clean, smooth, sound, secure,free from conditions that would damage Covering, impair Adhesive-bond,or mar Covering appearance, and are otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 LAMINATE INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Match and align any patterns. 3. Make any Covering Joints with flush,tight,nearly invisible, hairline seams. B. WALL COVERING 1. Install Covering directly to Wall. MASTER 06415 plastic laminate.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06415 p2 of 3 2. Allowable Seam Locations: a. Horizontal: None permitted b. Vertical: 6 ft. apart minimum c:•Do not extend Wall Covering behind Wall Base. C. DECORATIVE PANELS 1. May be shop fabricated 2. Install as per wall coverings,except on PB substrate 3. Ease all sharp corners and edges D. METAL TRIM 1. Follow-Manufacturer's-instructions. - 2. Secure level,plumb, and true; miter corners. 3. Make any Metal Trim Joints with flush,tight,nearly invisible,hairline cracks. 4. Do not extend Wall Covering Metal Edge Trim behind Wall Base. E. PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING 1. Promptly remove any excess Adhesive or Sealant. 2. Remove any Stains or Markings from Plastic Laminate surfaces. 3. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up,or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored,or damaged by Work of this Section. 4. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 06415 plastic laminate.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06415 p3 of 3 SECTION 06600 PLASTIC SANITARY(FRP)WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Installation of filed applied FRP wall panels 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Gypsum Board Walls to receive Panels: Section 09250 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit Instructions to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Deliver in unbroken Packages with Manufacturer's legible Label thereon. Do not remove Labels or open Packages until Architect inspects and approves. B. Store in clean and dry Storage Area. C. Protect against damage and discoloration. D. 24 hours prior to application, remove Panels from package and allow Panels to acclimatize to Installation Area Temperature and Humidity. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 1 extra unopened case of each color and type of Panels. B. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS A. Manufacturer: Kemlite; Box 2429;Joliet, IL 60434; (800)435-0080; or approved. B. Brand: Glasbord C. Fire Rating Class: C D. Surface Texture: Embossed E. Color: White 2.2 TRIM PIECES A. Type: Recommended by Panel Manufacturer for conditions of use MASTER 06600 frp wall panels:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06600 pl of 3 B. Color: Match adjacent Panels. C. Extent of Work: Provide at Panel edges. 2.3 PRIMERS &ADHESIVES A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Type: Mildew-resistant, satisfying conditions of use, and permitting removal of Panels without Substrate damage. C. Fire-resistiveness: No less than Panel rating. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice B. Type: Concealed and satisfying conditions of use. 2.5_ EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Panels are true, sound, clean, dust-free, mildew- free, free from conditions that could damage Panels or impair Adhesive bond, and be otherwise properly prepared. B. Verify that Surfaces to receive Panels do not exceed 4% Moisture content. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 2.6 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 2.7 PREPARATION WORK A. Before applying Panels,remove any Finish Hardware, Electric Cover Plates, Mechanical Grilles or Registers, etc. which interfere with Panel application. B. Carefully store Removed Items,and accurately replace following Panel application. 2.8 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove any Substrate Surface Defects that could show through Panel surface. 2.9 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Except at any Color or Pattern breaks, do not install Panels with Horizontal Seams. C. Do not extend Panels below top of any adjacent Wall Base. D. Take special care to assure complete adhesion at Joints, Edges, and Corners. 2.10 TRIM INSTALLATION MASTER 06600 frp wall panels.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06600 p2 of 3 A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install any necessary Butt Joints tight,neat, hairline, and no closer than 4 ft. apart. 2.11 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Immediately remove any Adhesive from Adjacent Surfaces. B. Leave Surfaces clean and defect-free at time of Substantial Project Completion. C. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been-soiled,discolored, or damaged by Work of - this Section. D. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 06600 frp wall panels.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 06600 p3 of 3 SECTION 07180 WATERPROOFING PART 1 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide at exterior surfaces of below-grade Walls enclosing Habitable Space including Elevator Pit Walls. B. Extend from 2 inches below adjacent Finish Grade down to and across top of Footings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Concrete Walls to receive Waterproofing: Section 03300 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01600, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions to Architect and General Contractor. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Promptly remove from Site any damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated Material. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DURING INSTALLATION A. Material may be installed on Damp Surfaces,but do not install in standing Water or during Precipitation. 1.7 ADVANCE NOTICES A. Notify Architect at least 24 hours before starting Work. B. Notify General Contractor to place Backfill against Waterproofing as soon as possible following Waterproofing inspection and acceptance: 1.8 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Employed by or acceptable to Waterproofing Manufacturer. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance and in accordance with Section 01830, submit the following Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual: MASTER 07130 waterproofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07130 p1 of 4 We,the undersigned,do hereby warrant Waterproofing against failure due to defective materials and/or workmanship, to remain watertight with normal usage for 5 years after Substantial Completion Date,and to repair(including removal and replacement of adjacent Backfill,Landscaping, Pavement, etc.)without additional cost to Owner any Water Leaks and resulting damage to Building and/or Building Contents as may occur: WATERPROOFING SUBCONTRACTOR: BY: GENERAL CONTRACTOR: BY: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER • A. WR Grace& Co, Bituthene 3000 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Self-adhesive,rubberized asphalt/polyethylene waterproofing membrane. 2.3 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS A. Protection Board expanded polystyrene 1"thick, 1.0 lb/f13 density B. Drainage Fabric(can be incorporated into a proprietary protection board product) C. Miscellaneous Materials: Surface conditioner,mastic, liquid membrane, tape and accessories specified or acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION WORK MASTER 07130 waterproofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07130 p2 of 4 A. Refer to manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and d sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Substrates: 1. Do not proceed with installation until concrete has properly cured and dried (minimum 7 days for normal structural concrete and minimum 14 days for lightweight structural concrete). 2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface. 3. Repair bugholes over 13 mm(0.5 in.) in length and 6 mm(0.25 in.) deep and finish flush with surrounding surface. 4. Remove scaling to sound,unaffected concrete and repair exposed area. 5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface. C. Masonry Substrates: Apply waterproofing over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel-cut mortar joints or parge coat. D. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashing as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. A. Refer to manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to,the following: 1. Apply primer at rate recommended by manufacturer. Recoat areas not waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer. 2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions. 3. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic. 4. Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.5 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials which would be exposed in the completed work. Remove all debris B. Protect completed membrane waterproofing from subsequent construction activities as recommended by manufacturer. MASTER 07130 waterproofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07130 p3 of 4 END OF SECTION • MASTER 07130 waterproofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07130 p4 of 4 SECTION 07180 TRANSPARENT WATER REPELLENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide water replant coating for exposed CMU 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Unit Masonry to receive Repellent: Section 04200 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.4 CERTIFICATIONS A. Prior to starting Work submit Manufacturer's certification that: B. Applicator is qualified to perform Work. C. Proposed Products are appropriate for intended use D. Surfaces to receive Repellent are properly prepared, and will not prevent issuance of Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit to Architect, as specified in Section 01600, Manufacturer's Specifications and Application Instructions. 1.6 APPLICATOR A. 3 years minimum experience performing Work specified herein, and acceptable to Repellent Manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD MOCK UP A. Prior to starting Work and in accordance with Section 01330, apply Repellent to approximately 10 sq. ft. of Substrate Material matching actual job conditions. B. Locate Mock Up where directed. C. Verify that Repellent will effectively repel Moisture from Surface, and will not stain Surfaces. D. Obtain Architect's acceptance before proceeding. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Deliver Materials in original sealed Containers, clearly marked with Manufacturer's name,brand name, and Material type. B. Unless otherwise authorized by Repellent Manufacturer,maintain Storage Room Temperature between 50°F and 85°F. MASTER 07180 transparent water°repellant.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07180 pl of 3 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply Repellent when Ambient Air or Substrate Surface temperature is less than 40°F. or more than 100°F.,or when such temperature is anticipated within 24 hours after Repellent application. B. Do not apply Repellent if Ice or Frost covers Substrate to be treated,during Inclement Weather, or until Substrate Materials dry from effects of such Weather. 1.1.0 WARRANTY A. Repellent shall not permit Water-absorption into Substrate during 10-year period following date of Project Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REPELLENT A. Manufacturer&Brand: Chem-Trete Aqua-Trete PB 100, Protectosil Solvent- free silane system, or approved. B. Minimum ASTM E-514 Water Leakage Reduction: 100% C. Type: VOC-compliant,water-base,non-gloss, and will not alter appearance of Surface to receive Repellent. 2.2 MASKING MATERIAL A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Type: Strippable and satisfying conditions of use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surface to receive Repellent is: B. Clean, dry, and solid; free of frost, ice, wax, efflorescence, loose particles, and other foreign matter that could block Repellent absorption; and is otherwise properly prepared. C. Cured for at least 28 days. D. Notify General Contractor to fill or replace any Surface.Cracks exceeding 1/64 inches in width. E. Verify that adjacent Caulking and Sealing are completed prior to applying Repellent. F. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. G. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTION MASTER 07180 transparent water repellant.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07180 p2 of 3 A. Protect adjacent Materials including Glass,Aluminum, Planting Beds,and Vegetation against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. B. Clean any Surfaces contaminated by Repellent. C. Replace any Vegetation contaminated by Repellent. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Unless otherwise deemed unnecessary by Repellent Manufacturer, mask off adjacent Surfaces not to receive Repellent. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Dilute and/or alter Repellent only in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply Repellent in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. C. Uniformly apply Repellent using low-pressure (15 psi)Airless Spray with Fan- shaped Coarse Spray Nozzle. D. At Vertical Surfaces, start application at Surface bottom and work upward. Maintain 6 to 8 inch wide Coating-rundown below Spray-pattern. E. Brush-apply only where Overspray would affect adjacent Materials or where spray application proves not applicable. F. Application Rate: Follow Repellent Manufacturer's instructions. G. Unless otherwise approved by Repellent Manufacturer,keep wet edges at all times. H. Prevent Repellent from drying between passes. 3.5 FIELD TESTING A. Refer to Section 01453. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Masking Material as soon as possible following Repellent application. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07180 transparent water repellant.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07180 p3 of 3 SECTION 07200 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRITION OF WORK • A. Provide thermal insulation in walls, floors, and roof/ceilings as required for a continuous thermal envelope. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Glass Fiber Acoustic Insulation: Section 09500 B. Mechanical Systems Insulation: Division 15 1..3 DEFINITIONS A. Specified "R" values designate Thermal Resistance of Insulation only, not including Air Spaces or other factors assumed to result in higher"R" values. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. If and where Insulation is not covered with Gypsum Board or other Fire-rated Material: B. Maximum Insulation &Facing Flame Spread: 25 C. Maximum Insulation&Facing Smoke Density: 450 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Deliver to Project Site in Manufacturer's original unopened packages. B. Label Package Wrappers with Brand Name, Insulation type, and Thermal Rating. C. Store Materials off ground. D. Protect against damage and discoloration. E. Immediately remove damaged or wet Materials from Jobsite. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install Insulation when Surface to receive Insulation is wet. 1.8 ADVANCE NOTICES A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to completing Insulation Work for inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS MASTER 07200 thermal insulation.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07200 pl of 4 2.1 GLASS FIBER BATT INSULATION A. Manufacturer: Certainteed, Johns Manville,Knauf, Owens/Corning, US Gypsum,or approved. B. Material: Formaldehyde-free Glass Fiber C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-665 D. Type: Blanket or Batt E. Length: Full-length, single-piece where practicable F. Vapor Barrier: 1. Material: Continuous (taped edges)6 mil polyethylene sheet on warm face of wall/ceiling/roof 2. Maximum Permeability Rating: 1.0 perms G. Extent of Work: Provide Insulation of the following minimum Thermal Resistance Factor(R)in the following locations: 1. Typical Sloped Roof Framing(attic) : R=38 at ceiling 2. Cathedral ceilings: R= 38 3. Within Exterior Frame Walls: R=21 4. Undersides of Floor over Unheated Spaces: R=25 H. Optional Method: In lieu of Batt Insulation specified for typical attic ceiling, Contractor may substitute Blown-in Insulation of comparable R-value, where accessible and appropriate. 2.2 INSULATION SUPPORTS A. Material: Plastic Mesh,Wire Devices, or approved. B. Size: Satisfy conditions of use C. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to support Insulation against displacement. 2.3 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Type: Staples or Nails recommended by Manufacturer of Material to be secured. B. Material: Electroplated Steel C. Length: Penetrate Substrate at least 1/2 inch. 2.4 VAPOR PROOF TAPE A. Manufacturer&Brand: Alumiseal Zero Penn, or approved; 183 Madison, New York,NY 10016; (800)235-2313. B. Material: Adhesive-backed,Mylar-faced Aluminum Foil. C. Width: 1-1/2 inches D. Approximate Permeability Rating: 0.0 perms MASTER 07200 thermal insulation.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07200 p2 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Work of preceding Trades is completed. B. Verify that Surfaces and Spaces to receive Insulation are accurately sized and located, dry,protected against inclement weather, clean, and otherwise properly prepared. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. B. Maintain the following Minimum Clearances between Insulation and any recessed Lighting Fixtures, Metal Chimneys, Metal Gas Vents,or other similar Device, unless Device is U.L. rated for Zero Clearance: 1. Side Clearance: 3 inches 2. Top Clearance: 24 inches 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove, or protect against, Projections which may damage Insulation or prevent proper Insulation installation. 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION 3.5 FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. A. Fit Insulation snugly between Framing without forcing. B. Install Insulation with Vapor Retardant Facing on warm-in-winter side of Assembly. C. Where adjacent pieces of Insulation abut, fit snugly together without overlapping. D. Permit no gaps for Air passage. E. Carefully cut and fit Insulation around Pipes, Conduits, and other Obstructions. F. Where Pipes, Conduit,and other Obstructions are located within Insulated Walls or within other Insulated Spaces,place Insulation between cold-in-winter Surface and Obstruction, compressing Insulation where necessary. G. Use full-length, single-piece Batts wherever practicable. H. Except where indicated above, do not compress Insulation more than 10%. I. Provide additional support where necessary to prevent Insulation displacement or sagging. 3.6 VAPOR RETARDER FACING PATCHING MASTER 07200 thermal insulation.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07200 p3 of 4 A. Patch and seal Facing punctures,penetrations,tears, and voids with Vapor Proof Tape. B. Permit no Openings for Vapor transmission. 3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair, and touch-up; or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07200 thermal insulation.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07200 p4 of 4 SECTION 07310 SHINGLE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide a complete shingled roof system of architectural laminated composition asphalt shingles. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED,BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Sheetmetal built into Roofing. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06100 B. Thermal Insulation: Section 07200 C. Single-ply Roofing: Section 07530 D. Sheetmetal Flashing: Section 07620 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Building Code requirements if more restrictive than those specified herein. B. Notify Architect about differences before starting work. 1.6 PRE-APPLICATION MEETING A. Prior to roofing,and in accordance with Section 01315, Roofing Subcontractor shall arrange Meeting to clarify any questions about Specifications, details, and application requirements. B. Representatives of the following shall attend: 1. General Contractor 2. Roofing Subcontractor 3. Sheetmetal Flashing&Trim Subcontractor 4. Roof-penetrating Equipment Subcontractors 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, &HANDLING A. Deliver in unopened Bundles,with UL Wind Uplift Resistance Classification, and Grading Labels thereon. B. Do not open Bundles,or remove Labels until Architect reviews and accepts. C. Do not stack Shingles more than 3 ft.high. D. Store Products above Ground, and protect against damage and discoloration. MASTER 07310 comp shingle roof.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07310 pi of 4 E. Do not overload Roof Structure with Stored Material. 1.8 MINIMUM AIR&WORK SURFACE TEMPERATURE A. When installing Shingles: 34°F. 1.9 MATERIAL&WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's warranty: limited lifetime,"15 year ironcad", limited high wind warranty upgrade B. Work hereunder subject to 2-year Waterproof Warranty called for in Contract Conditions. C. Warranty includes proper placement of any Metalwork, which has been provided by other Trades and is in contact with Shingles. 1.10 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance submit, in accordance with Section 01830, the following Maintenance Warranty for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual: We, the Undersigned, do hereby warrant for 2 years following Project Substantial Completion all Shingle Roofing and related Sheetmetal Flashing against failure due to defective materials and/or workmanship, for System to remain watertight, and to repair or replace without additional cost to Owner any water leaks and resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period. ROOFING SUBCONTRACTOR: By: GENERAL CONTRACTOR: By: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 UNDERLAYMENT A. Material: Unperforated, Asphalt-saturated Roofing Felt. B. Manufacturing Standard:. ASTM D-226 C. Minimum Weight: 30 lb. type D. Ice/Water shield at hips,valleys and eaves,and at slopes less than 4:12 2.2 ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Manufacturer: IKO, or approved. B. Brand: Cambridge MASTER 07310 comp shingle roof.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07310 p2 of 4 C. Material&Manufacturing Standard: Laminated Architectural Glass Fiber type complying with ASTM D-3462 D. Wind Resistance: 130 mph Wind Speed,with upgrade warranty E. Color: Dual Black; confirm with Owner by approved submittal 2.3 CONTINUOUS RIDGE VENT A. Manufacturer: Cor-A-Vent, (800) 837-8368, or approved. B. Brand: X-treme X-5 C. Material: High-density corrugated Propylene D. Width: 11 inches E. Height: 13/16 inches F. Type: Capable of permanent covering with adjacent Roofing G. Minimum Net Ventilation Area per linear foot of Vent: 17 sq. inches H. Features: 1. Fabricated to fit Roof pitch. 2. Fabricated to prevent Wind, Rain, Snow,Dust, and Insect intrusion. 3. Fabricated with wind-activated Baffle, which automatically closes Vent if wind exceeds 20 mph. 2.4 FASTENERS&ACCESSORIES A. Type& Size: Nails or Staples recommended by Shingle Manufacturer B. Material: Stainless Steel C. Extent of Work: Provide all required for complete, secure, and weatherproof installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Underlayment and Shingles are secure, sound, even, free of holes, accurately sized and located, and otherwise properly prepared. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Verify that Work of other Trade which penetrates Roof Deck has been completed before starting Work specified herein. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Apply horizontally over Roof Sheathing immediately prior to applying Shingles. Comply with shingle manufacturer recommendations,but at least: 1. Minimum End Laps: 4 inches 2. Minimum Side Laps: 2 inches MASTER 07310 comp shingle roof.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07310 p3 of 4 3. Minimum Ridge& Valley Laps: 4 inches each side forming double thickness 4. Minimum Turn-up at Vertical Intersections: 6 inches 5. Secure to Substrate with minimum possible Fasteners. 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Comply with shingle manufacturer published instructions B. Lay in straight line horizontal courses. C. Exposure to Weather: Follow Manufacturer's instructions. D. Exposure: 5-7/8 inches E. Secure Shingles with at least 2 Fasteners sufficiently long to penetrate 5/8 inches into Substrate. Locate Fasteners 5/8 inch above each Cut-out center line, and 1 inch away from Shingle ends. F. Provide additional fasteners as required for hi wind warranty upgrade G. During Cold Weather,warm Ridge and Valley Shingles as required to prevent Shingle-breaking. 3.5 RIDGE VENT INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove Roof Sheathing under Vent;balance Ridge Opening width with net area of Soffit Vents. Hold ends of Openings approximately 12 inches short of any Attic Walls and any Projections thru Ridge. C. Provide Vent over entire length of Ridge. D. Miter any Vent intersections,and make waterproof. E. Cover exposed Vent ends with factory-formed End Caps. F. Secure Vent to Roof Sheathing with Fasteners. G. Cover top surface of Vent with Roofmg and secure as instructed by Vent Manufacturer. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07310 comp shingle roof.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07310 p4 of 4 SECTION 07420 FIBER CEMENT SIDING& PANELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiber cement lap siding,panels, shingle, trim,fascia, moulding and accessories. B. Factory-finished fiber cement lap siding, panels, shingle,trim, fascia, moulding and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and bracing. B. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: Sheathing. C. Section 07210- Insulation: Exterior wall insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D3359-Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Tool and Tape. B. ASTM E136-Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. None required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 2 years experience with installation of similar products. B. Pre Install Approval: Provide a demonstration installation for evaluation and approval of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Project Manager 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials,and materials used with solvent- based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having MASTER 07462jhi lap siding.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 007420 p1 of 6 jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited, non-pro-rated product warranty, per mfr B. Workmanship Warranty:Application limited warranty for 2 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, Inc.,which is located at: 26300 La Alameda Suite 400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691;Toll Free Tel: 866-274- 3464;Tel: 949-367-4980; Fax: 949-367-4981; Email: request info (infoCa.iameshardie.corrm);Web: www.iameshardiecommercial.com B. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 SIDING A. HardiePlank HZ10 lap siding, HardiPanel HZ10 vertical siding, HardieSoffit HZ10 panels requirement for Materials: 1. Fiber-cement Siding-complies with R+STM C 1186 Type A Grade II. 2. Fiber-cement Siding- complies with=STM E 136 as a noncombustible material. 3. Fiber-cement Siding- complies with ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index=0, Smoke Developed Index=5. 4. CAL-FIRE,Fire Engineering Division Building Materials Listing-Wildland Urban Interface (WUl)Listed Product. 5. National Evaluation Report No. NER 405(BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI, IBC, IRC). 6. City of Los Angeles, Research Report No. 24862. 7. Miami Dade County, Florida Notice of Acceptance 07-0418.04. 8. US Department of Housing and Urban Development Materials Release 1263d 9. California DSA PA-019. 10. City of New York M EA 223-93-M. 1'1.. Florida State Product Approval FL889. 12. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation EC-23. B. Lap Siding: HardiePlank HZ10 Lap as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. C. Type: Select Cedarmill: width and exposure per patterns on drawings D. Vertical Siding: HardiePanel HZ10 siding as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 1. Type: Smooth or Cedarmill as per drawings E. Soffit Panels: HardieSoffit HZ10 soffit panel, factory sealed on 5 sides as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. MASTER 07462jhi lap siding.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 007420 p2 of 6 1. Type: Textured Cedarmill non-vented, sizes as applicable per drawing details 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6 mm). F. Trim: 1. HardieTrim HZ10 boards as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. a. Product:Batten Boards, 2-1/2 inch (63 mm)width. b. Product:4/4 Boards, sizes per drawing details c. Product:5/4 Boards, sizes per drawing details 2. HardieTrim HZ10 Fascia boards as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Wood Framing Fasteners:per mfr current install instructions B. Masonry Walls: 1. Masonry Walls:Aerico Stud Nail, ET&F ASM No.-144-125, 0.14 inch (3.6 mm)shank by 0.30 inch (7.6 mm)head by 2 inches(51 mm)long corrosion resistant nails. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer. 1. Primer: Factory,primed by James Hardie. 2. Topcoat: Refer to Section 09900 and Exterior Finish Schedule. B. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Nominal 2 inch by 4 inch min wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers or vapor barriers where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)face and straight, true,of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding. 3. Protect siding from other trades. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Install a water-resistive barrier is required in accordance with local building code requirements. D. The water-resistive barrier must be appropriately installed with penetration and MASTER 07462jhi hap siding.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 007420 p3 of 6 junction flashing in accordance with local building code requirements. E. Install Engineered for ClirnateTM HardieWrapTM or other approved weather barrier in accordance with local building code requirements. F. Use HardieWrapTM or other approved Seam Tape and joint and laps. G. Install HardieWrapTM flashing, HardieWrapTM Flex Flashing or other approved flexible flashing 3.3 INSTALLATION - HARDIEPLANK HZ10 LAP SIDING A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install preservative-treated furring,strips(min3/8"thick)x width sufficient for nailing capacity and using nails compatible with preservative treatment for rain screen system per mfrs recommendations and warranty requirements C. Starting: Install a minimum 1/4 inch(6 mm)thick lath starter strip at the bottom course of the wall.Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1-1/4 inches(32 mm) wide laps at the top.The bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip. D. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members. F. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. G. Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings. H. Use off-stud metal joiner in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. I. Wind Resistance:Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Hardieplank lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405. J. Face nail to sheathing. K. Locate splices at least 12 inches(305 mm)away from window and door openings. 3.4 INSTALLATION - HARDIEPANEL HZ10 VERTICAL SIDING A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Block framing between studs where HardiePanel siding horizontal joints occur. C. Install metal Z flashing and provide a 1/4 inch(6 mm)gap at horizontal panel joints. D. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from panel edges and 2 inches(51 mm)from panel corners. E. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. G. Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to Tables 2 and 3 in National MASTER 07462jhi lap siding.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 007420 p4 of 6 Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405. 3.5 INSTALLATION -HARDIETRIM HZ10 BOARDS A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install flashing around all wall openings. B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must penetrate minimum 3/4 inch(19 mm)or full thickness of sheathing.Additional fasteners may be required to ensure adequate security. C. Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch(19 mm)and no further than 2 inches(51 mm)from side edge of trim board and no closer than 1 inch (25 mm)from end. Fasten maximum 16 inches(406 mm)on center. D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade. E. Trim inside corner with a single board trim both side of corner. F. Outside Corner Board Attach Trim on both sides of corner with 16 gage corrosion resistant finish nail 1/2 inch (13 mm)from edge spaced 16 inches(406 mm)apart, weather cut each end spaced minimum 12 inches(305 mm)apart. G. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding. H. Seal gap with high quality,paint-able caulk. I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.. J. Fasten through overlapping boards. Do not nail between lap joints. K. Overlay siding with single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten HardieTrim boards to HardieTrim boards. L. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim. M. Install HardieTrim Fascia boards to rafter tails or to sub fascia. 3.6 FINISHING A. Finish unprimed siding with a minimum one coat high quality, alkali resistant primer and one coat of either, 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoats or two coats high quality alkali resistant 100 percent acrylic or latex, exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. B. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of high quality 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based exterior grade paint within 180 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. MASTER 07462jhi lap siding.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 007420 p5 of 6 END OF SECTION MASTER 07462jhi lap siding.dce 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 007420 p6 of 6 SECTION 07530 SINGLE PLY ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide single ply roof system over Horizontal Roof Decks. B. Installation Method: Adhered 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06100. B. Shingle Roofing: Section 07310 C. Sheetmetal Flashing&Trim: Section 07620 D. Roof Accessories: Section 07720 E. Roof Drains, Inside Conductors,&Flashing around Piping& Ducts passing through Roof: Division 15 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. LAYOUT DRAWINGS 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Include Roof outline, Splice locations, Penetrations, and Edge details. 3. Include Membrane Manufacturer's approval of Drawings. B. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 1. In accordance with Section 01330, submit to Architect: 1 copy of Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 2. In accordance with Section 01830, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual: Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions including recommended materials for flashing, splicing, and bonding. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATIONS A. Submit evidence that roofer is Manufacturer-trained and Manufacturer- approved to perform this Work: B. Immediately following Work completion,submit to Architect certification that Manufacturer's Representative has inspected Work prior to, during, and after Work completion, and that Work complies with these Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions 1.5 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Label Products indicating compliance with UL fire-resistive requirements specified in Building Code. B. Comply with Wind Uplift Requirements specified in Building Code. MASTER 07530 single ply roofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07530 p1of5 1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to starting work, and in accordance with Section 01315, Roofer shall arrange meeting to clarify any questions about Specifications, details, and other application requirements. B. Representatives of the following shall attend: 1. General Contractor 2. Roofmg Subcontractor 3. Roofing Manufacturer 4. Roof-mounted Equipment Subcontractors 5. Roof-penetrating Equipment Subcontractors. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Deliver in unopened original packaging,with Manufacturer's legible labels thereon. B. Protect against damage, discoloration, and moisture. C. Do not cut,tear, or puncture Roofing. D. Store under Protective Coverings and above ground on Pallets. E. Store Adhesives and Flashing Materials between 60°F and 80°F for at least 4 hours immediately prior to installation. F. Do not overload Building Structure with stored Materials. 1.8 ADVANCE NOTICES A. Notify BSL and Roofing Manufacturer at least 2 working days before starting work. 1.9 MANUFACTURER WARRANTY A. Provide 20 year minimum manufacturer's warranty on all products supllied for roofing system 1.10 WORK WARRANTY A. Roofing and Flashings are subject to 2 year Warranty called for in Supplementary Conditions, Section 00800. B. Roofer is responsible for proper placement of Metalwork, which has been provided by other Trades, and is in contact with Roofing. 1.11 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY A. Prior to Final Project Acceptance submit, in accordance with Section 01830, the following Warranties for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual: We, the undersigned, do hereby warrant Single Ply Roofing and related Flashing against failure under normal usage as may occur within the following time periods after Project Substantial Completion date, and defective Work will be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner: MASTER 07530 single ply roofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07530 p2 of 5 0 2 YEARS: DEFECTIVE WORK INCLUDING ANY RESULTING DAMAGE TO BUILDING MATERIALS AND/OR BUILDING CONTENTS. ROOFER: BY: GENERAL CONTRACTOR: BY: 0 10 YEARS: DEFECTIVE WORK, BUT NOT INCLUDING ANY DAMAGED BUILDING MATERIALS OR BUILDING CONTENTS. ROOFING MANUFACTURER: BY: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Manufacturer& Brand: Carlisle SynTec, Firestone RubberGard, or approved. B. Material: thermoplastic Pololefin(TPO) C. Minimum UL 790 Fire-resistiveness Class: A D. Color: white E. Thickness: 0.045" or as required for minimum warranty installation F. Sheet Size: Largest practicable 2.2 FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Manufacturer: Approved by Roofing Membrane Manufacturer 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT A. As required by Membrane Manufacturer. 2.4 ADHESIVE, CEMENT,MASTIC, & SEALANT A. Furnished by Membrane Manufacturer. 2.5 CRICKET FORMING BOARD A. Material: Tapered Expanded 1.5pcf Polystyrene Insulation Board or as approved by manufacturer. 2.6 NAILING STRIPS, CURBS,& BLOCKING MASTER 07530 single ply mofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07530 p3 of 5 A. Materials: Recommended by Membrane Manufacturer for conditions of use B. Source: Furnished by Membrane Manufacturer 2.7 FASTENERS A. Manufacturer&Type: Approved by Membrane Manufacturer B. Material: Non-corrosive C. Length: As required to satisfy conditions of use 2.8 TRAFFIC PADS A. Approved by Membrane Manufacturer B. Face Size: 30x3.0 inches C. Extent of Work: Provide on Roof surface in 3 ft. minimum wide strip around Roof-mounted Mechanical Equipment requiring maintenance and where necessary to connect Equipment with Roof Access Hatch. 2.9 OTHER MATERIALS A. Manufacturer&Type: Approved by Membrane Manufacturer B. Extent of Work: Provide all required for complete weatherproof installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Roofing System are clean, smooth, sound, dry, and free of sharp edges, fins,grease, oil, water, ice, frost,`foreign matter, and other conditions that could adversely affect Roofing execution and permanence, and are otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. D. Do not start until other Work which penetrates Membrane is completed. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect other Work against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. B. Prevent Adhesive Solvent Fumes from being drawn into Building Ventilation System. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prior to roofmg,remove from Roof Deck any oil, grease, debris, obstruction, snow, ice,moisture, or projections which could damage System. 3.4 CRICKET BOARD INSTALLATION MASTER 07530 single ply roofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07530 p4 of 5 A. Form into shapes shown on Drawings. B. Secure Board to Roof Sheathing with Adhesive. 3.5 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions using adhered attachment method and complying with the warranty requirements specified. B. Place Sheet in final position without stretching. C. Allow Sheets to relax 30 minutes minimum before making splices or anchoring to Substrate. D. Overlap adjacent Sheets at least 3 inches for splicing. E. Remove any Wrinkles or Air Pockets. F. Secure Membrane as instructed by Membrane Manufacturer. G. Make Seams and Penetrations watertight. H. Check Seam sealing for continuity and integrity. I. Prior to end of each Working Day, seal exposed Seam edges with Sealant. J. Flash Membrane perimeter and penetrations as instructed by Membrane Manufacturer. 3.6 TRAFFIC PAD INSTALLATION A. Space Pads to permit Water-flow. B. Do not install directly over field-fabricated Roofing Seams. C. Secure to Roofing with Adhesive recommended by Roofing Manufacturer. 3.7 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Prevent Water-flow beneath or behind any completed Work. B. Notify General Contractor to protect completed Work against damage and discoloration caused by workmen of other Trades. C. To any Roof-mounted Mechanical Equipment, conspicuously locate and apply - brightly colored Decal,which warns Equipment Maintenance Workers against spilling Liquid Freon,Petroleum-based Products, and other Materials which can damage Roofing Membrane. 18 CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Sections,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07530 single ply roofing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07530 p5 of 5 SECTION 07620 SHEETMETAL FLASHING&TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide copings, flashings, and counter-flashings as detailed in drawings, and as necessary to ensure watertight exterior envelope in conjunction with exterior roofing and wall materials B. Provide rain gutters and downspouts 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED,BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Sheetmetal built into Masonry and Roofing. - 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Elastomeric Flashing at Masonry Veneer Sills: Section 04200 B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Section 06100 C. Shingle Roofing: Section 07310 D. Single-Ply Roofing: Section 07530 E. Roof Accessories: Section 07720 F. Joint Sealants: Section 07920 G. Field Painting: Section 09900 H. Roof Drains, Inside Conductors, &Flashing around Piping passing through Roof: Division 15 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA (Aluminum Association)—Aluminum Construction Manual: Aluminum Sheet Metal Work and Building Construction. B. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute)—Stainless Steel—Uses in Architecture. C. ANSI/ASTM B32—Solder Metal. D. ASTM A525—Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated,(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process. E. ASTM B209—Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM D226—Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. G. FS O-F-506—Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid. H. FS SS-C-153 —Cement, Bituminous,Plastic.• I. NAAMM—Metal Finishes Handbook. MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p1 of 8 J. NRCA(National Roofing Contractors Association)—Roofing Manual. K. SMACNA—Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing downspout layout and identify locations that vary from contract drawings B. Submit color charts for BSL to select metal color C. Submit 12x12 inch samples flashing material showing selected color and thickness. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Package Factory-painted Materials with Non-sticking Paper or Strippable Film Coating between adjacent Sheets. B. Protect against damage and discoloration. C. Do not bend, warp,or twist Sheets. D. Ventilate stored Sheets as required to prevent Condensation build-up between Sheets. E. Do not overload Roof Structure with Stored Materials. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.8 MAINTENANCE WARRANTY A. Warrant Sheetmetal Flashing and Trim to be weatherproof for 2 years following Project Substantial Completion date, and repair or replace without additional cost to Owner any water leaks and resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period. B. Warrant for 30 years following Project Substantial Completion that Factory- applied Enamel Coatings on Sheetmetal will not fade, chalk, craze, chip, crack, peel,delaminate, or otherwise deteriorate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pre-finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525,24 gage core G90 steel, factory pre-finished with baked-on fluoropolymer paint B. Color to be seleceted by BSL 2.2 ACCESSORIES MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p2 of 8 A. Fastener: Stainless steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. B. Underlayment: ASTM D266;No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt under parapet cap. C. Metal Primer: Acid etching type. D. Protective Backing and Touch-Up Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. E. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. F. Sealant: Polyurethane type specified in Section 07900. G. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type. H. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153,Type I-asphaltic base.cement. I. Solder: ANSI/ASTM B32; 50/50 type. J. Flux: FS O-F-506. K. Adhesive: PL400 by Soneborn Contech.. 2.3 DOWNSPOUT STRAINERS A. Type: Removable Wire Basket B. Material: 0.054 inch minimum diameter Stainless or galvanized Steel Wire C. Extent of Work: Tightly fit in each Downspout Inlet. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Form to shapes and dimensions shown with planes and lines in true alignment. 2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified, fabricate with longest practicable lengths. 3. Form Openings Head and Sill Flashing with End Dams. 4. Hem exposed edges. 5. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip. B. Seams: 1. Common Lock Seams: 3/4 inch finish width;4-ply loose-locked. 2. Flat Lock Seams: 5/8 inch finish width; 4-ply flat locked, malleted tight; sweat full with Solder. 3. Single Corner Seams: 3/4 inch finish width; 3-ply loose locked. 4. Double Corner Seams: 5/8 inch finish width;4-ply loose locked. 5. Lap Seams: 3 inch finish width. 6. Solder-Lap Seams: 1 inch finish width; sweat full with Solder. 7. Cover Plate Seams: a. Space abutting Sheets 1/2 inch; cover Joint with 4 inch wide Cover and Back-up Plates set in Sealant. b. Match Plates to Flashing profile. MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p3 of 8 c. Secure Plates to Substrate with Screw installed through Open Space between adjacent Flashing Sheets. 8. S-Lock Seams: Form 1-1/4 inch wide "S" shaped Seam on one edge of Flashing Sheet for concealed fastening. C. Cleats: 1. Same Material and thickness as adjacent Sheetmetal Sheets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Sheetmetal are smooth, clean,and otherwise properly prepared and notify BSL of defects that require correction. B. Verify that Nailers to receive Sheetmetal are properly placed. C. Do not start Work until conditions-are satisfactory. - -- - 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install Work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles,tool marks, fastening stresses,distortion, or defects which impair strength or mar appearance. B. Install planes and lines in true alignment. C. Allow for Sheetmetal expansion and contraction. 3.3 PAINTING A. Where Sheetmetal is scheduled to receive Field Painting, shop-apply Primer Coat as specified in Section 09900. Minimum Primer Coat dry film thickness: 1-1/2 mils. B. Protect Galvanized Steel against corrosion with Asphaltic Coating Compound: Minimum Dry Film Thickness applied to each Contacting Face: 7-1/2 mils 3.4 COUNTER FLASHING A. Form of same material as base flashing B. Overlap Base Flashing 4 inches minimum. C. Install Bottom Edge spring-tight against Base Flashing,or at Contractor's option secure Bottom Edge with 1 inch wide Clips spaced no greater than 24 inch o.c. Attach Clips to Substrate with concealed Fasteners. Reinforce Clips by double-bending Clip 3/4 inch back over bottom edge of Counter Flashing. D. Lap-seam Vertical Joints,and apply Sealant. E. Miter,Lap-seam, and close Corner Joints with Solder. F. Provide where Roof intersects Vertical Surfaces, and elsewhere shown on Drawings. 3.5 CLOSED VALLEY FLASHING A. Form of 24 inch wide stock MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p4 of 8 B. Extend Flashing from 2 inches above top edge of Base Shingle to 1/2 inch above butt edge of Covering Shingle. C. Furnish to Roofer for installation. 3.6 APRON FLASHING (WHERE ROOF SLOPES AWAY FROM VERTICAL SURFACE) A. Extend up Vertical Surface 4 inches minimum and onto Roof Surface 4 inches minimum. B. Secure top edge to Wall Sheathing. _ C. Hem bottom edge 1/2 inch. D. Lap-seam Vertical Joints 3 inches minimum and apply Sealant. Engage hemmed edges. E. Miter and extend around Corner 3 inches minimum and solder Joints. F. Install Bottom Edge spring-tight against Roofing. 3.7 COPINGS A. Fabricate with Cover Plate Seams spaced approximately 10 ft. apart. B. Miter and join Corners with Cover Plate Seams: C. Lock Exterior Edges over Continuous Cleats secured to Substrate. D. Lock Interior Edges over Spaced Cleats secured to Substrate. E. Slope Coping top toward Roof. 3.8 PARAPET WALL COVERING A. At Parapet Walls 24 inches&Higher: Fabricate with vertical S-lock Seams spaced approximately 2 ft. apart. B. At Parapet Walls lower than 24 inches: Fabricate with continuous Horizontal Seams. C. Anchor Seams to Substrate with Cleats spaced 12 inches apart, maximum. D. Hook top edge of Covering into hemmed edge of Coping. E. Attach bottom edge of Covering to top of Counter Flashing with Common Lock Seams. F. Bend Covering around Corners 12 inches, minimum. G. Cover inside face of Parapet Walls, unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 3.9 THRU-WALL SCUPPERS A. Size per code requirements and industry recommendations (SMACNA) for. climatic conditions B. Line Opening and slope towards Drain. MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doe 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p5 of 8 C. Join Liner to Inside Flange with flat Lock Seams; extend Inside Flange 4 inches on top of Roofing and 4 inches in all other directions. D. Secure Roof Flange to Substrate with Nails spaced 6 inches apart. E. Join Liner to Outside Flange with Single Corner Seams. F. Extend Outside Flange 1-1/2 inches in all directions. G. Counterflash top edges of Inside and Outside Flanges, or, if not practicable, make watertight with Sealant installed between Flange and Wall face. 3.10 HUNG GUTTERS A. Size per code requirements and industry recommendations(SMACNA)for climatic conditions B. Lap Gutter Joints 1 inch minimum, rivet,and solder. C. Locate Gutter Front Edge 1/2 inch minimum lower than Rear Edge. D. Stiffen Gutter Front Edge with hemmed return. E. Counterflash Gutter Rear Edge. F. Secure End Caps with 1 inch minimum width Flanges riveted and soldered to Gutter. G. Secure Gutter to Roof Framing with Gutter Spikes and Ferrules spaced 4 ft. o.c., maximum. H. Provide Expansion Joints midway between Downspouts; overlap Gutter sections 2-1/2 inches and provide End Caps spaced 1/2 inch apart. I. Cover Expansion Joints tops with Loose-lock Cover; extend Cover over outer edge of Gutter, and embed in Sealant. J. Size Thimble 1/8 inch less than Downspout, and extend 2 inches below Gutter bottom. K. Rivet and solder Thimble flanges to Gutter bottom. 3.11 CONDUCTOR HEADS A. Fabricate with Lap-soldered Seams. B. Extend Downspout thimble 2 inches below Conductor Head bottom,shape to fit, and size 1/8 inch less than Downspout. C. Rivet and solder Thimble Flanges to Conductor Head bottom. D. Fabricate with Overflow Openings in face of Conductor Heads; locate below Roof flood line. E. Secure to Scupper with Single Corner Seam. F. Secure to Wall above Overflow Openings. G. Locate at Downspout Heads which are adjacent,to Scuppers. 3.12 DOWNSPOUTS MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p6 of 8 A. Size per code requirements and industry recommendations(SMACNA)for climatic conditions B. Form of uncorrugated stock C. Fabricate longitudinal joints with Double Corner Seams. D. Telescope upper into lower Sections 1-1/2 inches minimum,rivet and solder. E. Attach to Vertical Trim Board with 1-1/4 inch wide Straps matching downspout material, and 1 gage heavier. F. Locate Straps at Downspout tops,bottoms, horizontal joints, and 10 ft. maximum centers, G. Secure Straps to Wall with Fastener Heads covered with Strap-tabs. H. Except where otherwise shown on Drawings, install Downspouts plumb (modify Straps if necessary), and carefully align with Storm Drain Hub. I. Extend Downspouts 3 inches minimum into Storm Drain Hub and close opening with Plastic Transition Hub. 3.13 ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING A. Comply with roof membrane manufacturer's requirements B. General: 1. Base Flashing: 2. Extend Flange onto Roof 8 inches minimum in all directions away from Penetration, and upward around Penetration to position at least 2 inches above Roof surface. 3. At Shingle Roofing fold upper and side edges at least 1/2 inch back over Flange. 4. Solder-lap Joints. 5. Furnish to Roofer for installation. C. Counter Flashing: 1. Overlap Base Flashing at least 1 inch with Storm Collar sloped away from Penetration. 2. Secure to Penetration with Solder. 3.14 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FLASHING A. Fully cap Support. B. Overlap Base Flashing 4 inches. C. Solder-lap Joints. D. Provide Sealant around Penetrations, if any. E. Provide at Roof-mounted Equipment. 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p7 of 8 A. Provide Flashing with End Dams around Doors, Windows, and other Openings in exterior Walls,where shown on Drawings,and elsewhere necessary to maintain Building watertight. 3.16 CLEANING&REPAIRING A. As Work progresses,neutralize excess flux with 5% to 10% Washing Soda Solution,and thoroughly rinse. B. Immediately after installation remove Protective Covering from Factory Painted Sheetmetal. C. Including Work of other Sections,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. D. Leave non-factory-painted surfaces ready for Field Painting specified in Section 09900. --E. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07620 sheet metal flashing and trim.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07620 p8 of 8 SECTION 07840 FIRE STOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide firestopping assemblies as required to meet code requirements for penetrations and openings into rated assemblies to prevent the passage or spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases. B. Work includes, but is not limited to, openings/penetrations of Mechanical Piping, Ductwork, and Electrical Conduit passing through Fire-rated Walls, Floors, and Ceilings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Joint Sealants: Section 07920 1.3 WORKER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Employed by or acceptable to Fire Stopping Manufacturer. 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Stopping shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 1.5 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE A. Upon Work completion, submit Manufacturer's written certification that Fire Stopping has been installed in accordance with these Specifications and in compliance with Regulatory Agency Requirements. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data of each type of penetration and firestop for architect's review. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Deliver Products to Jobsite in original unopened Containers. Save Containers for Architect's inspection. B. Protect Products against damage. C. Do not exceed Product "shelf life". D. Immediately remove from Project Site any damaged or out-of-date Products. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform no Work when Work Conditions exceed Fire Stopping Manufacturers' specified limits. 1.9 ADVANCE NOTICES MASTER 07840 fire stopping.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07840 pl of 3 A. Notify BSL at least 48 hours prior to covering-over Work of this Section, so that Inspections can be made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE STOPPING A. Manufacturer: Firestop Systems,GE,Hilti, 3M, RectorSeal, STI, USG, or approved. B. Material: Shall contain no Asbestos, Halogens,Lead, or Volatile Solvents. C. Type: Caulk, Wrap, Strip, Sheet,Mortar, Collars, Foams, Pillows, Pads, Board, or Putty as required by conditions of use. D. Fire-resistiveness: Rated for use as Through-Penetration Fire stopping in accordance with ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 E. Performance Requirements: Fire Stopping shall be flexible, moisture resistant, and it shall not shrink or pull away from contact surfaces. F. Paintability: Fire Stopping, if and where exposed to view, shall be paintable or capable of receiving Finish Materials where so specified in other Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Fire Stopping are clean, dry, and free from Dust, Oil, Grease, Rust, Lacquer, loose Mortar, Ice, Frost, or other Bond-reducing Matter. B. Allow Concrete Surfaces to cure at least 4 weeks before applying Sealant. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. B. Do not contaminate adjacent Materials. C. Mask Surfaces adjacent to Fire Stopping as required for protection. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove Dust, Dirt, Wax, Moisture, Ice,Frost, and any other Foreign Matter from Surfaces to receive Fire Stopping. B. If and where necessary,provide Backing Support to receive Fire Stopping. 3.4 PRIMING A. If and where so recommended by Fire Stopping Manufacturer,prime Surfaces to receive Fire Stopping. MASTER 07840 fire stopping.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07840 p2 of 3 B. Follow Primer Manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 FIRE STOPPING INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and Building Code requirements. B. Fill Openings as required to ensure effective Fire and Smoke Barrier. C. Install flush with adjacent Surface. D. Remove excess Fire stopping and any Masking Materials. E. Leave exposed Surfaces neat and smooth. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. When removing spilled or excess Fire Stopping, do not damage adjacent Surfaces. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07840 fire stopping.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07840 p3 of 3 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide sealants and backing as indicated on drawings and referenced in other sections of these specifications, as necessary to maintain water-tight membranes, acoustical barriers, fire-resistant barriers, and for fmished appearance. Work includes preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Work includes,but is not limited to: 1. Masonry Wall Control Joints: Silicone Sealant with Sand matching Mortar color impregnated into Sealant surface to approximate Mortar Joint appearance 2. Joints around Window Frames, Door Frames, and other Openings in Exterior Walls: Silicone Sealant 3. Joints between Floor and bottom of Door Frames: Silicone Sealant 4. Joints between adjacent Dissimilar Materials: Silicone Sealant 5. Elsewhere caulking is shown on Drawings or required to weatherproof Building: Silicone Sealant 6. Caulk within Exterior Frame Walls as follows: 7. Space between Wall Framing Members and Windows, Doors, and other Openings where subject to Air-infiltration: Foam Air-Infiltration Sealant 8. Space beneath Wall Base Plates: Foam Air-Infiltration Sealant 9. Caulk Interior Joints as follows: 10. Joints around Window Frames, Door Frames, and other Openings in Exterior Walls: Acrylic Latex Sealant 11. Joints between Flooring and Shower Receptacles& Bath Tubs: Silicone Latex Sealant 12. Other Joints between adjacent Dissimilar Materials: Acrylic Latex Sealant 13. Elsewhere caulking is shown on Drawings or required to fill Open Joints: Acrylic Latex Sealant 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Sealing Sheetmetal Joints: Section 07620 B. Sealant-type Firestopping: Section 07840 C. Glazing Compounds employed to set Glass: Section 08800 1.3 ACOUSTIC CAULKING AT GYPSUM BOARD: SECTION 09250 A. Sealing Ceramic Tile Joints: Section 09310 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data of each type of Joint Sealant for Architect's review. MASTER 07920 joint sealants.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07920 pl of 5 B. Submit color samples of actual sealant colors when color is to coordinated with adjacent materials 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Store in original, tightly sealed Containers, and with original legible Labels thereon. C. Do not open Containers or remove Labels until Architect reviews. D. Do not exceed Sealant shelf life. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant Joint Sealant Work for 2 years following Project Substantial Completion date that Sealants will not loose their adhesion or cohesion, that-Work of this Section will remain weatherproof, and that Contractor will repair and/or replace without additional cost to Owner any water leaks and resulting damage to Building Materials and/or Building Contents as may occur under normal usage within Warranty Period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SILICONE SEALANT A. Manufacturer& Brand: Contractor's choice B. Components: 1 C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-920,Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. D. Required Ingredient: Mildew Inhibitor E. Cure Method: Neutral F. ASTM C-661 Shore A Hardness Range: 15-20 G. Joint Movement Range: Plus 100%to Minus 50% H. Minimum Elongation: 1200% 2.2 ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT A. Manufacturer& Brand: Contractor's choice B. Components: 1 C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-834 D. Minimum ASTM C-736 Recovery: 75% E. Joint Movement Range: Plus or Minus 7V2% 2.3 FOAM AIR-INFILTRATION SEALANT A. Manufacturer&Brand: Grace Polycel One, or approved. 2.4 SEALANT COLORS MASTER 07920 joint sealants.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07920 p2 of 5 A. Foam Sealant: Contractor's choice B. Silicone Sealant: Clear Translucent, unless otherwise indicated. C. All Other: Approximate color of Adjacent Surfaces, unless otherwise indicated, and subject to Architect's approval. 2.5 PRIMER& SURFACE CONDITIONER A. Manufacturer&Type: Recommended by Sealant Manufacturer 2.6 BACKER ROD A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Material: Closed-cell, soft-rod, formed without Freon Gas, and as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for conditions of use. C. Diameter: 25%greater than Joint width D. Extent of Work: Provide for all Sealants, except Foamed types. 2.7 BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Material: Polyethylene Tape, or approved. C. Extent of Work: Where Backer Rod can not be used, provide Tape where necessary to prevent 3-sided adhesion of Sealant to Substrate 2.8 FOAM SEALANT DAMS A. Material: Contractor's choice B. Minimum UL Fire Resistance Rating: C. At Darns Remaining in Place: Match adjacent Wall or Floor Rating. D. At Dams to Be Removed: None required PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Joints to be sealed are clean, dry, and free from Dust, Oil, Grease, Rust, Lacquer, loose Mortar, Ice, Frost, or other Bond-reducing Matter. If necessary, remove Bond-reducing Matter by grinding. B. Verify that Sealants are compatible with Substrate. C. Allow Concrete Surfaces to cure at least 4 weeks before applying Sealant. D. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS MASTER 07920 joint sealants.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07920 p3 of 5 A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by work of this Section. B. Mask Surfaces adjacent to Joints as required for complete protection. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove Dust, Dirt, and any other Foreign Matter from Joints to be sealed. 3.4 PRIMING A. Where so recommended by Sealant Manufacturer, prime Surfaces, to receive Sealant. B. Apply with Bristle Brush. C. Do not flood surfaces. 3.5 BACKER ROD INSTALLATION A. Using Wheeled Tool, install Backer Rod behind Sealant in accordance with Sealant Manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide in continuous, one-piece lengths where practicable. Where discontinuous pieces are necessary,butt Rod Joints neatly and snugly. C. Force Rods into Joints to uniform depth, approximately 1/2 Joint width (1/4 inch minimum and 5/8 inch maximum). D. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear Rods. Replace any damaged Rods. 3.6 DAM INSTALLATION A. Provide around Wall and Floor Penetrations to receive Foam Penetration Sealant. 3.7 FOAM SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Follow Sealant Manufacturer's instructions. B. Inject Sealant continuously until Opening is filled. C. If Opening is not filled within Sealant Snap Time or maximum of 3 minutes, stop application for at least 15 minutes before resuming work. D. Trim cured Foam flush with Adjacent Surface. E. Remove any combustible Dams. 3.8 SILICONE&ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions using Hand or Pressure Gun type Dispenser. B. Size Gun Nozzle to fit Joint. MASTER 07920 joint sealants.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07920 p4 of 5 C. Force Sealant into Joints firmly against Joint Sides to fill Joints and Voids solid; superficial pointing with Skin Bead not acceptable. D. Prevent 3-sided adhesion of Sealant to Substrate. E. Install Sealant flush with Adjacent Surface. F. Within 10 minutes after installation, and using Dry Tool finish Sealant to smooth,uniform, and slightly concave shape. G. Remove excess Sealant and Masking Materials, if any, immediately after Sealant installation. H. Leave Sealant Surfaces neat and smooth. 3.9 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, -discolored, or -- damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 07920 joint sealants.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 07920 p5 of 5 SECTION 08110 HOLLOW STEEL DOORS &FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide and install non-rated and fire rated hollow metal doors, doorframes, interior borrowed light frames and transoms as indicated in drawings.\ B. Provide Patio/deck doors at units 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Caulking of Frames in Exterior Walls: Section 07920 B. Wood Doors: Section 08210 C. Aluminum Doors&Frames: Section 08400 D. Door Hardware: Section 08710 E. Glazing: Section 08800 F. Field Painting: Section 09900 G. Elevator Doors&Frames: Section 14200 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. Except as modified herein, conform to the following Recommended Specifications published by Steel Door Inst.; 30200 Detroit Rd.; Cleveland, OH 44145-1967; (216) 892-1 404. B. S.D.I. 100 Standard Steel Doors and Frames C. S.D.I. 105 Steel Frame Erection Instructions D. S.D.I. 107 Hardware on Steel Doors E. S.D.I. 117 Manufacturing Tolerances F. S.D.I. 118 Basic Fire Door Requirements G. A.N.S.I. A151.1 Acceptance Criteria for Steel Doors&Hardware Reinforcings. H. A.N.S.I. A224.1 Acceptance Criteria for Painted Surfaces I. Specifications can be obtained from Institute. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. MASTER 08110 steel doors and frames.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08110 p1 of 5 B. Show locations,elevations,principal construction features, and dimensions of each Door type and Frame type,cut-outs,reinforcement,joints, welds, finish, anchoring, and other pertinent details. C. Locate and detail Field Splice Joints for any Frames too large to ship in one piece. Indicate instructions for making Field Splices. D. Manufacturer's published details may be substituted for Standard Stock Items, provided required information is included. 1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate Doors and Frames,where scheduled to be Fire-resistive, in accordance with requirements of Underwriters Laboratories,Factory Mutual, or other Agency approved by Building Official. Affix Agency Acceptance Label on each piece. B. If and where Doors are required to be"Positive Pressure" type, accompany Code-compliance Installation Instructions with Door shipment. 1.7 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE A. Furnish Certificate from Manufacturer stating that Hollow Steelwork delivered to Project conforms to these Specifications. In lieu of submitting Certificate, Manufacturer may affix Certifying Label on each Unit,as defined in Referenced Specifications. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Remove Door Wrappings upon Jobsite delivery. C. Store Doors and Frames upright in protected dry area, at least 1 inch above Ground or Floor, and with at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces. D. Brace bottom ends of Frame Jambs against displacement. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.10 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. For 2 years following Substantial Completion date, and in accordance with Contract Conditions,warrant the following: B. Exterior installations against water-leakage C. Doors against delamination PART 2 PRODUCTS MASTER 08110 steel doors and frames.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08110 p2 of 5 2.1 MANUFACTUERERS A. Doors and Welded Frames: 1. Ceco 2. Republic 3. Steelcraft 4. Substitutions: Submit for approval per provisions of Section 01000. B. Knock-Down (Slip-on)Frames: 1. Timely C. Patio/Deck Doors 1. Masonite 2.2 DOORS A. Steel Flush: 1. SDI Model: 1 (Full flush, hollow, and with exposed Edge Seams only) 2. SDI Grade: I(Standard Duty) 3. Minimum Metal Thickness: 20 ga. 4. Interior Door Core: 90 lb. minimum Phenolic Resin impregnated Honeycomb completely filling Core and bonded to both Face Skins. 5. Exterior Door Core: Polystyrene insulation completely filling Core, Low-E glass where glass is specified, light kits to be low profile,white—paint to match in field. B. Steel Patio 1. 24g electro-galvanized with plastic insert and insulated Low E glass C. Sizes& Shapes: See.Door Schedule and Drawings. 2.3 FRAMES A. Welded: 1. Type: Head and Jamb Intersections mechanically-interlocked, and Frame Face mitered and welded. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: 16 ga. 3. Sizes& Shapes: See Door Schedule and Drawings. B. Knock-down: 1. Timely"C" Series with TA-8 snap trim 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. General: Follow Referenced Specifications B. To Floors: Provide Base Anchors at each Jamb. C. To Stud Walls: D. Full Frame width and depth,welded to Frame. E. Minimum quantity: F. Frames up to 7'-6" high: 4 per Jamb MASTER 08110 steel doors and frames.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08110 p3 of 5 G. Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" high: 5 per Jamb H. Frames higher than 8'-0": 5 Anchors plus 1 additional for each 2 ft. or fraction thereof over 8'-0" 2.5 FABRICATION A. Follow Referenced Specification. B. Accurately form Metal to required sizes and shapes. C. Bevel Lock-side Edge of Doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. Square edged Doors not acceptable. D. Minimum Reinforcement Thickness: 1. At Hinges: 8 ga. 2. At Locks: 16 ga. - 3. At-Surface Hardware: 12 ga. 4. At Panic Devices: Fully reinforce. Thru-bolting not acceptable. E. Assemble Components and grind and dress Welds to form smooth, flush surfaces, which do not show Weld or Fabrication Marks after painting when viewed from oblique angle. Do not use Metallic Fillers to conceal Defects. F. Fabricate with 26 ga. minimum Cover Boxes at Hardware Mortises. G. Provide High Frequency Reinforcement at top and bottom of Top Hinges. H. Weld Anchors to Door Frames. I. Fabricate with the following clearances: • 1. Between Doors and Frames: 1/8 inch 2. Between Door Bottoms and Thresholds: 1/4 inch 3. Between Door Bottoms and Floor: 3/4 inch 4. Between Meeting Edges of pairs of Doors: 3/32 inch J. Prepare Door Frames to receive Silencers specified in Section 08710. K. Fabricate Glazing Stops with butted Corner Joints. L. Glazing Stops shall not interfere with installation of any Flat Bar Panic Devices or any Lever Handle Door Latches or Locks. M. Fabricate any exterior, out-swinging Doors with flush tops. N. Fabricate any closed-section Mullions with internal Web Reinforcement. 2.6 SHOP FINISH A. Knock Down (slip-on) Frames: Manufacturer's baked on enamel finish, color to be western white,or as noted on finish schedule or as selected by BSL B. Welded Hollow Metal Frames and Doors: Baked-on primer over 2.0 oz/sq. ft hot-dipped galvanized, finish paint as specified in Section 09900 "Painting". Color to match adjacent similar finishes or as selected by BSL PART 3 EXECUTION MASTER 08110 steel doors and frames.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08110 p4 of 5 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Openings to receive Hollow Steelwork are accurately sized and located, square,plumb, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure Anchors to Adjacent Construction. C. Set Frames true with Adjacent Construction. D. Accuratel_y-position Work.- ----E. Set Doors flush with Frame face. F. Set Doors plumb to hold any desired position. G. Fill any exposed Fastener Heads, and finish to match adjacent.Surface. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored,or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Leave surfaces ready for Finish Painting specified in Section 09900. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 08110 steel doors and frames.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08110 p5 of 5 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Provide wood doors and accessories for both rated and non rated openings,as shown on drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Custom Built Casework Doors: Section 06410 B. Hollow Steel Door Frames: Section 08110 C. Door Hardware: Section 08710 D. Door Glazing: Section 08800 E. Field Painting& Finishing: Section 09900 1.3 OPTIONS A. Provide BSL factory pre-finish option 1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards published by American Woodwork Institute, hereinafter referred to as AWI. B. Standards can be obtained from Institute at Box 1550; Centreville, VA 22020; (703)222-2499. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit as specified in Section 01340. B. For each Door show Location, Size, Core material, Face material,required Undercuts, Blocking for Hardware, Openings together with full size Glass installation Mouldings, and Factory-machining for Hardware. 1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate Doors,where scheduled to be Fire-resistive, in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL)requirements. Affix UL Label to each Door. B. If and when Doors are required to be "Positive Pressure" type, accompany Code-compliance Installation Instructions with Door Shipment. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Do not deliver Doors to Jobsite until notified by General Contractor that Project is conditioned and prepared to handle and store Doors without damage or discoloration. MASTER 08210 wood doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08210 p1 of 4 B. Prior to Project-delivery,factory-apply Manufacturer's standard Waterproof Sealer to Door Edges. C. Individually wrap each Door with Protective Covering. Upon Jobsite delivery, open Coverings to promote ventilation,however do not remove Covering until adjacent Painting and Finishing Work is completed. 1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Do not store in damp or wet locations. C. Store flat, at least 3 %a inches above level and dry surface, and in well-ventilated space. D. Handle Doors with clean Hands or clean Gloves. E. Do not drag Doors across other Doors or other Surfaces. F. Do not store or install Doors in Spaces containing wet Concrete or wet Plaster. 1.9 ACCEPTABLE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Humidity Range: 30%to 60% B. Air Temperature: 50°F to 90°F 1.10 WARRANTY A. Lifetime warranty required. B. Replace, rehang, and refinish without additional cost to Owner any delaminated Doors or any Doors exceeding Tolerance limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS A. Manufacturers: Lynden, or approved. B. AWI Manufacturing Grade: Custom C. Type: Flush, Embossed, or Stile and Rail, as shown on drawings D. Sizes: See Door Schedule E. Embossed Pattern: 2 panel Cordova F. Core:. Particle Board,Hollow, or Mineral Core as indicated on schedule or as required by rating G. Face : Hardboard,primed(option for factory finish) 2.2 FABRICATION A. Prepare Doors in accordance with Referenced Specifications. MASTER 08210 wood doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08210 p2 of 4 B. Bond Edge Banding to Core with Adhesive,and plane smooth before applying Face Veneers. C. Fabricate any Fire-rated Doors with Inner Blocking which will permit secure Hardware installation without thru-bolting. D. Glazing Stops: 1. In Fire-rated Doors, if any: Install with Manufacturer's standard Steel Stops installed with counter-sunk Screws. 2. In Non-fire-rated Doors, if any: Install with Manufacturer's standard Wood Stops installed with counter-sunk Screws. 3. Glazing Stops shall not interfere with installation of any Flat Bar Panic Devices or any Lever Handle Door Latches or Locks. 4. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces. 2.3 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: 1/16 inch plus or minus. B. Size: 1/16 inch plus or minus; 1/32 inch for Factory-fit door. C. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between opposite diagonal measurements. D. Maximum Warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal, vertical, or diagonal straight edge to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist. E. Maximum Stile,Rail, and Core telegraphing show-through at Door Face: 1/100 inch in any 3 inch span. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Door Frames are correct type,accurately located and sized, square, plumb,true, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 PREPARATION OF DOORS FOR HANGING A. Undercut bottom edge of Doors where and as required for Floor Covering and Threshold clearances. B. Fitting Doors to Frames: C. At Non-fire-rated Doors: Fit for width by planing both sides of Door equally and for height by sawing. MASTER 08210 wood doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08210 p3 of 4 D. At Fire-rated Doors: Fit for width by planing from lock-side only and for height by sawing from bottom only. E. To prevent chipping,knife-cut Face Veneers before sawing. F. Seal job-cut surfaces with 2 coats of Waterproof Sealer compatible with Door Finish specified in Section 09900. 3.4 HANGING A. Position Doors flush with Frame face. B. Set plumb so that Door will hold any desired opening position. C. Install with the following Clearances: D. Between Door&Frame: 1/8 inch E. Between Door Bottom&Threshold: 1/4 inch F. Between Door Bottom&Floor: 1/4 inch G. Between Meeting Edges of pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING. A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Leave surfaces ready for Painting specified in Section 09900. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 08210 wood doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08210 p4 of 4 SECTION 08300 ACCESS PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide hatches and access panels to attic and to equipment within concealed construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Field Painting: Section 09900 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate Hatches,where scheduled to be fire-resistive, in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Affix UL Acceptance Label on each piece. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS PANELS A. Manufacturer: Bilco, JL Industries,Miami-Carey, Milcor, Nystrom, or approved. B. Material: Steel C. Factory-applied Finish: Rust Inhibiting Primer specified in Section 09900 D. Mounting Method: Satisfy conditions of use E. Frame Flange: Exposed F. Sizes: See Drawings G. Minimum UL Fire Resistance Ratings: See Drawings H. Hinges: Concealed type I. Locks: Metal Cam J. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. 2.2 ATTIC HATCHES A. Manufacturer: Babcock-Davis, Bilco,Dur-Red, Milcor,Nystrom, or approved. B. Operation: Manual C. Material: Steel D. Finish: Primer specified below MASTER 08300 access panels.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08500 pl of 2 E. Opening: Single leaf F. Size: 22 Y2 x36 inches G. Comply with ASTM E119 or UL 263 for 1 hour roof/ceiling assembly PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Openings to receive Hatches are square, plumb, and accurately sized and located. B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 . PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Protect contacting Dissimilar Materials against Electrolytic Corrosion. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install Work including Hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Accurately locate and anchor Work plumb, square,true, rigid, secure, and with proper clearances. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Leave surfaces ready for Painting specified in Section 09900. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 08300 access panels.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08300 p2 of 2 SECTION 08460 AUTOMATIC OPERATING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide sliding automatic operating entry door system, operators, detectors and accessories in the configuration shown on drawings. B. Provide automatic operators for exterior swing doors at other entrances 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Hollow Steel Entrance Systems: Section 08110 B. Glazing: Section 08800 C. Electric Conduit,Wiring, & connections to Automatic Operators: Div. 16 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show Motion Detector appearance, locations, and utility connections. C. Show Door Operator type, location, and utility connections. D. Show Frame material,finish,profiles, dimensions, anchors,required clearances,utility connections, and other pertinent details. 1.4 OPERATION&MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit Instructions to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.5 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Employed by or acceptable to Equipment Manufacturer. 1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Micro-wave Motion Detectors shall conform to Federal Communications Commission Regulations. B. Comply with applicable requirements of US Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. MASTER 08460 automatic operating doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08460 pl of 4 B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. For 2 years following Project Substantial Completion date: 1. Warrant Motion Sensors against defects in material and workmanship. 2. Warrant Exterior Work to be weatherproof. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS& FRAMES A. Match Work specified in Section 08400. - - 2.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRY DOOR SYSTEM A. Manufacturer: Horton, or approved. B. Model: Profiler Series 2000 C. Configuration: 010 OXXO Biparting,or as shown on drawings D. Type: Concealed Header, narrow stiles E. Glazing: 1"clear insulated F. Finish: dark bronze anodized G. Required Features and Options: 1. Units shall be self-contained and complete with all Accessories required for proper operation. 2. Operators shall permit manual Door operation with power on or off. When opened manually, Doors shall automatically close. 3. Doors shall automatically reverse should Obstruction interfere with Door Closing Cycle. 4. Breakaway emergency egress. 5. Auto locking option with a fail-secure function, and flush panic device on interior vestubule door only 6. Door position switch to interface with access control system 2.3 DOOR&FRAME FABRICATION A. Provide concealed Steel Reinforcement where indicated or required to resist Wind or other Applied Loads. B. Fabricate Connections as required for strength and rigidity using concealed Mechanical Fastenings wherever possible. Where not possible,welding may be used. C. Cut Horizontal Members between Vertical Members. MASTER 08460 automatic operating doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08460 p2 of 4 D. Match exposed Welds with adjacent Material, free of porosity, cracks, and blow-holes. E. Select Materials carefully for matching Color and Texture after finishing. F. Fabricate Flat Surface smooth and true, and free from waves,buckles, and seams. G. Fabricate Edges, Corners,and Angles clean, sharp,and square. H. Fit Members with hairline,virtually invisible joints. I. Allow for expansion and contraction. J. Prevent Noise resulting from thermally-induced Material movement, Vibration harmonics, or Wind passage. K. Make Exterior Work permanently weather tight. L. Weep any Condensation or-Migrating Moisture to exterior. --- M. Air Infiltration: per ASTM E283-91, std test pressure @ 1.57psf,measured 0.462cfm/ft2 2.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Day time Mode: 1. Normal opertation: detector operates door from either side approach B. Night time Mode: 1. Walking up to the door from the exterior the door should be locked and not open automatically. We will have a card reader that when activated will provide 1 relay contact(open or closed) to unlock and allow the door to open. From the interior side the door also should be locked and not open automatically. There will be a Request to Exit(REX)button mounted next to the door that when pushed will activate the same relay contact as the card also unlocking and allowing the door to open. 2. The relay contact that is activated with the card reader and the REX is the same relay that will tell the door to be in Day or Night mode. 2.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS FOR SWING DOORS A. Manufacturer and Model 1. "Magic-Force"swing doro operator, by Stanley 2. Substitutions per section 01630 B. Description: 1. Single leaf, flush mount headers,with operating accessories for push plates (wired), infra red sensors 2. Dark bronze finish 3. #59-HSS Push plates 4. Interface with access control systems MASTER 08460 automatic operating doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08460 p3 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 - EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Openings to receive Operators and that Utility Rough-ins are properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Secure Work plumb, level, square, straight,and true as applicable. 3.4 MAKE UTILITY CONNECTIONS. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.6 . PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 08460 automatic operating doors.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08460 p4 of 4 SECTION 08560 VINYL WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide interior and exterior vinyl windows of the sizes and configurations shown on drawings 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Wood Window Trim: Section 06220 B. Caulking between Windows& adjacent Construction: Section 07920 C. Glazing: Section 08800 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. Comply with specifications of American Architectural Manufacturer's Association,hereinafter referred to as AAMA. B. Specifications can be obtained from Association at 1827 Walden Office Square; Suite 104; Schaumburg, IL 60173; (847) 303-5664. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show dimensions, full size sections, section thicknesses, fabrication details, sealing methods,required clearances, anchor location, and installation details. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330, B. Submit shop drawings showing sizes,operation, and configurations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Affix Label to each Unit indicating compliance with Referenced Specifications. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.8 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Warrant Work of this Section for 2 years against water leakage, air infiltration, finish deterioration, and faulty operation. B. This warranty extends 1 Year Warranty called for in General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WINDOWS MASTER 08560 vinyl windows.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08560 p1 of 3 A. Manufacturer: PlyGem, or approved equal B. Glazing: 1. 3/4"Insulated,w/Low E coating, clear glazing\ 2. Tempered where required by code C. Performance(typical, special conditions shown on drawings) 1. U factor: 0.31 max 2. SHGC: 0.32 max 3. VT: .55 D. Material: Extruded Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)with integral Ultra Violet Resistant Coating E. Color: 1. exterior: per finish schedule 2. interior: white F. Operation: See Drawings G. Size& Shape: See Drawings 2.2 REQUIRED ACCESSORIES: A. Locking and Operating Hardware at Ventilating Sections of each Window. B. Framed, removable, fiberglass mesh Insect Screens over Ventilating Sections of each Window C. Jamb locks: at all operable windows in Memory Care unit 2.3 FASTENERS A. Material: Non-corrosive B. Size&Type: Concealed type recommended by Window Manufacturer for conditions of use PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces and Openings to receive Windows are square,plumb, rigid,accurately sized and located, free of debris, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. . 3.2 WINDOW INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Accurately locate and position plumb and square. MASTER 08560 vinyl windows.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08560 p2 of 3 C. Secure in Opening without distortion or stress. D. Secure with non-corrosive concealed Fasteners. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 08560 vinyl windows.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08560 p3 of 3 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide door hardware as shown on schedule in drawings 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Hardware for the following Items: B. Access Panels: Section 08300 C. Automatic Operating Doors: Section 08460 D. Vinyl Windows: Section 08560 E. Mechanical&Electrical Equipment: Division 15 & 16 respectively F. The following items of Hardware: G. Handrail Brackets: Section 06220 H. Cabinet Hardware: Section 06410 I. Metal Toilet Accessories: Section 10800 J. Metal Wardrobe Rods: Section 10990 K. Electrical Conduit& Wiring for Electrified Hardware: Division 16 1.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01630. B. Include with Request: Specified Item, Design, Catalog Number,and Finish for each Item on which approval is being requested. Blanket approval by Manufacturer's Name only will not be given. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. B. No later that 10 working days following Hardware Schedule acceptance, furnish Hardware Templates to Door and Frame Manufacturers. 1.5 SUPPLIER'S HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Submit similar to Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330. B. Organize into Hardware Sets,and indicate each Item, Opening, Door size,Door hand, Frame Material,Fire-resistance Label Rating, Keying, Material,Finish, and Manufacturer's Model Number. 1.6 SUPPLIER'S REPRESENTATIVE MASTER 08710 hardware.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08710 pl of 6 A. Hardware Supplier shall employ AHC-certified Consultant,who shall be available for consultation with Architect and Contractor during course of Work. B. Supplier's Representative shall meet with Owner's Representative to prepare final Keying Schedule. C. Prior to Final Project Acceptance, Supplier's Representative shall: D, Make 1 field inspection and notify Architect if Hardware installation complies with Manufacturers' instructions. E. Instruct Owner how to properly adjust and maintain Hardware. 1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL requirements for Fire-rated Openings. B. Conform to applicable requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.8 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE A. Prior to Substantial Completion, certify in writing that Hardware provided complies with these Specifications and approved Hardware Schedule. 1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Package each Item separately, and identify with Hardware Schedule Number. B. Deliver to General Contractor for installation, in original, unopened Containers with legible Labels intact. C. Include Manufacturers'Installation Instructions. D. Include complete set of specialized Hardware Maintenance and Removal Tools necessary for Owner's use. Store where directed by Owner. E. Ship tagged and identified Permanent Keys and Interchangeable Cores, if any, by Registered Mail to Owner. F. Ship Construction Keys directly to Contractor. 1.10 PRODUCT STORAGE& HANDLING A. Protect against theft,damage,and discoloration. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Where necessary,verify Door Openings and Field Measurements prior to fabrication. B. Modify Hardware where necessary to fit Door Opening. C. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.12 SPECIAL WARRANTY MASTER 08710 hardware.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08710 p2 of 6 A. Warrant Closers for 10 years against faulty operation. B. Warrant Exit Devices and Locksets for 3 years against faulty operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS,MODELS, SIZES, &FINISHES A. Specifications based on manufacturers and products indicated. Submit manufacturer list with products for approval B. Finish: Brush Aluminum, satin,nickel, chrome, or similar- unless noted otherwise C. Sizes: as require for proper operations 2.2 LOCKS & LATCHES A. Dorma CL700 Series,grade 2, cylindrical locks with lever handles 1. Functions as shown in schedule. 2. Strike: 4 7/8"typ Curved and long enough to protect Door Frame Trim. 3. Strike Box: Manufacturer's standard type 4. Lever Design: LR 5. Backset: 2-3/4 inches B. Unit Entry Doors 1. Dorma J200 interconnected C. Dead Bolts(common area) 1. Dorma B500 D. Unit Patio Doors 1. Dorma C410 passage set 2. Deadlock DB660 2.3 EXIT DEVICES A. Donna 9300 series Medium Stile Rim device B. Dorma 9400 series Vertical rod—delete bottom rod C. Donna 9000 series heavy duty D. Standard trim as applicable for door operation and function 2.4 HINGES A. SGS Hardware B. Types: 1. Full Mortise 2. Spring 3. Full Mortise 5-knuckel concealed electric 4. Ball Bearing 5. Non-removable pin at exterior secured doors MASTER 08710 hardware.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08710 p3 of 6 2.5 DOOR SILENCERS A. Manufacturer&Model: GJ 64, Ives 20, or approved, 1. (3) per door at single-leaf doors,(4) at dbl leaf,unless equipped with gasketing or weatherstripping. 2.6 DOOR CLOSERS A. Donna 8616series B. Mounting: 1. Typical: Regular arm, mounted on door away from any Corridors and Public Spaces. 2. Parallel arm where required, : use heavy duty arm C. Provide hold-open function only when specifically noted in hardware set 2.T DOOR STOPS — --A. Typical installation: wall stop preferred B. Provide Concealed Overhead Stays or Closers with Spring Stops, if and where: Door stops create Pedestrian or Vehicle traffic hazard. 1. 50%, or more,of Door width projects beyond point where Door contacts Door Stop. 2.8 FLUSH BOLTS A. Size: Follow ANSI and Steel Door Institute recommendations. B. Furnish any Floor Bolts with Dust-proof Strikes. C. Equip any U.L. approved Bolts with Positive Latching and Automatic Unlocking. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A. Electric Strike: HES 1006 B. Magnetic Holer: Rixson#998 wall mount C. Push/Pull PLAtes D. Kickplates: Ives 8400 8"X34"typical; other sizes as applicable E. Exterior Weatherstripping: Pemko 18041 F. Smoke Seals: Pemko S88 G. Inetermuscecnt Seal:pemko HSS2000 H. Thresholds: Columbia 492 I. Power supply and transfer: Donna ES 105 and PS 105 2.10 INTERIOR KEY STORAGE CABINET MASTER 08710 hardware.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08710 p4 of 6 A. Manufacturer: Major Metalfab(MMF), Telkee, Yale, or approved. B. Type: Desk Drawer Insert large enough for all project keys, with key control tags ; locate as directed by Owner 2.11 EXTERIOR KEY STORAGE BOX A. Knox Co.,(800)552-5669, or approved Surface Mntd Knox-Box; locate as directed by Fire Marshal 2.12 KEYS A. Material: Nickel-Silver, or approved. B. Keying Instructions: As directed by Owner C. Construction Keying: D. Furnish Keys with Factory-keyed Construction Cylinders. E. Include 6 Construction Keys for Contractor's use. F. Following construction, Hardware Supplier shall convert Locks to Owner's permanent Keying System. G. Stamping: H. Furnish Cylinders and Keys with Visual Key Control I. On plain side of Keys, stamp "Do Not Duplicate". J. Do not stamp Master Keys with"M" or"Master". K. Do not stamp"Bitting Numbers" on Keys. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Make Hardware for prefitted Doors and Frames to Template. Send Templates, together with Hardware Schedule,to Door and Frame Manufacturers no later than 2 weeks after Hardware Schedule approval. B. Lock and Latch Components shall be fabricated by only 1 Manufacturer, and carry that Manufacturer's Warranty. C. Cut and fit any Threshold or Floor Plates to Door Frame profile and with mitered Corner Joints. Where necessary weld Multiple Pieces together to form single Unit. Fabricate Joints with straight, smooth, and hair-line Seams. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Hardware are properly prepared, including necessary Backing. Prior to starting Work,notify BSL about defects requiring correction. B. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. MASTER 08710 hardware:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08710 p5 of 6 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3,3 INSTALLATION A. Accurately locate, fit,and install square,plumb,and secure in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and Templates. B. Mount Hardware at height shown on the following Mounting Heights Drawing. C. Locate any Roller Bumpers at Door top. D. Locate any Door Stops at Contact Point. E. Install any Kick Plates on push side of Door. F. After fitting any Mortised Hardware to Surfaces to be painted,remove and store Hardware in OriginaLPackage until Painting completion,then permanently install. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. At time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period,test, adjust, and where necessary,using Fine Powdered Graphite, lubricate Locks, Latches, and other Moving Parts including Lock Keyways, for smooth and easy operation, B. After Building Ventilation System has been balanced, Factory's Representative shall test and adjust Door Closers for: C. Complete, silent, and smooth operation. D. Compliance with the following: E. Closing time from 70°open to 3 inches from Latch: 5 seconds F. Maximum Required Door Opening Force(excluding unlatching force): G. Fire-rated Doors: Least possible Force satisfying Fire Resistance Rating requirements. H. Non-fire-rated Exterior Doors: 8-1/2 lbs. I. Non-fire-rated Interior Doors: 5 lbs. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Remove temporary Protective Coverings from Hardware. B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up,or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 08710 hardware.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08710 p6 of 6 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide field installed glass and glazing for rated and non-rated doors and relites, unframed mirrors, or special features identified and detailed on drawings 1.2 RELATEI.7 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Hollow Steel Doors&Frames: Section 08110 B. Wood Doors: Section 08210 C. Automatic-Operating Doors: -Section 08460 — - D. Vinyl Windows: Section 08560 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATION A. Comply with applicable portions of: B. Glazing Manual published by Flat Glass Marketing Association, hereinafter referred to as FGMA;White Lakes Professional Bldg.; 3310 Harrison; Topeka, Kansas 66611; (913) 266-7013. C. Insulating Glass manufacturing and installation recommendations of Sealed Insulating Glass Mfrs. Assn, hereinafter referred to as SIGMA; 111 E. Wacker Dr.; Chicago, IL 60610; (312) 644-6610. D. Copies can be obtained from Association. 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Safety Glazing requirements of Building Code, Section 2406. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Schedule to coincide with glazing schedule. B. For each piece of Glass affix Label identifying the following: C. Glass Manufacturer,quality, and thickness. D. On Low-E type Insulating Glass identify Glass "U" Factor, Shading Coefficient, and Light Transmission Ratings as certified by National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). E. Where Labels must be removed for Glass cutting, save Labels for Architect's review. F. Deliver other Glazing Materials in Original Containers with Manufacturer's original legible Labels thereon. MASTER 08800 glazing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08800 p1 of 5 1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Prevent Glass to Glass contact. C. Do not overload Structure with stored Materials. D. Store crated Glass in cool, dry,shady, well ventilated area, which is not subject to Sun, Rain, or other Elements. E. Block Crates 2 to 6 inches above Floor. F. Secure Crates against accidental overturning. G. Cover Crates with Waterproof Plastic or Canvas. Maintain sufficient air circulation under Cover to prevent Condensation within Crates. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.8 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. In accordance with Supplementary Conditions Section 00800,provide the following Extended Warranties: B. Exterior Glazing against Air and Water Infiltration: 2 years C. Insulating Glass against Edge Seal Failure: 10 years D. Mirrors against De-silvering: 5 years PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. Cardinal Glass, Ford Glass, Guardian Glass, Pittsburgh Plate Glass B. Other Manufacturers may be approved by request in accordance with Section 01630. 2.2 GLASS-GENERAL A. Color&Pattern: All Glass shall be clear and smooth,unless otherwise specified herein. B. Thickness: per Building Code requirements and as suitable for application. 2.3 FLOAT GLASS A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1036 B. Quality: Glazing Select MASTER 08800 glazing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08800 p2 of 5 2.4 FIRE RATED GLASS 1. Manufacturer: Fire lite NT Premium 2. UL listed for rated glazing 2.5 TEMPERED GLASS A. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-1048 B. Safety Performance Standard: CPSC 16-CFR-1201-C11 C. Glass Type&Thickness: As specified above 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Manufacturing Standard: SIGMA CBA B. Edge Material: Sealant conforming to ASTM E-6-P3 C. Assembly Type: Low-E D. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)Certified Performance Requirements: E. Maximum Summer"U" Value: 0.31 F. Maximum Shading Coefficient: 0.32 G. Glass Layers: 2 H. Glass Type: Float Glass 2.7 SETTING BLOCKS A. Material: EPDM or Neoprene Rubber,unless otherwise required for compatibility with Glazing Compound and Sealant. B. Shore A Durometer Hardness: 80-90 C. Width: 1/8 inch wider than Glass Unit to be supported and 1/16 to 1/8 inch narrower than Glazing Pocket D. Length: Sufficient to support Glass Unit without excessive pressure on Glass edge 2.8 GLAZING COMPOUND A. Manufacturer: Dow, G.E., Gibson-Homans, 3-M, Sonneborn, or approved. B. Material: Compatible with Glass Edge Sealant and recommended by Insulating Glass Fabricator for conditions of use. C. For Field-glazed Units: 1. At Hollow Steelwork: Closed Cell Tape Bedding with Silicone Compound 2. At Woodwork: Closed Cell Tape Bedding with Acrylic Latex Compound 2.9 MIRRORS MASTER 08800 glazing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08800 p3 of 5 A. Glass Type: Float B. Glass Thickness: 1/4 inch C. Quality: No. 1 D. Silvering: Standard E. Backing: Copper protected by Paint or Varnish F. Back Covering: Painted Steel or Hardboard G. Frames: '/a"Extruded Aluminum, Anodic,Natural H. Corners: Square and mitered I. Size: See Drawings 2.10 SPLASH STRIPS A. Manufacturer&Model: Prostripe M105, or approved. B. Provide at Joints between Flooring and adjacent Bath Tub s& Shower Receptors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Openings to be glazed are accurately sized, shaped and located, and free of Fasteners and other Projections which will interfere with glazing. • B. Verify that Weep System is open. C. Verify that Glazing Surfaces are free of Moisture, Dirt, Grease, Oil, or other Deleterious Material. D. Verify that any Steel or Wood Glazing Rabbets and any contacting Dissimilar Materials are painted. E. Verify that Surfaces to receive Mirrors are structurally sound and capable of supporting Mirrors. F. Prior to starting Work, notify BSL about defects requiring correction. G. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 PREPARATION WORK A. Prior to glazing, clean, dry, and remove any Protective Coatings from Glass and from Surfaces to be glazed. 3.4 GLASS INSTALLATION A. General: MASTER 08800;glazing:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08800 p4 of 5 1. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Allow for Glass expansion and contraction. 3. Do not impact Glass against Framing. 4. Install Glass with Setting Blocks placed at Sill quarter points. 5. Do not set any Glass Flares or Bevels adjacent to Setting Blocks. 6. Install any Glass Surface Waves running horizontal. 7. Shift Glass with Suction Cups;do not use Pry Bar. 8. Remove Identity Labels immediately after installation; save for Architect's review. B. Tempered Glass: 1. Take particular care to prevent Glass-edge damage. C. Insulating Glass: 1. Follow Glazing Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, SIGMA No. 70-7-1. 3.5 MIRROR INSTALLATION A. Install Mirrors plumb,level, after Finish Painting is completed, and with open Ventilation Space behind Minor. B. Secure to Backing with concealed Mechanical Fasteners,where possible, or with Adhesive which will not damage Mirror Silvering. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Remove excess Glazing Compound from Glazing and adjacent Surfaces. B. Final Glass Cleaning: Specified in Section 01740. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. D. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up,or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled,discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. 3.7 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Protect installed Glazing against breakage and staining. B. Identify Glazed Areas with Streamers hanging from Framing. Do not apply directly to Glass. C. Notify General Contractor to prohibit Material storage close enough to Glass to create sufficient Heat Trap to cause Glass breakage. END OF SECTION MASTER 08800 glazing.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 08800 p5 of 5 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide gypsum board and framing, including metal studs,channels, and furring for wall framing and ceiling framing, accessories, fasteners, and joint treatments necessary to complete firewalls, interior partitions, furring, shafts, soffits and other enclosures. 1.2 EXTENT OF WORK A. Where Spaces are scheduled to receive Gypsum Board, include any Closets or Alcoves opening off these Spaces, and any Pilasters within Spaces,unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED,BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Access Panels: Section 08300 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Wood Framing: Section 06100 B. Steel Ceiling Suspension Systems: Section 09100 C. Sound Attenuation Batts: Section 09500 D. Surface Sealing& Finish Painting of Gypsum Board: Section 09900 1.5 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. General: 1. Conform to Referenced Specifications hereinafter named, as Architect judges them applicable, and as modified and supplemented herein. 2. Recommended materials and methods are mandatory; those proposed as equivalent by Contractor must be accepted by Architect. B. Metal Furring Installation: 1. Comply with applicable requirements specified in ASTM C-754. 2. Gypsum Board Application& Finishing: 3. Standard Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board,ASTM Document C-840. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.7 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. If and where Fire-rated Partitions or Ceilings are called for on Drawings, construct to obtain specified Rating. MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09250 pl of 7 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Deliver Products to Site with Manufacturer's original, legible Labels intact. B. Identify Fire-rated Materials with Testing Agency Label. C. Indicate Adhesive"open time" on Container Label. D. Protect Gypsum Material against moisture and Metal Materials against rust. E. Stack Gypsum Board on edge; do not stack flat or with longer lengths overhanging shorter lengths. F. Do not overload Building Structure with stockpiled Materials. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work only under the following conditions: B. Air Temperature for 24 hours-before and during Work, and for 24 hours after Materials have dried: 55°F to 75°F C. Ventilation: Maintain sufficient for proper Joint Treatment drying. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Products: Angeles, Beadex, Steeler, Steel Systems,US Gypsum, Western,or approved. B. Gypsum Products: Celotex, G.P.,Gypsum,Gold Bond, James Hardie, Manville,National Gypsum,US Gypsum, or approved. C. Other Products: As specified hereunder. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; (fire resistive type'X'where required for rated construction), UL rated;4x8 x 5/8 inch thick,maximum permissible length;ends square cut,tapered edges. B. Mold and Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C630 (fire- resistant type where required);4x8 x 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length;ends square cut,tapered edges. C. Exterior Sheathing Board: 5/8 inch thick, type x Dens-glass gold by Georgia- Pacific,maximum permissible length; ends square cuts. D. Gypsum Core Board: 24 x 1 inch thick fire-rated type 'X', maximum permissible length. E. Tile Backer Board: 1/2 inch thick Durock board by USG. F. Gypsum Board Shaftwalls: Fire resistant type'X' 1/2", 5/8" or 1" thick depending on the application, maximum permissible length,square cut ends, tongue and grooved edges. 2.3 AREA SEPARATION WALL (FIRE WALL) MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09250 p2 of 7 A. Provide system and components of one manufacturer B. Constrruct per UL tested assembly 2.4 METAL FURRING A. Steel channels,per ASTM C-645, G-60 hot-dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A-525; 25 ga. B. Furring Accessories: as required for complete installation. 2.5 RESILIENT CHANNELS A. Type: Similar to U.S.Gypsum RC-1 B. Depth as required to finish out with adjacent shear panels; 2.6 FASTENERS A. Screws or nails as recommended by Board Manufacturer to satisfy conditions of use,and as allowed by tested assemblies. 2.7 METAL TRIM A. At External Corners at Closet Walls&Window Openings: 1. Manufacturer&Model: Similar to USG Dura-Bead 800 2. Type: Square corner B. Control Joints: Similar to U.S. Gypsum 093 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Provide types as recommended by board manufacturer for application 1. Joint tape and Compound: 2. Laminating Adhesive: Made or recommended by Board Manufacturer. 3. Spray texture 4. Acoustical Selant: Pecora BA 98, Tremco, Miracle 21,U.S. 2.9 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT A. Manufacturer: G.E., Dow, or approved. B. Material: Silicone with Mildew Inhibiter C. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543 D. Type: Satisfy conditions of use E. Color: Clear translucent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Gypsum Board are accurately located, plumb, square,true, secure, dry, and otherwise properly prepared. MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09250 p3 of 7 B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. B. To prevent damage to Electrical Wiring, accurately cut openings in Board for Electrical Boxes prior to installing.Board. Do not make Openings with Router after Board installation. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Follow Referenced Specifications and Manufacturer's instructions, except as supplemented or modified herein. 3.4 RESILIENT CHANNEL INSTALLATION: A. Install perpendicular to Framing Members, and with"resilient" leg facing upward at Walls. B. Spacing: As required for tested assembly and mfr's recommendations, but no less than: C. At Wall Studs& Ceiling Joists spaced 16 inches o.c.: 24 inches o.c. D. At Wall Studs&Ceiling Joists spaced 24 inches o.c.: 16 inches o.c. E. Secure with Screws. 3.5 METAL ACCESS PANEL INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Accurately locate and securely anchor plumb, level, square, and true. 3.6 ACOUSTIC SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Apply Sealant around Electrical Boxes, Pipes, etc., located in or passing through Party Walls, Sound Walls, and Sound Ceilings. B. Prior to installing Gypsum Board,provide Acoustic Sealant around Residential Party and Sound Wall Perimeters in Angle between Walls, Floor, and Ceiling; press Board into Sealant forming bond between Framing Member face and backside of Board. C. Provide in Joints between Residential Party and Sound Walls and other adjacent Materials. D. Permit no Voids for sound passage. 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION. A. Install Wallboard horizontally, and extend to within 1/4 inch of Floor. B. Loosely butt Joints. • MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09250 p4 of 7 C. Except at Corners,place Tapered Edges together. D. Do not place Butt Edges against Tapered Edges. E. Where possible apply Boards without Butt Joints. Where Butt Joints are necessary, locate as far from Wall and Ceiling centers as possible and stagger, including Joints on opposite face of Partitions. F. Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between Fastener and Board Edge. G. Dimple Board Surface 1/32 inch with Fastener; do not fracture Face Paper. H. Secure Single-ply Boards and Base Layer of 2-ply Assemblies to Framing as follows: I. At Wood Wall Framing: Screw at 7 inch o.c. along each Support. J. At Wood Ceiling Framing: Screw at 6 inch o.c. along each Support. K. At Metal Wall Furring: Screw at 8 inch o.c. along Board perimeter and at 12 inch o.c. at Intermediate Supports. L. At Metal Ceiling Furring: Screw at 8 inch o.c. along each Support. M. Board may, at Contractor's option, be secured to Wall and Ceiling Framing with Adhesive if also screwed to Wall Supports at 16 inch o.c. and to Ceiling Supports at 12 inches o.c. N. Secure Face Layer of 2-ply Assemblies to Base Layer as follows: O. Install Screws long enough to penetrate Wood Framing at least 5/8 inch and Metal Furring at least 1/4 inch and, space 12 inches o.c. along each Supporting Member, or P. Apply Full Adhesive covering between plies. Until Adhesive develops full bond,temporarily support Wall Face Layer in position with Fasteners or Shoring and permanently support Ceiling Face Layer with Fasteners. 3.8 AREA SEPARATION WALL(FIRE WALL) AND SHAFT WALLS: A. General: Provide assemblies as shown on drawings B. Minimum UL Fire Resistance Rating: 1 hour C. Elevator Shafts: Capable of resisting Air Pressures caused by Elevator travel. 3.9 OTHER GYPSUM INSTALATIONS A. Provide Gypsum Board fire-rated assembly over Lighting Fixtures or any other such penetrations in rated walls and ceilings. 3.10 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide Control Joints, unless otherwise shown on Drawings, as follows: 1. If and where Framing changes direction 2. Over Joints between dissimilar Substrates 3. Where necessary to divide Gypsum Board into areas not exceeding: a. 2-1/2 to 1 length to height Ratio, or 30 ft. o.c. max MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09250 p5 of 7 4. Elsewhere as shown on Drawings 3.11 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: 1/360 of span. B. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 ft. and 1/16 inch in any running ft. 3.12 JOINT, CORNER, & SURFACE TREATMENT A. Protect External Corners and Exposed Edges with Metal Trim. B. Except at Attic Draft Stops and Backer Board, fill Board Joints, Internal Corners and Angles,Fastener Head Depressions, and Accessories as follows: C. At interior face of Elevator Shaft Walls: 1. Embed Tape in Joint Compound. 2. Remove excess Compound. 1 Tool Marks and Ridges will be acceptable. D. At Gypsum Board where scheduled to receive Quarry Tile Wall Base: 1. Embed Tape in Joint Compound plus 1 additional coat of Compound. 2. Remove excess Compound. 3. Tool Marks and Ridges will be.acceptable. E. At all other Gypsum Board: 1. Embed Tape in Joint Compound plus 3 additional coats of Compound. 2. Remove Tool Marks, Ridges,and excess Compound. 3.13 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT A. Provide at Raw Edges and around Cutouts in Water-resistant Gypsum Board. 3.14 SURFACE TEXTURE A. At Surfaces to be Painted: B. Spray-apply Texture Compound to produce fine-spray Texture Finish in accordance with approved Mock Up. C. Apply Compound after Joints are taped and dry,and after Painter-provided Surface Sealer is applied and dry. D. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. E. At all other Gypsum Board: F. Leave smooth without Texture. 3.15 GYPSUM BOARD REPAI.RING A. General: 1. After installation and before finishing, correct any Surface Damage or Defects. MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/1 1/14 09250 p6 of 7 2. Leave Surfaces clean, uniform,and ready for Finishing specified in other Sections. B. Screw Pop: 1. Repair by installing new Screw approximately 1-1/2 inch away from Projecting Screw and reset Projecting Screw. 2. Where Face Paper is fractured install new Fastener approximately 1-1/2 inch away from Projecting Screw and remove Projecting Screw. 3. Fill Damaged Surface with Joint Compound and finish flush and smooth. C. Ridging: 1. Sand Ridges smooth without cutting Joint Tape. 2. Fill Concave Areas on both sides of Ridge with Compound and finish flush and smooth. D. Cracks: 1._ Fill with Joint Compound and finish flush and smooth. 3.16 PRODUCT CLEANING& OTHER REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up,or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove excess Joint Compound and any other Finishing Compounds from Floors and other Surfaces. C. Broom-clean Work areas. D. Leave Surface ready for Finishing specified in other Sections. E. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 09250 gypsum systems.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09250 p7 of 7 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC&QUARRY TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide ceramic and quarry tile as shown on drawings and finish schedule. B. Where Tile Base is scheduled,provide Tile around entire perimeter of Room or Space, including free-standing Columns and Pilasters, if any. C. Tile not required where concealed under or behind permanently built-in Cabinets or Equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Concrete to receive Tile: Section 03300 B. Wood Framing to receive Tile Backing Board: Section 06100 C. Gypsum Board Backing to receive Tile: Section 09250 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. Tile Manufacture: Conform to American National Standards Institute Specification ANSI A-137.1 as Architect judges it applicable, and as supplemented and modified herein. Referenced Specifications can be obtained from Institute at 1430 Broadway,New York,NY 10018; (212) 354-3300. B. Tile Installation: Conform to Tile Council of America(TCA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation as Architect judges it applicable, and as supplemented and modified herein. Handbook can be obtained from Council at Box 1787; Clemson, SC 29633-1787. 1.4 SAMPLES A. Prior to ordering and in accordance with Section 01330, submit the following: B. One Panel at least 12 inches square showing each Tile type and color. C. One piece of each color, type, and shape of Trim Shapes. D. One Edging Strip at least 12 inches long. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened Containers with legible Labels intact. C. Attach Grade Label to each Container in accordance with TCA 137.1. 1.6 WORK SPACE TEMPERATURE& ILLUMINATION A. Refer to Section 01500 for Temporary Enclosures, Heat, and Illumination. MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p1 of 7 B. Set and grout Tile only when Ambient Temperature is at least 50°F and rising. C. Perform work under at least 30 ft. candles Illumination measured 3 ft. above adjacent Floor. Notify Contractor,if necessary, to provide additional light. 1.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Submit 1 unopened Case of each color and type of Tile. B. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD SEALER A. Manufacturer&Brand: Miracle Ceramic Tile Primer, 3M CTA 50 Primer, or approved; or at Contractor's option Tile Adhesive recommended by Tile Manufacturer. B. Extent of Work: Provide over Gypsum Board Surfaces to receive Tile. 2.2 BACKING BOARD A. Manufacturer&Brand: B. If and where Curved: National Gypsum PermaBase Flex, or approved. C. Elsewhere: Custom Building Products Wonderboard, FinPan Util-A-Crete, G- P Dens-Shield,Hardie Backerboard,National Gypsum PermaBase,USG Durock, or approved. D. Material: Glass-mesh reinforced Cement Board E. Thickness: '/4" inch or Y2",per application and tile mfr install requirements F. Fasteners: Screws, and where necessary Washers,recommended by Board Manufacturer. G. Joint Reinforcement Tape: 2 inch wide Vinyl-coated Fiberglass Mesh H. Extent of Work: Provide over Floor Sheathing where schedule to receive Tile. 2.3 CRACK BRIDGING MEMBRANE A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Material: Elastomeric Membrane satisfying conditions of use, and capable of bridging open Cracks and Joints without inducing stress onto Tile. C. Extent of Work: Provide over open Cracks and Joints in Substrates to receive Thin-set Tile. 2.4 TILE-GENERAL A. Manufacturing Standard: ANSI 137.1 B. Grade: Standard(no Seconds accepted). C. Color&Pattern: MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p2 of 7 D. Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. E. Manufacturers listed below are approved provided they can supply Tile that match selected Color and Pattern to Architect's satisfaction. 2.5 CERAMIC FLOOR TILE A. Manufacturer: American Olean, Buchtal, Dal-Tile,Thompson,U.S. Ceramic, or approved. B. Finish: per finish schedule 2.6 QUARRY FLOOR TILE A. Manufacturer: American Olean, Summitville, Thompson, Universal, US Ceramic,or approved. B. Type: Extruded C. Edges: Square D. Thickness: 1/2 inch E. Nominal Face Size: 6x6 inches F. Pattern: Straight Line 2.7 QUARRY TILE WALL BASE A. Manufacturer: American Olean, Summitville,Thompson, Universal, US Ceramic,or approved. B. Type: Extruded C. Edges: Square D. Thickness: 5/16 inch E. Nominal Height: 6 inches F. Length: 6 inches G. Bottom Shape: Coved • H. Top Shape: Bull-nosed 2.8 SPECIAL SHAPED TILE A. Provide as shown on Drawings or required for complete installation, including Coves, Bull noses, Corners, and any bevel-shaped Tile Edge Strips necessary as transition between Floor Tile and adjacent Floor Coverings of different thickness. B. Material: Match adjacent Tile C. Size: Match Tile width so that adjacent Joints align. 2.9 LATEX ADDITIVES A. Manufacturer: Laticrete, or approved. MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p3 of 7 B. Brand: Satisfy conditions of use 2.10 PROTECTIVE SEALER A. Type: Made or recommended by Tile Manufacturer. B. Extent of Work: Provide at Tile and other Surfaces, if any, which are subject to damage or discoloration by Grout. 2.11 GREASE RESISTING GROUT A. Manufacturer& Brand: Contractor's choice B. Type: Epoxy C. Manufacturing Standard: ANSI A-118.3 D. Extent of Work: Provide in Kitchen Areas. 2.12 ACID RESISTING GROUT A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Type: Epoxy C. Manufacturing Standard: ANSI A-118.3 D. Extent of Work: Provide adjacent to Toilet and Urinals. 2.13 ALL OTHER GROUT A. Type: TCA Commercial Portland Cement Grout B. COLOR PIGMENT C. Manufacturer: J. Lee Smith, 3-M, Williams, or approved. D. Material: Pure Mineral Oxide. E. Color: Selected by Interior Designer after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. F. Extent of Work: Provide in all exposed Grout. 2.14 SEALANT A. Manufacturer& Brand: Dow 784, GE 1700, Sonneborn Omniglaze, or approved. B. Type: Silicone with Mildew Inhibitor C. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543 D. Provide in the following locations: E. Around any Plumbing Fixture Fittings which penetrate Tile. F. At any Control Joints in Tile field. G. Elsewhere shown on Drawings. 2.15 EDGE STRIP MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p4 of 7 A. Manufacturer: Schluter-Systems, (800)472-4588, or approved. B. Brand: Schiene C. Material: Verify and match adjacent Door Hardware specified in Section 08710. D. Extent of Work: Provide at any exposed Tile Floor edges and elsewhere Tile Floors abut other Floor Coverings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine Surfaces to receive Tile, and start no work until Defects that will adversely affect Tile Work have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive Portland Cement Mortar shall not vary more than 1/4 inch above or 1/4 inch below required plane in any undivided space; nor shall there be more than 1/16 inch variation within any single running foot. C. Surfaces to receive Dry-Set Mortar shall not vary more than 1/8 inch above or 1/8 inch below required plane in any undivided space; nor shall there be more than 1/16 inch variation within any single running foot. D. Do not start until Work of other Trades, which goes through or in space behind Tile,has been completed,and any unacceptable conditions are corrected. E. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. F. Do not start Work until defects are corrected. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 SEALING GYPSUM BOARD BACKING A. Apply Sealer 1/16 inch thick over Surfaces to receive Tile including bottom edge of Gypsum Board and exposed edges of Cutouts. B. Allow Sealer to dry, 24 hours minimum,prior to applying Bedding Adhesive. 3.4 BACKING BOARD INSTALLATION A. Accurately precut Boards to size, and make any necessary Cutouts. B. Cover Floor Sheathing with Latex-modified Mortar Leveling.Bed applied with 1/4x1/4x1/4 inch Notched Trowel. C. Do not locate Board Joints directly over Floor Sheathing Joints. D. Space Joints between adjacent Boards 1/8 to 3/16 inch. E. Secure Boards to Sheathing with Screws spaced at 6 inch centers in both directions. MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p5 of 7 F. Fill Joints between adjacent Boards with Dry Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar, and cover Joints with Reinforcement Tape embedded in skim coat of Mortar. 3.5 CRACK BRIDGING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply Primer to Substrate where,and as, recommended by Membrane Manufacturer. 3.6 TILE LAYOUT A. Where possible, layout Work so that no Tile less than half size occurs. B. For heights dimensioned on Drawings, maintain full courses to produce height nearest to these dimensions without cutting Tile. C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, align Joints in Floor Tile at right angles to each other and parallel with Walls. D. Determine exact locations of any Control Joints before installing Tile. E. Terminate Tile neatly at Edges,Corners,and Obstructions without disruption of Tile pattern or Joint alignment. 3.7 JOINT WIDTHS A. Between Adjacent Tiles: Follow Tile Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.8 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with the following Referenced Specifications: B. At Concrete Floors: Portland Cement Mortar(TCA Spec. F114) C. At Backing Board over Wood Subfloors: Dry-set Mortar(TCA Spec. F144) D. At Gypsum Board over Wall Studs: Dry-set Mortar(TCA Spec. W243) E. At Control Joints: (TCA Spec. EJ171) 3.9 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Horizontal Surfaces: True within 1/8 inch per 10 ft. in all directions B. Vertical Surfaces: True within 1/8 inch per 8 ft. in all directions 3.10 PROTECTIVE SEALER APPLICATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply evenly to fully protect Tile. 3.11 GROUTING A. Delay grouting until Tile are firmly set;48 hours minimum. B. Prior to grouting,wash-out and saturate Tile Joints with Clean Water. MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p6 of 7 C. If and when using Proprietary Products, follow Product Manufacturer's instructions. D. Fill Joints with Grout,and finish smooth and slightly below Tile face. 3.12 EDGE STRIP INSTALLATION A. Where located at Doorways, center directly under Door. B. Secure to adjacent Structure in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3.13 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Remove any excess Sealant within 20 minutes of installation using Denatured Alcohol on Cheesecloth Pad. B. Including Work of other Trades,clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 09310 ceramic tile.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09310 p7 of 7 SECTION 09500 ACOUSTIC CEILINGS TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide suspended ceiling systems as shown on drawings. B. Provide acoustical insulation in walls and ceilings 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Thermal Insulation: Section 07200 B. Acoustic Caulking: Section 09250 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A: For Suspension Systems,hereinafter specified, comply with: B. "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings": ASTM C-635 C. "Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustic Tile and Lay-in Panels": ASTM C-636 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Resistance Rating: ASTM E-119 B. Flame Spread Rating: ASTM E-84 1.5 CERTIFICATION OF CODE COMPLIANCE A. Submit to Architect written certification that Ceiling System complies with Seismic Loading requirements of Building Code and that System is acceptable to Building Official. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Deliver Tile in original,unopened,protective packages with Manufacturer's legible Labels indicating brand name,pattern, size,thickness, and fire rating, if any. 1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Store Tile Cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Delay installation of Acoustic Units until Work Spaces are dry. MASTER 09500 acoustic treatment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09500 p1 of 4 B. Perform Work only under the following conditions for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation: C. Humidity: 65%to 75% D. Ambient Air Temperature: 55°F to 80°F 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Submit 1 extra case of each Acoustic Tile in unopened protective packages. B. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTIC TILE A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, Celotex,USG Interiors, or approved. B. Tile Type#1: 1. Pattern: Match Armstrong Second Look II, white 2. Face Size: 24x48 inches 3. Edges: tegular C. Tile Type#2: 1. Pattern: Match Armstrong Vinyl Face, white 2. Face Size: 24x48 inches 3. Edges: Square 2.2 TILE SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, Chicago Metallic,Donn, or approved. B. Material: Steel, Type: Exposed Tee in 2 directions; all Tile removable for access to Space above. Face Width: 15/16 inch C. Meet Seismic requirements required by code and shown in drawings D. Edge Trim: Match Suspension System E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Enamel F. Color: Match adjacent Acoustic Tile G. Layout: See Drawings 2.3 FASTENERS &ACCESSORIES A. Type& Sizes: Recommended by Suspension System Manufacturer MASTER 09500 acoustic treatment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09500 p2 of 4 2.4 ACOUSTIC INSULATION IN PARTITIONS AND FLOOR/CEILINGS A. Material: Formaldehyde-free Mineral Wool or Glass Fiber Insulation B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-665 C. Type: Friction-fit Batt D. Length: Full-length,single-piece where practicable E. Special Requirement: UL Rated for Plenum-use if and where located above Ceiling. F. Thickness: Fill framing cavity or 3"min when allowed by building code and sprinkler code G. Extent of Work: Provide at the following locations: 1. Within Sound Walls&Residential Unit demising Walls, including where Walls extend above Ceiling. 2. At Unit wails shared with common spaces 3. At common area restroom walls 4. At Residential Unit Floor/Ceiling assemblies PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive directly-attached Acoustical Units are even, regular, true, level within 1/8 inch per 12 ft., dry and free from Oil, or other Bond-reducing Substances. B. Verify that Surfaces provided by other Trades are clean,dry. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Follow Referenced Specifications,Manufacturer's instructions,and Layout Drawings,except as modified hereunder. 2. Delay start of Work until above-ceiling Work by other Trades has been completed. B. Tile Suspension System: 1. Where Mechanical and Electrical Work interferes with regular spacing of Hangers,provide additional Hangers and Channels and make necessary adjustments in Ceiling construction. MASTER 09500 acoustic treatment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09500 p3 of 4 2. Do not attach to or pass Hangers through Mechanical or Electrical Ductwork. 3. Provide Framing around any recessed Lighting Fixtures and other Openings. 4. Maximum Vertical Hanger Splay: 6 inches per 4 ft. C. Acoustic Tile: 1. Install in level plane, in straight line courses, and with solid bearing on Support Members. 2. Minimum Border Tile Width: 1/2 Unit dimension, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 3. Install any Pattern grain in one direction. 4. Where Acoustic Tile abut Vertical Surfaces,trim Joints with Suspension System Metal Edge Trim. 5. Where Tegular Edge Units are field-cut, shape and paint cut edges to match other edges. D. Hold Down Clips: 1.. Provide at any time during Warranty Period where Ceiling Units are dislodged by Air Pressure. 2. Provide at any Fire-rated Ceiling Units weighing less than 1 psf. E. Recessed Lighting Fixture Hoods: 1. Provide 1 hour UL Fire-rated Hoods to enclose any Lighting fixtures recessed through Fire-rated Acoustic Tile. F. Acoustic Insulation in Partitions& above Ceilings: 1. Install between Framing Members butting joints tight with no voids. 3.4 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum fully loaded Ceiling Deflection in accordance with ASTM C-635: 1/360 of Span B. Install Finish Surfaces level and true within 1/8 inch per 12 ft. C. Maximum Ceiling Suspension System Runner rotation from plumb: 2° 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 09500 acoustic treatment.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09500 p4 of 4 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide resilient flooring as shown on drawings and finish schedule. 1. Cover any Accessible Sink Cabinet,Closet, or Alcove Floors opening off these Spaces with same Material. Covering not required under permanently built-in Casework and Equipment,unless otherwise indicated elsewhere. 2. Where Base is scheduled: Provide around perimeter of Room or Space, unless otherwise indicated elsewhere. Include Casework,Free-standing Columns, Pilasters, and other Projections, if any. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Wood Base: Section 06220 B. Divider Strips where Floor Covering abuts Ceramic Tile: Section 09310 C. Carpet: Section 09680 D. Entrance Floor Mats: Section 10990 E. Elevator Floor Covering: Section 14200. 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS A. Comply with applicable requirements of Standard Specifications and Recommended Work Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings published by the Resilient Floor Covering Institute. B. Copies can be obtained from Institute at 966 Hungerford Dr.; Suite 12-B; Rockville, MD 20850; (301) 340-8580. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Two full size samples of each specified Floor Tile. B. Two 12x12 inch samples of each specified Sheet Covering. 1.6 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit Manufacturer's recommended Maintenance Products and Methods to General Contractor, for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY MASTER 09650 resilient flooring.doe 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 009650 p1 of 5 A. Deliver in unopened Packages with Manufacturer's original, legible Labels thereon. B. Matching Coverings shall bear Manufacturer's Run Number. C. Do not remove Labels or open Packages until Architect inspects. 1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Store in dry place. C. Maintain Storage Place Temperature above 70°F for immediate 48 hours prior to and during storage. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work only under the following Minimum Conditions: B. Ambient Air Temperature during application and thereafter: 70°F C. Substrate Surface Temperature: 70°F D. Work Area Illumination measured 3 ft. above Floor: 30 foot candles E. Ventilation: If and when using offensive smelling Adhesive, provide sufficient Ventilation to maintain healthy and pleasant environment for Building Occupants. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Leave with Owner 1 extra unopened case of each Floor Tile. B. Leave with Owner 3 ft. minimum length and full-width Sheet Covering remnants. C. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Covering Materials shall have uniform size and thickness, straight edges, square corners, uniform pattern, and uniform color extending through entire thickness of Material. 2.2 COLORS&PATTERNS A. As selected by BSL 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, Azrock,Flextile, GAF,Mannington, or approved. B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. SS-T-312B(1)Type IV Composition 1 C. Thickness: 1/8 inch MASTER 09650 resilient flooring.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 009650 p2 of 5 D. Face Size: 12x12 inches 2.4 SHEET VINYL A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, or approved. B. Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. L-F-475A Type II Grade A 2.5 RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturer: Armstrong, Burke,Flexco, Goodrich, Johnsonite, Mercer, Noramet,Roppe,Textile, VPI, or approved. B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM F-1861 C. Type: Top-set with Coved Toe, continuous rolls D. Height: 6"at toilet rooms; 4"elsewhere E. Required Accessories: 1. Mitered Internal Corners 2. Factory-formed External Corners equipped with Tab Extensions for installation behind adjacent Wall Base 3. Factory-formed End Stops 2.6 REDUCING EDGE STRIPS A. Rubber,beveled, 1"wide, match floor thickness 2.7 PRIMER, SEALER, CRACK FILLER, &ADHESIVE A. Water-resistant type made or recommended by Covering Manufacturer for conditions of use. 2.8 SEALANT A. Material: Silicone B. Color: Clear Translucent C. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C-920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. D. Required Ingredient: Mildew Inhibitor E. Extent of Work: Provide in Toilet and Bath Rooms at Joint between Rubber Base and Floor. 2.9 CLEANER A. Neutral type made or recommended by Covering Manufacturer for conditions of use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS MASTER 09650 resilient flooring.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 009650 p3 of 5 A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Work specified herein are solid, clean, level, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Verify that Concrete Slabs to receive Covering do not exceed Moisture and Vapor limits specified by Covering Manufacturer, as determined by Tests specified in Section 01453. C. Verify that Walls to receive Base extend to within 1/4 inch of Floor. D. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction. E. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Fill Concrete Slab Cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and Depressions less than 1/8 inch deep with Crack Filler. Notify General Contractor to correct wider Cracks and deeper Depressions. B. Provide 1 coat of Primer on any sanded Wood and other Surfaces where recommended by Covering Manufacturer. 3.4 LAYOUT A. Tile Patterns: B. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, layout Tile Field so that no Perimeter Tile is narrower than 1/2 of a full-size Tile. C. Install Tile in "stack bond" with continuous straight line joints in both directions. D. Install Tile with any pattern "grain" running in checkerboard pattern. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Follow Manufacturer's Instructions and applicable sections of Referenced Specifications. B. Tile: At least 24 hours before laying,remove Tile from Shipping Cartons and back-stack. C. Sheet Vinyl: Install with minimum practicable Seams in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended method. 1. Install with 6 inch high self-coved Base. D. Rubber Base: 1. General: Install Factory-formed External Corners with Contact Cement. 2. At Toilet&Bath Rooms: 3. Set Base in Sealant Bead previously applied to Floor. 4. Strike-off Sealant flush with Base. MASTER 09650 resilient flooring.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 009650 p4 of 5 5. Remove any surplus Sealant from Base and Floor. E. Reducing Edge Strips: Provide wherever Flooring edges are exposed. 1. If Flooring terminates at Door opening, center Strip under Door. 3.6 CLEANING, REPAIRING, &POLISHING A. Do not let Dirt or Soil accumulate on installed Surfaces; if necessary sweep or vacuum daily. B. After Covering and Adhesive have set sufficiently, clean Surfaces for Owner- applied Polish. C. Leave Surfaces smooth and defect-free. D. Including Work of other Sections,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. E. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. 3.7 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Rope-off Work areas and/or provide necessary Coverings to protect Work of this Section. END OF SECTION MASTER 09650 resilient flooring.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 009650 p5 of 5 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide carpet,carpet base, and accessories as shown in drawings and finish schedule B. Where Carpet is scheduled: 1. Cover any Closet or Alcove Floors opening off these Spaces with same Material. 2. Do not provide Carpet under permanently built-in Casework or Equipment, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. At Stairways scheduled to receive Carpet: Provide Carpet at any Landings as well as Risers and Treads,unless otherwise shown on Drawings. D. At Elevators scheduled to receive Carpet: Completely cover Elevator Cab Floor. E. Where Base is scheduled: 1. Provide around perimeter of Room or Space,unless otherwise shown elsewhere. Include Casework, Free-standing Columns, Pilasters, and other Projections, if any. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Wood Base at Carpet Perimeters: Section 06220 B. Rubber Base at Carpet Perimeters: Section 09650 1.3 SAMPLES A. Prior to ordering and in accordance with Section 01330, submit the following: B. Two 12x12 inch samples of each Carpet type and color. C. • Two 12 inch long samples of each type of Edge Strip. 1.4 LAYOUT DRAWINGS A. Prior to ordering Materials and in accordance with Section 01330, submit 2 copies showing Carpet layout, and Edge Strip and Seam locations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit Instructions to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Maximum Carpet System Flame Spread& Smoke Development: Comply with applicable Building Code requirements. MASTER 09680 carpet.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09680 p1 of 5 1.7 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE A. Prior to installation, submit Carpet Manufacturer's Packaging Labels and Registry Number Labels for Interior Designer's review and acceptance. B. Submit Carpet Manufacturer's affidavit which certifies that: 1. Installer is authorized to perform Work. 2. Installed Carpet was manufactured in accordance with Specification requirements. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Do not deliver Carpet until installation is ready to start. 1.9 PRODUCT STORAGE &HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Do not store Rolled Goods on end. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work only under the following Minimum Conditions: B. Ambient Air Temperature: C. During installation& for 72 hours thereafter: 65°F - 95°F D. Beyond 72 hours after installation: 55°F minimum E. Substrate Surface Temperature: 65°F F. Work Area Illumination measured 3 ft. above Floor: 30 ft. candles G. Ventilation: If and when using offensive smelling Adhesive,provide sufficient Ventilation to maintain healthy and pleasant environment for Building Occupants. 1.11 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Warrant for 5 years that Carpet will maintain specified limits.of Static Electricity Generation. B. Warrant for 10 years that Carpet will lose no more than 10%Face Fiber by weight. C. At no additional cost to Owner,correct defects in materials and workmanship which appear during Warranty Period by repairing,restretching, or when directed by replacing. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. For each type,pattern, and color of Carpet leave the following: B. Excess, usable, full-width Carpet Remnants over 24 inches in least dimension C. 1 full-width Carpet Piece, at least 12 ft. long. D. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner. MASTER 09680 carpet.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09680 p2 of 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RESIDENTIAL UNIT CARPET A. As selected by BSL 2.2 ACCENT BORDER CARPET A. As selected by BSL 2.3 ALL OTHER CARPET A. As selected by BSL 2.4 CUSHION A. None required. 2.5 CONCRETE SEALER A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use. C. Extent of Work: Provide if and where recommended by Carpet Manufacturer. 2.6 EDGE STRIP A. Manufacturer&Brand: Mercer Snap Down, Roberts Universal Moulding System, or approved. B. Insert Material: Vinyl C. Insert Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices 2.7 ADHESIVE& FLOOR FILLER A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice B. Material: Non-flammable type recommended by Carpet Manufacturer 2.8 SEAM CEMENT& SEALER A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice B. Material: Non-flammable type recommended by Carpet Manufacturer 2.9 HEAT-SEAMING CARPET TAPE A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice B. Type& Size: Recommended by Carpet Manufacturer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS MASTER 09680 carpet.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09680 p3 of 5 A. Verify that Subfloor is clean,dry, level,and solid; with no projections or holes that will damage Carpet System;that Work Spaces have specified illumination, humidity, and temperature;and that Surfaces are otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Verify that Concrete to receive Covering does not exceed Moisture and Vapor limits specified by Covering Manufacturer,as determined by Tests specified in Section 01453. D. Do not start Work until conditions are.satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 PART 3 PREPARATION WORK A. Fill Concrete Slab Cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and Depressions less than 1/8 inch deep with Floor Filler. Notify General Contractor to correct wider Cracks and deeper Depressions. B. Remove any Dust,Foreign Matter, or Moisture from Substrate. C. Acclimate Carpet to Work Space Environment for at least 48 hours before starting Work. 3.4 EDGE STRIP INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide Edge Stripping at exposed Carpet edges. C. Where Carpet terminates at Door opening,center Edge Strip under Door. 3.5 ADHESIVE APPLICATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply uniformly over full area to receive Carpet. C. Apply only to area that can be covered by Carpet within Adhesive working- time. D. Promptly remove any Adhesive spillages. 3.6 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Installation Method: Direct Glue-down C. Run Seams and Pile inclination at same direction. D. Match any Carpet Pattern at Seams. E. Lay with minimum possible Seams and Sections. F. Do not locate Seams in conspicuous location,near Doors or Pivot Points. MASTER 09680 carpet.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09680 p4 of 5 G. Fit neatly into Breaks and Recesses;against Bases; around Pipes and Penetrations;under Saddles, Ventilator Grilles, and Thresholds; and around Cabinet and Equipment perimeters. H. Where Carpet terminates at Door openings center exposed Carpet Edge directly under Door. I. Tape and cement Seams in accordance with Carpet Manufacturer's recommendations. J. Coat cut-edges with Seam Cement. K. Roll Carpet to expel Air-bubbles. L. Power-stretch Carpet taut,and neatly finish at edges. 3:7 CARPET BASE A. Install 4 inches high. B. Hem exposed Carpet Edges, including Vertical Edges at Door Jambs and other Obstructions. 3.8 CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Do not let Dirt or Soil accumulate on installed Carpet;vacuum daily if necessary. B. After completing Work, vacuum-clean Carpet. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. D. Including Work of other Sections,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. 3.9 DEMONSTRATIONS A. After installation, instruct Owner on proper care, cleaning, and maintenance of Carpet. 3.10 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Provide necessary Coverings and Barricades to protect completed Work. END OF SECTION MASTER 09680 carpet.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09680 p5 of 5 SECTION 09900 PAINTING& FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 . DESRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide wall textures,painting, and other specified coatings, including surface preparations,as required for finished and weather protected surfaces of both interior and exterior materials, including mechanical and electrical equipment. B. Coordinate with other trades and other specification sections. Surfaces left unfinished by other trades or sections are to be painted or finished as a part of this Section. C. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by the BSL. Number of colors to be used on job will be determined by BSL. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Temporary Sign Painting,Temporary Heat, &Temporary Light: Section 01500 B. Fabricated Steel Shop Painting: Section 05500 C. Wood Siding Shop Painting: Section 06420 D. Transparent Water Repellent: Section 07180 E. Sheetmetal Shop Painting: Section 07620 F. Roof Accessories Shop Painting: Section 07720 G. Joint Sealants: Section 07920 H. Hollow Steelwork Shop Painting: Section 08110 I. Special Doors Shop Painting: Section 08300 J. Acoustic System Suspension Tees Shop Painting: Section 09500 K. Exterior Wall Louvers Shop Painting: Section 10200 L. Metal Fireplaces Shop Painting: Section 10305 M. Metal Locker Shop Painting: Section 10500 N. Miscellaneous Specialties Shop Painting: Section 10990 O. Equipment Shop Painting: Division 11 P. Manufactured Casework Shop Finishing: Section 12300 Q. Window Blinds Shop Painting: Section 12510 R. Elevator Shop Painting: Section 14200 S. Mechanical Equipment Shop Painting: Division 15 T. Electrical Equipment Shop Painting: Division 16 1.3 SUBMITTALS MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/20121402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p l of 9 A. Before ordering,submit complete List of Materials proposed for use. B. In accordance with Section 01330, submit 3 Samples of each specified Finish, Color, and Sheen. C. Minimum Sample Size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches 1.4 FIELD MOCKUP A. Before proceeding with Contract Work,apply where directed each specified Coating on actual Work Surfaces. B. Include at least the following: 1. Walls: 100 sq. ft. 2. Ceilings: 100 sq. ft. 3. Doors& Door Frames: 1 C. Simulate Contract Lighting during Architect's review. D. Accepted Mock Up represents Minimum Acceptance Standard for Subsequent Work. E. Accepted Mock Up, in like-new condition,may be used in Contract Work. F. Prior to starting Project Work, adjust Mock-up Colors as directed by Architect at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Deliver in Manufacturer's original, unopened Containers with legible Labels intact. B. Do not open Containers or remove Labels until Architect inspects. C. Store in suitable location where directed by General Contractor. D. Protect against damage and contamination. E. Remove unacceptable Materials from Project Site. 1.6 PRODUCT LABELS A. Each Product Container Label shall include: B. Manufacturer's Name C. Type of Material D. Manufacturer's Product Number E. Manufacturer's Batch Number F. Color G. Instructions for reducing when applicable 1.7 WORK SPACE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/2012 1402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p2 of 9 B. Perform Work only under the following conditions, unless otherwise instructed by Manufacturer: 1. Maximum Relative Humidity: 85% 2. Minimum Dew Point Variance between Air& Surface Temperature: 5°F. 3. Minimum Ambient Air& Surface Temperature during application and until Film is dry-hard thereafter: 4. At Urethane Coatings: 70°F. 5. Elsewhere: 45°F. C. Do not work: 1. Where Dust, Air-borne Particles, or Insects are present. 2. Where Inclement Weather may damage Coating Surface. 3. With less than 30 ft. candles of Available Light measured 3 ft. above Floor. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Submit, in previously unopened Containers, 1 gallon of each color of each Top Coat. B. Label each Container with Product-identification and Use-location. C. Store on Project Premises where directed by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Products for each general purpose shall be of same Manufacturer. Do not use Products of different Manufacturers over one another, except for Shop Prime Coats specified in other Sections. B. Products shall be free of Lead and Mercury and must comply with Federal VOC requirements. C. Products shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of Blemishes or Sags. D. Products shall not exceed Code-required Flame-spreads or Smoke- developments. 2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL PRETREATMENT MATERIAL, IF SCHEDULED TO BE PAINTED A. Manufacturer&Brand: Amchem Galvaprep, or approved. 2.3 OTHER COATINGS A. Products listed below in Paint Schedule shall comply with latest edition of Approved Products List published by Master Painters Institute(MPI). Copies can be obtained from Institute at(888)674-8937, or they can be viewed by Computer by searching "MPI Approved Product List" and clicking-on"Index by Category". MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/2012 1402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p3 of 9 2.4 COLORS A. Selected by BSL after Contract award. B. Manufacturers listed in Approved Products List are approved provided they can supply Colors that match selected Colors to BSL's satisfaction. 2.5 MIXING&TINTING A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Unless otherwise instructed by Manufacturer, deliver Coatings factory-mixed to Jobsite. C. Job-mix and Job-tint only when required by Manufacturer. D. Mix only in clean,.rust-resistant Containers. E. Use Tinting Colors recommended by Coating Manufacturer. F. Where Thinner is used,do not exceed Coating Manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use Kerosene or Organic Solvents to thin Water- based Coatings. G. Factory-add Fungicidal Agent to all Exterior Coatings and to any Interior Coatings located in high-humidity Spaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine Surfaces to receive.Coatings for existing conditions that could adversely effect Work execution,permanence, or quality. Give particular attention to Primer Coatings applied'by other Trades. B. Verify that General Contractor has removed Door Hardware,as specified in Section 08710. C. Do not apply Coating over Substrates which exceed the following Maximum Moisture Content: D. Wood: 15% E. Gypsum Board: 12% F. Prior to starting Work, notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. G. Do not start.Work until conditions are satisfactory. Applying Coatings to defective Substrates indicates acceptance of Defective Substrate by Painter, and Painter shall bear all costs to produce acceptable Work, including re- painting entire Surface(No touch-up painting). 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/20121402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p4 of 9 B. Prior to painting,remove or otherwise protect any Finish Hardware, Accessories, Cover Plates, Lighting Fixtures, and similar Items. After painting, reinstall Removed Items and remove Protective Coverings. C. Do not dump Waste Materials, including Thinners, into Landscape Planting Beds, Plumbing Fixtures,or Storm Drains. D. Cover or otherwise protect Paint Storage and Mixing Rooms. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Remove any Loose Material, Dirt,Dust, or Foreign_Matter. B. Zinc Alloy&Galvanized Steel: Thoroughly clean with Solvent or pressure- wash with Detergent in hot Water. Etch Metal with Metal Conditioner or in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications. C. Stainless Steel: Thoroughly clean with Solvent,or pressure-wash with Detergent in hot Water. D. All other Non-galvanized Ferrous Metal: Remove any Rust, Grease, Oil, or loose Scale. E. Aluminum: Etch with Phosphoric Acid, or approved. F. Wood Doors: Hand-block-sand Faces and Edges to remove any Handling Marks or Raised Grain. G. Other Wood: Clean Soiled Surfaces with Alcohol, or approved. 1. Remove any Mildew by scrubbing with Trisodium Phosphate Solution, treat with Bleach Solution,rinse with clean Water, and allow Surfaces to completely dry before proceeding with remaining work. 2. Hand-block-sand Surfaces to remove any Raised Grain. 3. At Opaque Coatings seal any Knots,Pitch, and Resinous Sapwood before Primer Coat application. 4. Fill any Voids, including set Nail and other Fastener Holes. At any Natural-finished Wood, color Filler to match Wood. 5. Apply Clear Sealer-primer to any smooth-surfaced Fir before applying any scheduled Penetrating Stain. H. Surfaces to receive Polyurethane Enamel: Follow Coating Manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 COATING APPLICATION A. General: 1. Follow Coating Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply initial Coating until Surface Moisture Content is within limitations recommended by Coating Manufacturer. Where in doubt test with Moisture Meter. 3. Except as otherwise specified hereunder, apply Coatings with suitable Brush,Roller,or Spray Equipment recommended by Coating Manufacturer. MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/20121402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p5 of 9 4. Back-roll or brush-in spray-applied Primer Coats to assure Coating penetration. 5. Maintain Brushes, Rollers, and Spray Equipment clean, free from contaminates, and suitably prepared for conditions of use. 6. Do not exceed Coating.Manufacturer's specified Coating Application Rate. 7. Follow Coating Manufacturer's recommended Drying Time between succeeding Coats. 8. Apply Finish Coats smooth,free of Brush Marks, Streaks,Laps, Coating Pile-up,and Skips. 9. Leave any Moldings and Ornaments clean,true to detail,and without excessive Coating build=up in Corners and Depressions. - -- 10. Where Coating abuts other Materials or Colors cut Coating Edge clean, sharp, and with no overlap. 11. In addition to Door Faces, finish Door Tops, Bottoms, and Edges as specified below. If necessary,remove Doors from Frames. 12. Tint each Coat progressively lighter to enable confirmation of Coat quantities. 13. Sand and dust between each Coat to provide anchor for succeeding Coats, and to remove any Defects visible from 36 inch minimum distance. 14. Extend Paint Finish behind Mirrors and other similar Wall-mounted Items. B. Painted Work: 1. Woodwork: Immediately upon Jobsite delivery,prime all Surfaces including Concealed Surfaces. 2. Flat Metalwork, including Doors: Apply Paint with Roller or Airless Spray Equipment only. Do not apply by Brush. 3. If,and when,painting Door Hinges such as on Electrical Panels, open and close Doors several times after painting to prevent Paint bridging across Hinge Knuckles. 4. Roller-applied High-build Coatings: Do not"move" Paint with roller,and stop rolling prior to roller going dry. Remove roller marks by back- rolling,using minimum possible pressure, and rolling in 1 direction only. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before proceeding with remaining Work, request Architect to inspect each first-finished Room, Space,and Item for acceptability. B. Immediately following application,Wet Film Thickness.of Coatings may be tested in compliance with ASTM D-4414. C. After 14 calendar days following application, Coatings may be tested as follows: D. In compliance with ASTM D-4138, Dry Film Paint Thicknesses may be measured using a Mark II Tooke Coating Inspection Gage, or a similar Precision Instrument, designed for measuring Paint Coating Thicknesses. Touch-up Test Surface, which will measure approximately 1 sq. inch per Test. MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/20121402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p6 of 9 E. In compliance with ASTM D-3359 Tape Test, Coating Adhesion may be determined. F. Recoat any Work which fails Test. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Remove any Spills, Splatters, and Stains including those in Paint Storage and Mixing Room. B, Unless otherwise approved, refinish entire Surface where portion of Coating is unacceptable. C. Remove any Waste Materials, including Thinners, from Landscape Planting Beds. D. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. E. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. 3.7 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Post Signs and install Barricades where necessary to protect Completed Work of this Section against damage and discoloration. 3.8 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. General: 1. Prime Coats specified below may be omitted where Factory-applied Shop Coatings have been applied by other Trades. 2. Quantities of Coats specified below are minimum. Finished Work shall be even, uniform, and free from cloudy and mottled appearance. Apply additional (4 minimum)Coats of any Deep or Bright Tone Colors where necessary to hide Substrate. 3. Minimum Dry Film Thicknesses specified below include Prime Coat and Finish Coats combined. B. Surfaces not coated,unless otherwise indicated elsewhere: 1. Items having complete Factory-applied Finish 2. Irrigation System 3. Chain Link Fencing 4. Face Brick 5. Plastic Laminate Covering 6. Joint Sealants, except within exterior cladding and trim 7. Glass 8. Ceramic&Quarry Tile 9. Acoustic Tile,except if specifically noted on drawings or fmish schedule 10. Flooring 11. Roofing 12. Flagpole MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/20121402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p7 of 9 13. Lockers 14. Toilet&Bath Accessories 15. Factory-finished Casework 16. Window Blinds 17. Instructional Labels including Fire-resistance Rating Labels C. Exterior Stainless Steel: 1. Latex Enamel 2. 1 coat Galvanized Primer(MPI Product#134), followed by: 3. 2'coats Semi-gloss(MPI Level#5) Latex Enamel(MPI Product#11) 4. Minimum Dry_Film Thickness: 4.0 mils D. Exterior Galvanized Steel: 1. Latex Enamel 2. 1 coat Galvanized Primer, (MPI Product#134), followed by: 3. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5)Latex Enamel(MPI Product#11) 4.:-Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils E. Exterior Steel Handrails: 1. Polyurethane Enamel 2. 1 coat Epoxy Coating(MPI Product#98), followed by: 3. 2 coats High Gloss(MPI Level#7)Polyurethane Enamel (MPI Product #72) 4. Minimum Dry Film Thicknesses: 5.0 mils F. All Other Exterior Ferrous Metal: 1. Latex Enamel 2. 1 coat Bonding Primer(MPI Product#107), followed by: 3. 2 coats Semi-gloss (MPI Level#5) Latex Enamel(MPI Product#11) 4. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils G. Exterior Woodwork: 1. Alkyd Enamel 2. 1 coat Exterior Alkyd Primer(MPI Product#5), followed by: 3. 2 coats Semi-gloss(MPI Level #5)Alkyd Enamel(MPI Product#94) 4. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils H. Interior Gypsum Board: 1. Latex Enamel 2. 1 coat Gypsum Board Surface Sealer, (applied after Taping but prior to Surface Texturing), followed by: 3. 1 coat Latex Primer(MPI Product#50), followed by: 4. 2 coats Eggshell-gloss (MPI Level#3)'Latex Enamel (MPI Product#52) 5. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils I. Interior Ferrous Metal: 1. Latex Enamel 2. 1 coat Rust Inhibiting Primer(MPI Product#107), followed by: 3. 2 coats Semi-gloss(MPI Level #5)Latex Enamel(MPI Product#54) 4. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils J. Interior Woodwork: MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/20121402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p8 of 9 1. Latex Enamel 2. 1 coat Latex Primer(MPI Product#5), followed by: 3. 2 coats Semi-gloss(MPI Level#5)Latex Enamel(MPI Product#54) 4. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils K. Custom-built Wood Casework: 1. Wood Surfaces exposed when Doors& Drawers are closed: a. Finish same as similar Interior Woodwork. 2. Wood Door& Drawer Backs& Edges: a. Finish same as exposed Cabinet surfaces. 3. Wood Surfaces concealed when Doors& Drawers are closed: a. 2 coats natural color Wood Sealer 4. Casework Backs & Sides against Exterior Walls&Bottoms over on-grade Concrete Slabs: a. 1 thick coat Paint, Varnish, or Sealer. 5. No Surface without some type of Finish. L. Exposed Mechanical& Electrical Work: 1. Exterior Metal, including Work on Roof: a. Finish same as other Exterior Metal of same kind. 2. Electrical Panel Board Doors: a. 1 coat Galvanized Primer(MPI Product#134), followed by: b. 2 coats Semi-gloss(MPI Level#5)Latex Enamel(MPI Product#94) c. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 mils M. Traffic Control Markings: 1. Traffic Paint a. 1 coat Traffic Paint(MPI Product#97) 2. Extent of Work: Paint Parking Stall Lines 4 inches wide, face and top of any painted curbs, and any other Pavement Markings shown on Drawings. 3. Colors: Comply with local jurisdictional or development requirements. If none: a. Parking Stall Lines: White b. Driving Lane Dividers, if any: Yellow c. No Parking Zone Curbs, if any: Yellow d. No Parking Fire Lanes, if any: per local Fire Dept requirements; if nne,than, RED w/labels every 50' with 4"red or black letters e. Pedestrian Crosswalk Lines, if any: Yellow f. Handicapped Parking Symbols, if any: Blue& White g. Traffic Direction Arrows, if any: White 4. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 9.0 mils END OF SECTION MASTER 09900 painting.doc 7/19/2012 1402 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 09900 p9 of 9 SECTION 10190 CUBICLE CURTAINS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide cubicle curtains in common shower and bather rooms. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Gypsum Board Ceilings to receive Cubicle Tracks: Section 09250 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Flame-proof Fabrics when and as required by Building Code. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to Curtain and Track fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to Curtain and Track fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CUBICLE CURTAIN TRACK& ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer: Imperial Fastener, (954)782-7130, or approved. B. Model: IFC-98, Extruded Aluminum with white Enamel Finish C. Mounting: Attached to Gypsum Board Ceiling Supports D. Curtain Hooks: Twin nylon Wheel; for 6"spacing E. Other Required Accessories: End Stops and Openings for Carrier removal. 2.2 CUBICLE CURTAINS A. Manufacturer: Imperial Fastener, (954)782-7130, or approved. B. Brand: Windsor Cloth Cubicle Curtain, Flame-resistant and machine-washable Polyester C. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract from Manufacturer's standard choices. D. Suspension Hook Grommets: Rust-proof Metal, for 6"spacing 2.3 FABRICATION A. Track: 12"min radius;hairline joint seams, and free from burrs MASTER 10190 cubicle curtains.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10190 p l of 2 B. Cubicle Curtains: 1. Fabricate with 50%additional fullness. 2. Hems: 11/2 inch wide, triple thickness, and double lock-stitched. 3. Fabricate Top 18 inches(min.)with Open Mesh permitting air-passage. 4. Fabricate Bottom to stop 12 inches above Finish Floor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Blocking and Surfaces to receive Curtain Track are level,true, secure,and otherwise properly prepared. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 TRACK INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install Track level,to true lines, and in accurate location indicated; anchor securely in place. 3.4 CURTAIN INSTALLATION A. Follow Fabricator's instructions. B. Hang Curtains only after adjacent Painting and Finishing are complete and dry. C. Install Hooks in Track and position to maintain proper spacings. D. Install Curtains on Hooks. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Curtains to provide correct clearances and overlaps. B. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.6 CLEANING &REPAIRING A. Remove debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. B. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. END OF SECTION MASTER 10190 cubicle curtains.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10190 p2 of 2 SECTION 10260 WALL CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide corner guards where shown on drawings or as directed by BSL 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Gypsum Board Walls to receive Guards: Section 09250 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show locations, dimensions,fabrication details, attachment methods, materials - - -- - colors, and other pertinent information. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Manufacturer: Arden, Balco, C/S, IPC, Koroseal,Pawling, or approved. B. Model: Similar to C/S Acrovyn SM-10 Bullnose (Modify for wider than 90° corners, if any.) C. Material: Vinyl Resin with Antibacterial Agent D. Maximum ASTM E-84 Fire Resistance Ratings: E. Flame Spread: 25 F. Fuel Contributed: 0 G. Smoke Developed: 450 H. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. I. Length: Extend from top of adjacent Wall Base for 48 inches. J. Extent of Work: Provide at external corners of Corridor Walls, 2.2 BLOCKING& BACKING MASTER 10260 corner guards.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10260 pl of 2 A. Provide all required where necessary for secure installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Guards are properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure Retainer Assemblies to Structural Backing. C. Install Guards plumb, straight, and true as applicable. D. Provide Caps, matching Guard material, over any exposed Ends. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING&'REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion,or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 10260 corner guards.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10260 p2 of 2 SECTION 10305 FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Cutting &Patching: Section 01045 B. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 C. Wood Mantels: Section 06220 D. Sheetmetal Flashing&Trim: Section 07620 E. Tile Trim: Section 09310 F. Gas Service&Connections: Division 15 G. Electrical Service&Connections: Division 16 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, A. Fireplace System shall include Fire Box, Gas-exhaust Flue Roof Termination, Collars, and Flashings necessary for complete,weatherproof, and properly operating System, plus Accessories specified herein. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 OPERATION&MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit in accordance with Section 01830. 1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with governing requirements of the following: 1. Building Code 2. National Fire Protection Association 1.7 CERTIFICATION A. Prior to installation, submit to Architect evidence of compliance with Regulatory Agency requirements. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS MASTER 10305 fire places.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 010305 p 1 of 4 A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.10 ADVANCE NOTICES A. Notify Architect and Building Official at least 48 hours before required inspections. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIREPLACES A. Manufacturer: Heatilator, Heat-N-Glo, Lenox, Majestic, or.approved. B. Type: Direcrt Vent, Gas-fired with remote Wall-mounted Ignition&variable speed Air-circulation Control Switches located where shown on Drawings C. Style: Front-opening&Floor-mounted D. Material: Steel E. Finish: 1. Fireplace: Manufacturer's standard heat-proof matte-gloss Black Enamel 2. Trim: Polished Brass 2.2 REQUIRED ACCESSORIES A. Heat-resistant fixed Glass Face Panel B. Protective Heat Shield C. Non-combustible Ceramic Log-set with Burning Embers sized to fit Fire Box 2.3 GAS-VENT FLUE A. Manufacturer&Brand: Contractor's choice B. Size&Type: Satisfy conditions of use and applicable Regulatory Agency requirements. C. Terminal Cap: Manufacturer's standard D. Required Accessories: Provide Bends, Offsets, Transitions, Collars,Flashings, Joint Bands, Supports, Firestops, and other Items necessary for proper, efficient, gas-tight,weather-tight,and safe operation. 2.4 OUTSIDE COMBUSTION AIR SYSTEM A. Manufacturer&Model: Contractor's choice B. Type: Satisfy conditions of use. C. Required Accessories: MASTER 10305 fire places.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 010305 p2 of 4 1. Weatherproof Air-intake Louvers with integral Bird Screen 2. Necessary Air Ducts, 2.5 SEALANT A. Manufacturer&Brand: GE RTV 103, or approved. B. Type: Non-combustible PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Structure and Surfaces to receive Fireplace System are complete, secure, accurately sized and located,plumb, level, true, dry, with required clearances, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturers'instructions. B. Secure System plumb, level, square, and true as applicable. C. Do not block Air Entries required to cool System. D. Do not contact Fireplace with Vapor Barriers, Insulation, or Combustible Materials. E. Maximum Unsupported Vertical Flue Length: Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. F. Do not draw Outside Air from Attic or location adjacent to Exhaust Air Outlets. G. Make Utility connections. H. Demonstrate to Architect and Regulatory Agency Inspectors that Gas Vent Flue joints and Fireplace connections are properly seated and secured before enclosing Chimney Chase. 3.4 JOINT SEALING A. Provide Sealant in Joints subject to air, gas, or water infiltration. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. MASTER 10305 fire places.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 010305 p3 of 4 3.6 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK A. Protect System against displacement and intrusion by foreign Matter. 3.7 PRODUCT CLEANING &REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 10305 fire places.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 010305 p4 of 4 SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide flagpole and flags as shown on drawings 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Earthwork: Section 02200 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate Flagpole, Base,and Anchors to resist without damage at least 100 mph Wind Velocity,un-flagged. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 0.1330. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S OPERATING&MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit Manufacturer's Instructions to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Support to prevent bending. 1.7 MINIMUM AIR&GROUND TEMPERATURE A. During Foundation Concrete Placement and for 7 days thereafter: 32°F PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLAGPOLE A. Manufacturer: Acme/Lingo,American,Anglim, Baartol, Metal Arts, Morgan Francis,Northwest, or approved. B. Type: Aluminum,Tapered C. Exposed Height above Ground: 30 ft. D. Buried Depth: as recommended by manufacturer E. Butt Diameter: Manufacturer's standard for Pole size F. Mounting Method: Manufacturer's standard ground-set type with Galvanized Steel Tube, Steel Base Plate, Steel Lightning Ground Spike, Wedges,and other Accessories necessary for complete installation. 2.2 FITTINGS MASTER 10350 flag pole.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11./14 10350 p1 of 2 A. Finial: Type: Flush-seam Ball,Aluminum with Gold Anodic finish B. Truck Assembly: Non-fouling and revolving 2.3 OPERATION ACCESSORIES A. Type: Internal Halyard System B. Halyard: Stainless Steel braided Aircraft Cable C. Operator: Removable:Crank-operated Stainless Steel Winch concealed within Pole behind flush, hinged, lockable,Access Door. Equip Operator with Locking Device which allows Flag to be displayed at any height on Pole. D. Truck Assembly: Revolving,non-fouling, and concealed. E. Halyard Counterweight: Manufacturer's standard assuring vertical descent of Flag during all weather conditions,excluding hurricane force winds. 2.4 FLAGS A. (1)each, 5'x8', Nylon flag of USA and state flag of project location PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Flagpole are properly prepared. B. Prior to starting work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Set Mounting Tube in 2500 psi Concrete as specified in Section 03300. C. Set Flagpole plumb into Mounting Tube and secure in position with Wedges and packed, dry Sand. D. Provide positive Lightning Ground. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including,Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 10350 flag pole.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10350 p2 of 2 SECTION 10500 LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide lockers in employee/staff room as shown on drawings B. Locker Padlocks furnished by Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show dimensions, details of construction,joining of Equipment to adjacent Construction, Color, and other pertinent Items. 1.3 COLOR SAMPLES A. Prior to ordering and in accordance with Section 01330, submit 2 Samples of Manufacturer's Standard Colors for Interior Designer's selection. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Deliver in Manufacturer's Protective Container with legible, identifying labels intact. B. Store flat and above ground. C. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed herein are approved for use provided their Material matches selected Color to Architect's satisfaction at no additional cost to Owner. 2.2 STANDARD STEEL LOCKERS A. Manufacturer: Interior, List, Lyon,Penco,Republic, Salsbury, or approved. B. Double tier Box Lockers, 16 ga Doors, frames and bottoms, 20 ga tops C. Size 12"x12"x15" MASTER 10500 lockers.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01110 pl of 2 D. Finish : factory enamel;color as selected by BSL E. Number Plates 2.3 HARDWARE A. Locker Lock Type: Hasp for Padlock,with Protective Armor Plate to prevent damage to Locker Paint by Padlock. B. Rubber Cushions to provide quiet Door operation. C. All Other: Manufacturer's standard type for conditions of use;provide all required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that surfaces to receive Work of this Section are solid,true, square, plumb, accurately sized and located, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb,true,rattle-free, and with uniform joints. C. Fasten securely together and to adjacent Construction. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 10500 lockers.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 01110 p2 of 2 SECTION 10800 RESIDENTIAL UNITS TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide unit toilet accessories as shown in drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Mirrors, except those on Medicine Cabinets: Section 08800 B. Public Toilet Room Accessories: Section 10810 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Accessories shall comply with applicable requirements of: B. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) C. Building Code Section 1109.10 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Do not remove Protective Covers until final Project clean-up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Verify types and thicknesses of Wall Construction. Provide all required Fasteners, Clamps,Adapters, etc. necessary for conditions encountered. 2.2 MIRRORS A. 24"x36" w/polished edges and mounting clips 2.3 TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS A. Manufacturer&Model: CSI Donner 1576-SS/RC2, or approved. B. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Toilet. 2.4 TOWEL RINGS A. Manufacturer&Model: #01-9404. B. Chrome, 6"d 2.5 HANDICAPPED-USER GRAB BARS A. Manufacturer&Model: ASI 3801, or approved. B. Material: Stainless Steel MASTER 10800 unit tit accessories.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10800 p1 of 3 C. Size, location, and extents shown and noted on unit plan drawings. 2.6 TOWEL RINGS A. Manufacturer&Model: CSI Donner P5860-CH, or approved. B. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. 2.7 SHOWER&BATHTUB CURTAIN RODS A. Manufacturer&Model: CSI Donner 54-5CH, or approved. B._ _Material: Stainless_Steel C. Length: Fit Opening D. Required Accessories: E. Rod Mounting Flanges F. Snap Hooks spaced at 6 inch centers. G. Extent of Work: Provide 1 at each Shower&Bathtub 2.8 FASTENERS A. Non-corrosive type recommended by Accessory Manufacturer. 2.9 BLOCKING& BACKING A. Provide all necessary. B. Accessories are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. C. Verify location,type, and quantity with Owner prior to proceeding with Work. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Units with welded Corners, one-piece seamless exposed Flanges, and with no open Miters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed until Blocking and Surfaces to receive Accessories are smooth, clean, dry, square, sound, accurately sized and located,painted, and otherwise properly prepared. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION MASTER 10800 unit tlt accessories.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10800 p2 of 3 A. If Mounting Locations are not specified herein,or shown on Drawings, locate where directed by Architect. B. Follow Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Mount plumb,level,true, and secure. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 10800 unit tit accessories.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10800 p3 of 3 SECTION 10810 PUBLIC TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide unit toilet accessories as shown in drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Residential Unit Toilet&Bath Accessories: Section 10800 - L3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.4- REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS - - A. Accessories shall comply with applicable requirements of: B. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) C. Building Code Section 1109.10 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Do not remove Protective Covers until final Project clean-up. C. Deliver Accessory Keys to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Prior to ordering Products: B. Verify type of Paper to be used by Owner. C. Verify types and thicknesses of Wall Construction. Provide all required Fasteners, Clamps,Adapters, etc. necessary for conditions encountered. 2.2 MIRRORS A. 24"x36", Bobrick B-165 or approved, 2.3 TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick 265, or approved. B. Type: Double Roll C. Material: Stainless Steel D. Mounting: Surface E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Toilet. MASTER 10810 public tit accessories.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10810 pl of 3 2.4 COMBINATION PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS&WASTE DISPOSALS A. Provided by owner; installed by Contractor B. Manufacturer&Model: Georgia Pacific GP# 59471' nMotion #59466 C. Type: Equip to dispense Single Roll paper towel D. Material: Stainless Steel E. Mounting: Semi-recessed F. Extent of Work: Provide 1 in each Toilet Room. 2.5 TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSERS A. Manufacturer&Model: Bobrick B-221, or approved. B. Type: Flat Sheet C. Material: Stainless Steel D. Mounting: Surface E. Extent of Work: Provide 1 adjacent to each Toilet. 2.6 TOILET COMPARTMENT GRAB BARS A. Manufacturer&Model: ASI 3801, or approved. B. Material: Stainless Steel C. Sizes, clearances, and extents shown on drawings 2.7 FASTENERS A. Non-corrosive type recommended by Accessory Manufacturer. 2.8 BLOCKING& BACKING A. Provide all necessary. B. Accessories are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. C. Verify location,type, and quantity with Owner prior to proceeding with Work. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Units with welded Corners,one-piece seamless exposed Flanges, and with no open Miters. B. Key Locked Units alike. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed until Blocking and Surfaces to receive Accessories are smooth, clean, dry, square, sound, accurately sized and located,painted, and otherwise properly prepared. MASTER 10810 public tlt accessories.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10810 p2 of 3 B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. If Mounting Locations are not specified herein, or shown on Drawings, locate where directed by Architect. B. Follow Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Mount plumb,level,true, and secure. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS --A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 10810 public fit accessories.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10810 p3 of 3 SECTION 10990 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide miscellaneous specialties as shown on drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS 1.3 ROOF ACCESSORIES: SECTION 07720 A. Door Hardware: Section 08710 B. Field Painting: Section 09900 C. Cubicle Curtain Tracks: Section 10190 D. Wall Corner Guards: Section 10260 E. Manufactured Metal Fireplaces: Section 10305 F. Flagpole: Section 10350 G. Lockers: Section 10500 H. Toilet&Bath Accessories: Sections 10800& 10810 I. Appliances: Section 11452 J. Bather Equipment: Section 11700 K. Window Blinds: Section 12510 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data showing layout, dimensions, details of construction, methods of joining to other Work,required clearances, finishes,accessories, and other pertinent items. 1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 2. Entry Mats 3. Mail Boxes 4. Bicycle Racks 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened, protective wrapping with original,legible label intact. 1.6 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Employed by or acceptable to Manufacturer of Specialty being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS MASTER 10990 misc specialties.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10990 p1 of 6 2.1 ENTRY MATS A. Manufacturer: Cactus Mat, Flexco Flex-Tuft, Futurus,US Rubber Dura-Tile, or approved. B. Mounting Method: Recessed C. Thickness: 3/8 inch D. Pattern: Match Futurus Basic Parquet E. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices F. Frame: aluminum angle 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Manufacturer: .LL, Industries, Larsen's,Modern Metal Products, Potter- Roemer, or approved. B. Model: Similar to J.L. Industries 1017-F10 C. Minimum ASTM E-814 Fire-resistive Construction: 1 hour D. Size: Accommodate Fire Extinguishers specified below E. Mounting: Semi-recessed and flat trimmed F. Door&Frame Material: Prime-coated Steel G. Door Glazing: Full double-strength Glass H. Cylinder Lock: Not required I. Cabinet Interior: Black enamel J. Extinguisher Support: Manufacturer's standard Brackets to receive Fire Extinguishers specified below K. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. 23 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturer: Contractor's choice. B. Type: 1. In Commercial Kitchen: OSHA-approved and UL-rated 2A:1BCK 2. Elsewhere: OSHA-approved and UL-rated for type A, B, & C fires C. Color: Red D. Size: 5 lb. E. Fill and service Extinguishers prior to Project Substantial Completion. Attach Certificate of Service, including date,to each Extinguisher. F. Extent of Work: Provide in Elevator Machine Room and in each Fire Extinguisher Cabinet specified above. 2.4 WIRE SHELVING MASTER 10990 misc specialties.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10990 p2 of 6 A. Manufacturer&Brand: Closetmaid Total Slide, or approved. B. Mounting Heights above Finish Floor,where located on Drawings: 2.5 VEHICLE PARKING BUMPERS A. Material: Precast Concrete B. Length: 6 ft. 2.6 WALL SAFES A. Manufacturer: Regal Safe Corp., (888) 331-6988, or approved. B. Model: W1 C. Face Size: 15-1/4 x 14-3/8 inches D. Depth: 6 inches E. Required Accessories: F. ADA-compliant Keyboard G. Manual Key-override H. LED Display I. Printable Interrogation J. Finish: K. Material: Electrostatic-applied Powder Coat Enamel L. Color: Selected by Interior Designer after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices M. Extent of Work: Provide within ILF one and two bedroom Walk-in Closets. 2.7 VEHICLE PARKING CONTROL SIGNS A. Comply with local jurisdictional requirements. Where none specified,provide the following: B. 12"x18" C. Material: Sheet Steel or Aluminum D. Letter Height: 3/4 inch E. Colors: White Letters on Blue background or vice versa F. Required Markings: G. Wording: Comply with state and federal requirements. H. Logo: International Symbol of Access for Handicapped Users I. At Parking Stalls adjacent to 8 ft. wide Aisles, if any: Provide 3 inch high "VAN-ACCESSIBLE" Sign mounted directly below other Sign. J. Mounting Heights above adjacent Walkway Surface to Sign Bottom: K. If and where mounted on Post: 84 inches MASTER 10990 misc specialties.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10990 p3 of 6 L. If and where mounted on Wall: 48 inches. M. Mounting Methods: N. Where so indicated on Drawings: Wall-mount • O. Elsewhere: Mount on Galvanized Steel Support Post P. Extent of Work: Provide 1 Sign centered on each Vehicle Parking Stall reserved for Disabled Users. 2.8 MAIL BOXES A. Manufacturer: Postal Products Unlimited, or approved. B. Model: 4C Horizontal Mailboxes C. Type: Front-loading complying with US Postal Service requirements D. Boxes Quantity: per drawings E. Keying: 5-pin Cylinder for each Box Door F. Material: Aluminum G. Finish: Gold H. Required Features: I. Each Box engraved with individual Unit Numbers J. Out-going Mail Slot engraved with"U.S.MAIL" K. Key Cabinet L. Mounting: Recessed M. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. 2.9 BICYCLE RACKS A. Manufacturer: Life Rax; 1009 S.W. Rivington Dr.;,Portland, OR 97201; (503) 223-8120; or approved. B. Model: The Wave C. Material: Galvanized Steel D. Finish: E. Material: Powder-coated Enamel F. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices G. Mounting Method: Flange H. Bicycle Capacity per Rack: 5 I. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. 2.10 SHOP PAINTING MASTER 10990 misc specialties:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10990 p4 of 6 A. Unless herein specified otherwise, factory-apply one coat Rust inhibiting Primer as specified in Section 09900 to Ferrous Metal surfaces after fabrication,but before installation. B. Substitute complete Factory-Finish where so specified herein. 2.11 BLOCKING& BACKING A. Provide where necessary. B. Specialties are shown on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. Verify location, type, and extent of Work before installing Blocking and Backing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Blocking, Backing, and Surfaces to receive Specialties are properly prepared, sized, and located. B. Prior to starting Work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect other materials against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: B. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. C. Secure Specialties plumb, level, square,and true as applicable. D. Entry Mats: E. Recess into Frame. F. Set Mat.top flush with adjacent surface. G. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: H. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,mount Cabinet so that Extinguisher top is 48 inches above Floor. I. Fire Extinguishers: J. Mount in Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. K. Vehicle Parking Bumpers: L. Secure to Pavement with grouted Steel Dowels and Epoxy Cement. M. Maintain Scuppers open for free Water passage. N. boxes: MASTER 10990 misc specialties.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10990 p5 of 6 O. Follow governing U.S. Postal Service regulations. P. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, install flush with adjacent surfaces. Q. Vehicle Parking Control.Signs: R. Install Posts plumb and set 36 inches deep into Concrete Footing. 3.4 BICYCLE RACKS: A. Anchor to adjacent construction as recommended by Manufacturer. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.6 CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. B. Including Work of other Sections, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. C. Leave installation clean and defect-free. END OF SECTION MASTER 10990 misc specialties.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 10990 p6 of 6 SECTION 11400 COMMERCIAL KITCHEN EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Anchor Bolts and necessary Setting Templates. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Mechanical Piping, Electrical Conduit& Wiring, and connections to Items specified herein: Division 15&16, respectively. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Prior to Equipment installation, Owner will supply for Contractor's use, detailed information showing Equipment dimensions,required clearances, methods of joining Equipment to other Work, utility locations, and other pertinent information. 1.6 OPERATING& MAINTENANCE DATA A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.7 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS 1.8 EMPLOYED BY OR ACCEPTABLE TO EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER. 1.9 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the following Agencies: B. Health Department having jurisidiction C. National Sanitary Foundation D. Underwriters Laboratories 1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. See requirements specified in Section 01110. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS MASTER 11400 commerical kitchen equip.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11400 pl of 3 A. Verify prior to installing Equipment. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify adjacent Construction as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to installing Equipment. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Work specified herein subject to warranty terms specified in General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. As listed on K-sheets 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment will be delivered complete with all necessary Accessories including, but not limited to,the following: B. Anchor Bolts C. Utility Connection Devices 2.3 BLOCKING& BACKING A. Provide where necessary. B. Equipment shown on Drawings is located for Contractor's convenience. Before installing Blocking and Backing,verify Equipment type, location, and extent of Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Equipment are properly prepared. B. Verify that Mechanical and Electrical Utilities are accurately installed. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Position plumb, level, square, straight, and true as applicable. C. Securely anchor to adjacent Construction. MASTER 11400 commerical kitchen equip.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11400 p2 of 3 D. Make all Utility connections. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of - - this Section. - - -B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 11400 commerical kitchen equip.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11400 p3 of 3 SECTION 11452 APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Plumbing Piping for Appliances: Division 15 B. Electrical Conduit& Wiring for Appliances: Division 16 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show dimensions,required clearances,methods of joining to other Work, Utility locations, and other pertinent information. C. Manufacturer's Printed Data may be submitted provided required information is included. 1.5 OPERATING&MAINTENANCE DATA A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Appliances must be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, or approved. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,& HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to ordering Appliances. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify adjacent Construction as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to ordering Appliances. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Work specified herein subject to warranty terms specified in Contract Conditions. MASTER 11452 appliances.doe 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11452 p l of 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IN ALF RESIDENTIAL UNITS A. Refrigerator: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or.approved. 2. Model: W5TXEWFWQ, 3. Type: Frost Free 4. Finish: Enamel 5. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 6. Minimum Refrigerator Capacity: 18 cu. ft. B. Microwave Oven: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or approved. 2. Model: WMC1070XQ 3. Minimum Capacity: 0.7 cu. ft. 4. Wattage: 600 5. Finish: Enamel 6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 2.2 IN ILF RESIDENTIAL UNITS A. Refrigerator: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or approved. 2. Model: W5TXEWFWQ 3. Type: Frost Free 4. Finish: Enamel 5. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 6. Minimum Refrigerator Capacity: 18 cu. ft. 7. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. B. Range: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or approved. 2. Model: WFE115LXQ, self-cleaning, open-coil, with 4-prong Range Cord 3. Type: Free-standing,ADA 4. Finish: Enamel 5. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 6. Power Source: Electricity 7. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings. C. Microwave Oven: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or approved. 2. Model: WMH 1163XVQ 3. Minimum Capacity: 1.6 cu. ft. 4. Wattage: 1000 5. Finish: Enamel MASTER 11452 appliances.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11452 p2 of 5 6. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. D. Dishwasher 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or approved. 2. Model: GU3100XTVQ 3. ADA model in ADA units 2.3 IN COMMONS LAUNDRY ROOMS A. Laundry Washer: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool, or approved. 2. Model: WFW9050XW Front-loading, with pedestal 3. Finish: Enamel 4. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's_ standard choices. B. Laundry Dryer: 1. Manufacturer: GE, or approved. 2. Model: WD9050 XWwith Pedestal, Cord&Vent Kit 3. Power Source: Gas 4. Finish: Enamel 5. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 2.4 IN HOSPITALITY AREA A. Refrigerator: 1. Manufacturer: GE, or approved. 2. Model: GSS25LSWSS Side-by-side Refer with Ice-maker and Water Line Kit 3. Type: Frost Free 4. Finish: Stainless Steel 5. Minimum Refrigerator Capacity: 25 cu. ft. 2.5 IN STAFF LOUNGE A. Refrigerator: 1. Manufacturer: GE, or approved. 2. Model: WRT138TFYW B. Microwave Oven: 1. Manufacturer: GE, or approved. 2. Model: JEB1860SMSS 3. Minimum Capacity: 1.8 cu. ft. 4. Finish: STAINLESS 5. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 2.6 IN MEDICAL ROOM MASTER 11452 appliances.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11452 p3 of 5 A. Refrigerator: 1. Manufacturer: GE, or approved. 2. Model: GMRO4AAWW Compact 3. Type: Frost Free 4. Finish: Stainless Steel 5. Minimum Refrigerator Capacity: 6 cu. ft. 2.7 IN ACTIVITIES/CRAFTS • A. Refrigerator: 1. Manufacturer: GE, or approved. 2. Model: GSS25LSWSS Side-by-side Refer with Ice-maker and Water Line Kit 3. Type: Frost Free 4. Finish: Stainless Steel 5. Minimum Refrigerator Capacity: 25 cu. ft. B. Range: 1. Manufacturer: Whirlpool,or approved. 2. Model: WFEl 15LXQ, self-cleaning,open-coil, with 4-prong Range Cord 3. Type: Free-standing,ADA 4. Finish: Enamel 5. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 6. Power Source: Electricity 7. Extent of Work: Provide where shown on Drawings 2.8 REQUIRED ACCESSORIES A. Provide Appliances complete with all necessary Accessories including,but not limited to, the following: B. Anchor Bolts C. Utility Connection Devices 2.9 BLOCKING& BACKING A. Provide where necessary. B. Appliances are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience. Before installing Blocking and Backing,verify exact Appliance location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Appliances are properly located, sized, and prepared. B. Verify that Utilities are accurately installed. MASTER 11452 appliances.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11452 p4 of 5 C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure Appliances plumb, level, square, straight, and true as applicable. C. Make all Utility connections. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 11452 appliances.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11452 p5 of 5 SECTION 11700 BATHER EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Install Owner furnished bather 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Anchor Bolts and necessary Setting Templates. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Mechanical Piping and connections to Items specified herein: Division 15 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Show dimensions,required clearances,methods of joining to other Work, utility locations, and other pertinent information. C. Manufacturer's Printed Data may be substituted provided required information is included. 1.5 OPERATING& MAINTENANCE DATA A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.6 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Employed by or acceptable to Equipment Manufacturer. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to ordering Equipment. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify adjacent Construction as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to ordering Equipment. . 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Work specified herein subject to warranty terms specified in General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BATHER MASTER.11700 bather.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 11700 p1 of 2 A. Manufacturer: Rane, 888-880-7373 B. Brand: Mastercare C. Model: RH4 D. Required Features: Variable-speed Bath Aire, Power Door, Side Skirts, Thermoscopic Plumbing Package, Shower Base Backflow Device, &Hot& Cold Water Lines. 2.2 BLOCKING&BACKING A. Provide where necessary. B. Equipment shown on Drawings is located for Contractor's convenience. Before installing Blocking and Backing,verify Equipment type, location, and extent of Work. -- - -PART - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Surfaces to receive Equipment are properly prepared. B. Verify that Mechanical Utilities are accurately installed. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions. B. Position plumb, level, square,straight,and true as applicable. C. Securely anchor to adjacent Construction. D. Make all Utility connections. 3.4 PRODUCT CLEANING& REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed,Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. 3.5 OPERATING& MAINTENANCE DEMONSTRATIONS . A. In accordance with Section 01830, personally instruct Owner's Representative in proper operation and maintenance methods. END OF SECTION MASTER 11700 bather.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/1.4 11700 p2 of 2 SECTION 12510 WINDOW BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Work of this,Section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this Specification and accompanying Drawings. 1.2 EXTENT OF WORK A. Provide Blinds over interior face of all Exterior Windows, Relites, and Doors, except at Building Entries. B. Provide each Blind as complete Unit produced by one Manufacturer, including all necessary Hardware, Mounting Devices, Accessory Items, and Fasteners. 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS A. Fabricate Blinds in compliance with Commercial Item Description Document 1029 published by American Window Covering Manufacturers Association. B. Copies of Document can be obtained from Association at 355 Lexington Ave.; New York,NY 10017; (212)661-5300. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration. B. Deliver in Manufacturer's original,unopened,undamaged Packages with legible Labels intact. C. Identify Manufacturer,brand name, finish, color, and installation location on each Package. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially,notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.7 HORIZONTAL SLAT VENETIAN BLINDS A. Manufacturer&Model: Levelor Riviera DustGuard, or approved. Similar Units by Bali-Graber&Hunter-Douglas are approved. B. Slats: C. Material: Spring tempered Aluminum MASTER 12510 window treatments.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 12510 pl of 3 D. Width: 1 inch E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard F. Color: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices G. Head Rail: H. Material: Steel I. Bottom Rail; J. Material: Steel reinforced to prevent twist or sag. K. Weight: Sufficient to lower Blind evenly and in alignment L. Shape: Manufacturer's standard M. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard Metal or Plastic N. Finish&Color: Match Slat Interior Face O. Ladder Color: Match Head Rail P. Titter: Q. Type: Manufacturer's standard, disengaging, enclosed, lubricated mechanism to provide full 180°operation, and hold Blinds in any set angle. R. Operation: Wand-type, length to suit installation. S. Cords: T. Type: Manufacturer's standard; fit with self-aligning Position Equalizers and Tassels secured to Cord Ends. U. Color: Match Slat Interior Face V. Minimum Breaking Strength: 200 lbs. W. Cords replaceable without removing Titter X. Cord Locks: Y. Type: Manufacturer's standard; automatically capable of holding Blind in any vertical position. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FASTENERS A. Oval-head,non-corrosive Screws. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Units to completely fill Opening from Jamb to Jamb and Head to Sill. B. Align any intermediate Unit ends with vertical Window Mullions or Jambs. C. Space Supporting Tapes no less than 3-1/2 inches not more than 7 inches from Slat ends,and no more than 36 inches apart between. MASTER 12510 window treatments.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 12510 p2 of 3 D. Overlap Slats when fully closed to exclude Light. E. At Blinds installed on Doors: F. Secure Blind bottoms to Door with Hooks to prevent Blinds swaying while Doors are in motion. G. Cut-out Slats where necessary to provide Door-operating Hardware access. H. Locate Controls for easy operation. Notify Architect before fabrication if indicated locations can be improved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify that Work Surfaces are accurately located and secure. B. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. C. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION • 3.4 FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. A. Do necessary cutting,tapping, and drilling. B. Provide necessary clearance to permit unencumbered Sash Hardware and Door Hardware operation. C. Protect Metal Parts in contact with Dissimilar Materials against galvanic corrosion. D. Securely attach Units plumb, square, and true with Brackets, Clips, and Fasteners. 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Units to provide correct clearances and overlaps. B. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING &REPAIRING A. Including Work of other Trades,clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. B. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion,or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 12510 window treatments.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 12510 p3 of 3 SECTION 14200 HOLE LESS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide holeless, hydraulic elevators as shown on drawings 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Concrete Hoistway Pit& Buffer Foundation: Section 03300 B. Steel Angle Sill Supports& Steel Ladder: Section 05500 C. Gypsum Board Hoistway: Section 09250 D. Pit Floor Drain, Hoistway, &Machine Room Ventilation: Division 15 E. Electrical Service to Feed& Disconnect Switches, Signal System, Car Lighting, Ventilation Fan,Pit Outlets, Telephone Equipment, Public Address Equipment, and for erection, testing, & adjusting: Division 16 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rock: Material that requires a Core Drill rather than an Auger for removal. B. Unstable Soil: Material that requires a Caisson Casing to prevent Jack Hole sloughing. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Include Hoistway and Machine Room Plans; Hoistway Sections; Entrance and Car Details; Seismic, Static, and Dynamic Loads; Equipment locations; required Clearances; related Work; and Installation data. C. Submit Pictures showing Entrances, Car Interior, Signal Devices, Buttons, Lights, and Graphics. 1.6 SAMPLES A. Submit prior to fabrication and in accordance with Section 01330. B. Include two 12x12 inch Samples of Plastic Laminate Wall Covering. 1.7 MAINTENANCE& OPERATION DATA A. In accordance with Section 01830, submit to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Manual. 1.8 TEST REPORTS MASTER 14200 holeless elevators.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 14200 p1 of 7 A. Submit 2 copies of Inspection and Test Reports, including written certification that Elevator Equipment meets speed, capacity,and other requirements of these Specifications. 1.9 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Approved by Elevator Manufacturer. B. Show evidence that Installer has qualified Workers,Equipment, and adequate Stock to complete Work and perform Maintenance Service without unreasonable loss of time in reaching Job Site. 1.10 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to National Electric Code ANSI-C-1, ASME Safety Code-A17.1 and other governing State and Local Codes. B. Fabricate and install Elevator System in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)requirements. C. Provide all Code-required Items, whether or not shown or specified. Charges to Owner for additional Code-required improvements to Equipment, Hoistway, Equipment Rooms, Electrical Service, Safety Items, etc., will be authorized only if Architect has been informed about deficiencies at least 5 Working Days prior to Bid opening. D. Prior to final Project acceptance obtain,pay for, and deliver to Architect for forwarding to Owner, 1 year State Elevator Operation Permit. 1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,&HANDLING A. Deliver Components in time to meet Construction Schedule. B. Protect against damage and discoloration. 1.12 USE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Temporary Facilities, Section 01500, for conditions affecting Elevator use during construction period. 1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify prior to fabrication. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication. 1.14 MAINTENANCE& SERVICE A. Furnish monthly Maintenance and 24-hour Emergency Call-back Service for 12 months after Project Substantial Completion date, including: B. All necessary Adjustments, Lubrication, Cleaning, Supplies,and Parts to keep Equipment in perfect working order, excepting only such Work made MASTER 14200 holeless elevators:doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 14200 p2 of 7 necessary by misuse or negligence which, in Architect's opinion, are not caused by Contractor. C. Maintenance Service must be performed by Trained Employees of Elevator Manufacturer, and shall not be transferred or reassigned. D. Notify Owner at least 2 months prior to expiration of Maintenance Agreement. E. In accordance with Section 01830, submit written Operating and Maintenance Instructions to General Contractor for inclusion in Owner's Operating& Maintenance Manual. Include the following: F. If and where proprietary Control Technology is employed, include complete and detailed instructions on Controls setup, adjustment, testing, and operations. G. If Sub-vendors' Systems, Assemblies, Components,or Parts are used, identify each Item, and provide complete identification, including Vendors' identity and Part Numbers. H. If and where Proprietary Test Equipment or Diagnostic Tools are required to maintain, adjust, or repair Elevator, include complete descriptive information on function, interface,and operation of Equipment and Tools. I. Include complete list of Operational Codes, Readouts, and Passwords necessary to access Elevator Systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes,Bars, &Plates: B. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-36 C. Sheet Steel: D. Manufacturing Standard: A-366 E. Stainless Steel: F. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-167 G. Type: 302 H. Finish, unless otherwise specified elsewhere: No. 4 2.2 PAINT: A. Finish Coats: Epoxy Enamel as specified in Section 09900 B. Colors: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. C. Plastic Laminate: D. Manufacturing Standard: NEMA LD-1 E. Type: 1 MASTER 14200 holeless elevators.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 14200 p3 of 7 F. Thickness: 0.05 inches G. Color& Pattern: Selected by Architect after Contract award from Manufacturer's standard choices. 2.3 ELEVATORS A. Manufacturer: Otis, Thyssen Krupp, or approved. B. Model: holeless, equal to TK Endura 35 a C. Prohibited Parts& Equipment: Where not freely available to 3`d parties on the open market. D. Description and Capacities: 1. Type: Automatic, Hydraulic using Biodegradable Oil 2. See drawings for Quantity,Travel, Landings, Openings, and total Rise 3. Lifting Capacity, in addition.to Car&Appurtenances Weight:_3500 lbs. 4. Upward Speed Under Full Contract Load: 150 fpm,plus or minus 5% 5. Platform Size: See Drawings—sized to accommodate stretcher size as required by IBC for 4 story buildings E. Pump Base: Provide with Sound &Vibration Isolator Supports. F. Pump Housing: Removable and with Sound-absorbing Lining G. Control: Simplex Selective Collective as follows: 1. Start Car upon momentary pressure on one or more Buttons, other than for Landing at which Car is standing. Stop Car at Landings for which Calls are registered. Make stops in order in which Landings are reached, regardless of sequence in which Buttons are pressed. 2. If DOWN Buttons are pressed while Car is traveling upward(or vice versa), do not stop Car at these Landings,but allow Calls to remain registered and to be answered on next reverse trip. 3. Car Lighting Fixtures: 6 Recessed Incandescent Down-lights equipped with Antiglare Baffles H. Emergency Car Lighting: 1. Type: Two 6-watt or larger Incandescent Lamps 2. Power: Self-recharging Battery capable of continuously operating Emergency Lights for at least 4 hours and Elevator Alarm Bell for at least 1 hour 3. Operation: Automatically activate within 5 seconds of normal Power outage 4. Required Accessory: Readily accessible Test Switch I. Traveling Cable Covers: Flame-resistant and Moisture-resistant J. Buffers: Spring type K. Required Leveling: To within 3/8 inch of Floors under any loading without over-running and returning to Floor L. Car Materials: MASTER 14200 holeless elevators.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 14200 p4 of 7 1. Shell: 16 ga. Furniture Steel with Sound Deadening applied to all Exterior Surfaces. 2. Ceiling: Enameled Steel 3. Front Wall: Stainless Steel 4. Side&Rear Walls: Removable Plastic Laminate Panels 5. Base: Recessed,black, Enameled Steel with concealed Ventilation Cutouts. 6. Flooring: Carpet specified in Section 09680 7. Door Frames: Painted enamel 8. Doors: Painted Enamel _ M. Required Accessories: 1. 11/2 inch diameter Stainless Steel Handrails installed on Side and Rear Walls. Mount 32 inches from Railing top to Floor, and space 11/2 inches away from Wall 2. Ceiling-mounted Air Exhaust Fan 3. Ceiling-mounted Emergency Escape Hatch 4. Emergency hands-free Telephone System. 5. Speakers with Traveling Cable connected with Building Public Address System. 6. Trouble Light and Electric Power Outlet located on each Car Roof. 7. Elevator License Certificate Frame mounted where visible in each Car. 8. Stainless Steel Pad Hooks on all Car Walls. 9. 1-set of Wall-protection Pads with hemmed Cut-out Openings at Car Control Panels. Where directed by Owner's Representative,provide additional set of Hooks for permanent Pad Storage. N. Hoistway Entrance Materials: 1. Door Frames: Painted Enamel 2. Doors: Painted Enamel O. Door Operators: Powered, automatic, and synchronized to operate Car and Hoistway Doors simultaneously. P. Door-safety Motion Detectors: 2-dimensional Multi-beam Array projecting across Door opening,and 3-dimensional Triangular Infrared Multi-beam Array projecting into Hoistway Area Zone,both to automatically retract Doors when Doorway is occupied or obstructed. Q. Door Tracks: Replaceable R. Required Signals: 1. Vandal-proof Hallway Car-call Buttons (Wall Plate shall match finish of adjacent Door Hardware specified in Section 08710.) 2. Car Control Panel: a. Material: Stainless Steel b. Mounting: Flush with adjacent Wall Surface c. Contain the following: d. Car-send Buttons for each Landing served e. Other Buttons and Switches required for specified operations MASTER 14200 holeless elevators.doe 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 14200 p5 of 7 3. Car Travel-direction Arrows: Locate where visible from Hallway when Car Doors are open. 4. Hallway Car-arrival Gongs: Up: 1 gong; Down: 2 gongs 5. Downward Travel: 2 gongs S. Car position Indicators :Waiting Passenger Indicators showing location and direction.Car T. Required Features: 1. Car-stall Protective Circuit to return Car to Main Terminal Landing and open Doors, if Car does not reach designated Landing. Circuit shall prevent Car operation until Elevator trouble is corrected. 2. Fireman's Recall Switch located at Main Terminal which,when activated, will return Cars, including those traveling away from Terminal,to Main Terminal without stopping for Car or Hall Buttons. After Cars return to Main Terminal, which shall not override Fireman's Recall Switch, Cars shall park with open Doors until returned to normal service: Provide Cars with Illuminated Visual&Audible System Signal which, when System is activated, will alert Passengers that Car is returning non-stop to Main Terminal. Equip Recall Switch to override any Heat or Smoke Sensing Device. Unless otherwise directed, deliver Recall Switch Key to Contractor for forwarding to Fire Department. U. FABRICATION 1. Fabricate exposed Metal Sheets of one-piece, fill-height lengths without Transverse Joints. 2. Do not overlap Metal Sheets at Joints. 3. Do not permit Open Crevices at Joints. 4. Bend, fold, and seam exposed Car Panel Sheets without buckling or distorting. 5. Exposed Welds: Grind smooth and finish to match adjacent Surface. 6. Concealed Welds: Grind smooth. V. FINISHING 1. Completely Factory-finish. 2. Finish Paint shall be free of runs,sags,overlaps, and skips. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXISTING CONDITIONS B. Verify Hoistway size, shape,soundness, completeness, and plumbness. C. Prior to starting Work,notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction. D. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. 3.3 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES MASTER 14200 holeless elevators.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/1 1/14 14200 p6 of 7 • A. Align Guide Rails vertically within 1/16 inch per 100 ft. B. Install Guide Rails sufficiently plumb to prevent Car lean or sway during Car ascent or descent. 3.4 INSPECTIONS& TESTS A. Preliminary Tests: Performed by Contractor's trained and qualified personnel B. Final Acceptance Inspection: Performed by Regulatory Agency Inspectors C. Testing Equipment: Supplied by Contractor. D. Testing Criteria: Separately test under different Load Conditions each of the following: E. Elevator operation F. Signal, Control,and Alarm Devices. G. Car Ventilation System H. Car Telephone and Public Address Systems 3.5 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust Moving Parts to operate satisfactorily at time of Project Substantial Completion and during Warranty Period. B. Adjust Equipment, including Controllers, Leveling Switches, Stopping Switches,Alarms, Lights, Ventilation,and Doors to operate within Regulatory Agency Requirements. C. Adjust Leveling so that Car stops within 1/4 inch above or below adjacent Floor. 3.6 PRODUCT CLEANING&REPAIRING A. Remove any Dirt,Filings, Grease,Oil,Water and other Foreign Substances from Hoistway,Machine Room, Cars, and Equipment. B. Including Work of other Trades, clean,repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, Products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. C. Remove Debris from Project Site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed. END OF SECTION MASTER 14200 holeless elevators.doc 7/19/2012 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 14200 p7 of 7 SECTION 16700 BASIC LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Requirements Included: Provide all materials, labor and equipment required to install complete low voltage electrical work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. International Building Code 2. NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Code 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 4. Any Applicable Local codes. B. Permits, Licenses,Fees,and Taxes: Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by law. C. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions. D. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the mechanical drawings and fire sprinkler, to determine location and number of connections required. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices to the point of connection indicated on the mechanical and sprinkler drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment's UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period. C. Include the manufacturer,type,style,catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details. MASTER(7/19/2012)16700 basic low voltage materials and methods.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 16700 p1 of 3 D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. F. Include field wiring diagrams and connection diagrams for all control and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans. G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to provide quality control. The action noted to be taken(or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications,nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies,and conflicts between the submittals and.the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. Project Record(As-Installed) Drawings: 1. Obtain and pay for reproducible drawings from Architect. 2. Keep Drawings clean,undamaged, and up to date. 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. All device locations with circuit numbers, addresses and strobe candela ratings. b. All panels,terminal cabinets,patch panels and power supplies. c. Complete system riser diagrams. d. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions,etc. Eradicate extraneous information. 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the form of reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Computer-aided design drafting(CADD)shall be used to complete project record drawings. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings,they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor's expense. MASTER(7/19/2012)16700 basic low voltage materials.and methods.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 16700 p2 of 3 J. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit five(5)sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions, including manufacturer's service data,wiring diagrams and parts lists, special testing procedures and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three-ring,vinyl or canvas covered, loose-leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab markers for each system or equipment type. Comply with provisions of Section 01700 where applicable to the low voltage electrical work. K. Instruction Manual: Submit separate Instruction Manual 30 days prior to scheduling the required Instruction Period. Include the following: 1. Description of each system and operational sequences. --- - 2. Seasonal system adjustments i.e. Daylight savings time corrections. 3. Special testing procedures. 4. Emergency measures upon system failure. 5. Cross reference information furnished by manufacturer in the Operating and Maintenance Manual above. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Handling: Avoid damage. C. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. 1.5 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings required in Section 01300, Submittals, or as previously specified in this Section. C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each system in a test run with the Owners representative present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and calibrate smoke detectors. D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a full walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of low voltage systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification method for all systems, adds/moves and changes,programming updates, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, security, safety, and similar features of the systems. END OF SECTION MASTER(7/19/2012)16700 basic low voltage materials and methods.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 16700 p3 of 3 SECTION 16720 16720 - 1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and CARBON MONOXIDE ALARMS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the fire alarm system and carbon monoxide alarms. B. The fire alarm system and carbon monoxide alarms shall be installed where required by local AHJ and shall be designed to meet the requirement of all applicable codes, the local AHJ, and this specification 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Underwriters Laboratories(UL),UL217,UL268, UL268A, and UL464. B. Codes: IBC, IFC,NFPA 72 and applicable local codes. C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 16700, Article 1.2, paragraph D. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor,materials and appliances required to design, furnish and install a Fire Alarm System and Carbon Monoxide Alarms as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The Fire Alarm System contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS A. Fire alarm control panel shall be analog addressable type Silent Knight or approved. Locate as shown on the drawings. 1. Fire Alarm Panel shall include programmable buttons for disarming outputs in groups by type and wing of the building. i.e. Horn/strobes ILF • wing; Door holds ALF wing; Core elevator recall. 2. Provide a Contact ID Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter for communication to the monitoring company. B. Provide at least one fire alarm annunciator panel in the entry vestibule. Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel shall have all the functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel with exception to the disarming buttons. C. Provide a record drawing box adjacent to the Fire Alarm control Panel. Box shall be red in color and lockable with a key MASTER(7/9/14): 16720 fire alarm system and co alarms revl.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p 1 of 4 SECTION 16720 16720 -2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and CARBON MONOXIDE ALARMS D. Software: Provide a copy of the programming software on CD and any hardware keys and/or passwords required to access it. Provide a copy of the final revision of the program that is loaded into fire alarm control panel. Also provide any special cables for connection of a laptop computer to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2.2 INITIATING DEVICES A. Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type only. 1. Common Areas a. Smoke detectors shall be analog addressable. 2. Apartments a. Smoke detectors shall be Gentex 9123F 120VAC with 9 volt battery backup. b. Where CO detection is also required a combo Smoke/CO detector shall be used Gentex GN-503F 120VAC with 9 volt battery backup. c. They shall activate a call on the nurse call system unique to each apartment. 1. Annunciation on the nurse call system shall be accomplished with relay activation upon alarm from any smoke detector within the apartment. Consult with nurse call system provider to for clarification of this connection. 2. The battery shall back up the relay that activates the nurse call. d. They shall meet NFPA 72 sections for single/multiple-station alarms and household fire alarm systems,and any requirements from the local AHJ. B. Manual pull stations shall be provided at locations required by IBC and NFPA 72 or AHJ. C. Heat detectors are not required unless used in conjunction with elevator shutdown,where used as a substitute for smoke detectors in environments unsuitable for smoke detectors. D. Duct smoke detectors shall be connected to the fire alarm system and function as required by the local AHJ. They shall be connected in such a manner that resetting the fire alarm control panel will reset the duct smoke detector or means of resetting shall be provide adjacent to the fire alarm control panel. E. Fire sprinkler system valves and flow switches shall be monitored by the fire alarm system. Coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor for quantity and location of all such devices. MASTER(7/9/14): 16720 fire alarm system and co alarms revl.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 4 SECTION 16720 16720 - 3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and CARBON MONOXIDE ALARMS 1. Addressable monitor modules for switches located outside the building (i.e. PIV and Vault Tampers)shall stay in the within the building and not mounted in water tight enclosures at the switch/valve location. F. Range suppression system shall be monitored by the fire alarm system. G. Carbon Monoxide detectors in locations other than apartments shall be integrated into the building's fire alarm system utilizing local sounder bases with a distinctive alert sound (different from the fire alarm). Carbon Monoxide detectors shall be monitored by the building's fire alarm system. CO alarms will generate a supervisory signal on the fire alarm control panel. A system trouble signal-shall - - sound on the local fire alarm panel in the event of tampering with any local detector. Do not use combination Smoke/CO detectors in these locations. 2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Notification appliances to be Cooper Wheelock or approved. B. Horns and strobe devices shall be white in color unless required by the local AHJ to be red. C. All notification appliances shall be synchronized in there operation. D. All annunciation from notification appliances or sounder bases on smoke detectors shall be silenceable at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and Annunciator. E. Provide all apartments with notification design such that 20%of apartments can be converted to an ADA compliant room simply by removing cover plates and connecting the additional required visual notification appliances. 1. Provide electrical boxes and pre-wiring for all additional ADA notification appliances. Finish with a cover plate colored to match other electrical switches and plates. 2. Ensure that Notification Appliance Circuits have sufficient power to allow for the additional devices that may be installed after building is occupied. 2.4 INTERFACE EQUIPMENT A. Magnetic Door Holders will be provided by the door hardware supplier. Provide wiring and power supplies all door holders shown on plans and listed in the door hardware schedule. B. Fire Smoke Dampers: Provide power supplies and wiring to all 24VAC fire/smoke dampers shown mechanical drawings. C. Elevator Control: Provide elevator recall and shut down as required by NFPA 72 and the local AHJ. MASTER(7/9/14): 16720 fire alarm system and co alarms revl.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p3 of 4 SECTION 16720 16720 -4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and CARBON MONOXIDE ALARMS PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 PANEL ROOMS A. Terminations: All terminations and connections in panel room shall be made on terminal blocks in a cabinet other than Fire Alarm Control Panel and other associated Fire Alarm Power Supplies. Terminal cabinets shall be red in color and not used for any other building system. B. Cabling: All surface cabling and panel interconnects in panel rooms shall be concealed in an approved raceway. 3.2 LABELING A. All panels shall have permanently fixed label with a descriptor and number that corresponds to the drawings of record. Panels shall also have a printed label with - the electrical panel and breaker number that serves it. B. All cables terminated in panels or on terminal block shall be clearly labeled with the circuit descriptors and numbers that correspond to the drawings of record. Cable labels shall be created by a cable labeling printer not hand written. C. Provide a placard placed next to or on the Fire Alarm Control Panel and any Annunciators with the procedures for silencing the system in event of Alarm. D. All addressable devices shall have a printed label with the circuit and device numbers visible from the floor.Addressable relays and input modules shall also have a printed label with the description of what is connected to them. E. Notification devices shall have printed label showing the panel and circuit number they are attached to. Also the End of Line devices shall be labeled EOL on the same printed label. 3.3 FIELD DEVICES A. All field devices initiating or notification other than in unfinished mechanical rooms shall be mounted on recessed electrical boxes. 3.4 AIR HANDLERS A. Fire/smoke dampers shall be shut down upon activation of general alarm smoke detectors on the fire alarm system. B. Air Handlers: Shut down all air handlers supplying ducts that have fire/smoke dampers that are closed by the fire alarm system. Also the activation of a duct smoke detector shall shut down the associated air handler. C. Coordinate with Mechanical drawings and specs for any dampers or fans associated with elevator recall. END OF SECTION MASTER(7/9/14): 16720 fire alarm.system and co alarms revl.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14. p4 of 4 SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the fire alarm system. B. The fire alarm system shall be installed where required by local AHJ and shall be designed to meet the requirement of all applicable codes,the local AHJ , and this specification 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Underwriters Laboratories(UL), UL217, UL268, UL268A, and UL464. B. Codes: IBC, IFC,NFPA 72 and applicable local codes. C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 16700, Article 1.2, paragraph D. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor, materials and appliances required to design, furnish and install a Fire Alarm System as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The Fire Alarm System contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS A. Fire alarm control panel shall be analog addressable type Silent Knight or approved. Locate as shown on the drawings. 1. Fire Alarm Panel shall include programmable buttons for disarming outputs in groups by type and wing of the building. i.e. Horn/strobes ILF wing; Door holds ALF wing; Core elevator recall. , 2. Provide a Contact ID Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter for communication to the monitoring company. B. Provide at least one fire alarm annunciator panel in the entry vestibule. Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel shall have all the functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel with exception to the disarming buttons. C. Provide a record drawing box adjacent to the Fire Alarm control Panel. Box shall be red in color and lockable with a key MASTER(6/3/13): 16720 fire alarm system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 pl of 4 D. Software: Provide a copy of the programming software on CD and any hardware keys and/or passwords required to access it. Provide a copy of the final revision of the program that is loaded into fire alarm control panel. Also provide any special cables for connection of a laptop computer to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2.2 INITIATING DEVICES A. Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type only. 1. Common Areas a. Smoke detectors shall be analog addressable. 2. Apartments a. Smoke detectors shall be 120VAC with 9 volt battery back up. b: They shall activate-a call on the nurse call system unique to each -- apartment. 1. Annunciation on the nurse call system shall be accomplished with relay activation upon alarm from any smoke detector within the apartment. Consult with nurse call system provider to for clarification of this connection. 2. The battery shall back up the relay that activates the nurse call. c. They shall meet NFPA 72 sections for single/ multiple-station alarms and household fire alarm systems, and any requirements from the local AHJ. B. Manual pull stations shall be provided at exit doors as required by NFPA 101 and at other locations required by current edition of IBC and NFPA 72 or AHJ. C. Heat detectors are not required unless used in conjunction with elevator shutdown, where used as a substitute for smoke detectors in environments unsuitable for smoke detectors. D. Duct smoke detectors shall be connected to the fire alarm system and function as required by the local AHJ. They shall be connected in such a manner that resetting the fire alarm control panel will reset the duct smoke detector or means of resetting shall be provide adjacent to the fire alarm control panel. E. Fire sprinkler system valves and flow switches shall be monitored by the fire alarm system. Coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor for quantity and location of all such devices. 1. Addressable monitor modules for switches located outside the building (i.e. PIV and Vault Tampers) shall stay in the within the building and not mounted in water tight enclosures at the switch/valve location. F. Range suppression system shall be monitored by the fire alarm system. MASTER(6/3/13): 16720 fire alarm system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 4 G. Carbon Monoxide detectors shall be connected to the fire alarm system and activate a supervisory alarm that indicates the exact location of the detector. 2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Notification appliances to be Cooper Wheelock or approved. B. Horns and strobe devices shall be white in color unless required by the local AHJ to be red. C. All notification appliances shall be synchronized in there operation. D. All annunciation from notification appliances or sounder bases on smoke detectors shall be silenceable at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and Annunciator. E. Provide all apartments with notification design such that 20% of apartments can be converted to an ADA compliant room simply by removing cover plates and connecting the additional required visual notification appliances. 1. Provide electrical boxes and pre-wiring for all additional ADA notification appliances. Finish with a cover plate colored to match other electrical switches and plates. 2. Ensure that Notification Appliance Circuits have sufficient power to allow for the additional devices that may be installed after building is occupied. 2.4 INTERFACE EQUIPMENT A. Magnetic Door Holders will be provided by the door hardware supplier. Provide wiring and power supplies all door holders shown on plans and listed in the door hardware schedule. B. Fire Smoke Dampers: Provide power supplies and wiring to all 24VAC fire/smoke dampers shown mechanical drawings. C. Elevator Control: Provide elevator recall and shut down as required by NFPA 72 and the local AHJ. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 PANEL ROOMS A. Terminations: All terminations and connections in panel room shall be made on terminal blocks in a cabinet other than Fire Alarm Control Panel and other associated Fire Alarm Power Supplies. Terminal cabinets shall be red in color and not used for any other building system. B. Cabling: All surface cabling and panel interconnects in panel rooms shall be concealed in an approved raceway. MASTER(6/3/13): 16720 fire alarm system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p3 of 4 3.2 LABELING A. All panels shall have permanently fixed label with a descriptor and number that corresponds to the drawings of record. Panels shall also have a printed label with the electrical panel and breaker number that serves it. B. All cables terminated in panels or on terminal block shall be clearly labeled with the circuit descriptors and numbers that correspond to the drawings of record. Cable labels shall be created by a cable labeling printer not hand written. C. Provide a placard placed next to or on the Fire Alarm Control Panel and any Annunciators with the procedures for silencing the system in event of Alarm. D. All addressable devices shall have a printed label with the circuit and device numbers visible from the floor.Addressable relays and input modules shall also — have a printed label with the description of what is connected to them: - E. Notification devices shall have printed label showing the panel and circuit number they are attached to. Also the End of Line devices shall be labeled EOL on the same printed label. 3.3 FIELD DEVICES A. All field devices initiating or notification other than in unfinished mechanical rooms shall be mounted on recessed electrical boxes. 3.4 AIR HANDLERS A. Fire/smoke dampers shall be shut down upon activation of general alarm smoke detectors on the fire alarm system. B. Air Handlers: Shut down all air handlers supplying ducts that have fire/smoke dampers that are closed by the fire alarm system. Also the activation of a duct smoke detector shall shut down the associated air handler. C. Coordinate with Mechanical drawings and specs for any dampers or fans associated with elevator recall. END OF SECTION MASTER(6/3/13): 16720 fire alarm system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p4 of 4 SECTION 16740 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION' A. Provide Telecommunication/Data Cabling as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following codes, standards, and references shall be adhered to throughout the project_.Where any specified element is in conflict with a reference listed betow,- the more stringent requirement shall apply 1. TIA/EIA 568A, 568B, 569, 607, and TSB 75 and TSB 67. 2. IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.5 3. NFPA 70-1996 National Electric Code with revisions and additions as dictated by the local municipality having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor,materials and appliances required to furnish and install the Telecommunications/Data cabling as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and-ready for use. The Telecommunications/Data cabling contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE A. Horizontal Voice/Data Cable 1. Horizontal voice and data cables shall be Category 5 and shall be a UL Listed cable that meets or exceeds all published TIA/EIA standards for the required cable performance. 2. Voice and data cables shall be distinguishable by using different color sheaths for each purpose. The same manufacturer shall be utilized for both data and voice horizontal cables. a. Resident apartment voice cables shall be blue. MASTER: 16740 telecom cabling.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p1 of 4 b. Office voice cables shall be white. c. Office data cable shall be yellow. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Coleman Cable, Belden, CommScope or approved. B. Voice Cross Connect Wire 1. Telephone distribution frame cross-connect wire shall be provided for the MDF and IDF Rooms in quantities sufficient to allow initial cross connect plus 50%additional for future administration of cross-connected systems. Wire shall be 1 pair solid 22 AWG copper conductors insulated with color-coded PVC. 2. Cross connect wire shall be colored white-blue/blue-white for voice. = - 2.2 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT -- - - A. Voice Termination Hardware 1. 66-style voice termination hardware shall be provided and installed in quantities adequate to terminate telephone riser and horizontal cabling at the MDF and each IDF.Termination hardware shall be configured and mounted upon pre-manufactured assemblies. 2. Type of termination hardware selected shall be used exclusively throughout the project. 3. Wall mounted termination hardware shall be provided and installed with it's associated wire management hardware. B. Rack/Cabinet Mounted Data Termination Hardware 1. Patch panels shall be Category 5e rated 24 port with 8 position/8 conductor(RJ45)modular connectors and insulation displacement type connectors designed to fit within standard 19" open equipment racks. Each modular connector shall be factory wired TIA/EIA-568-B. 2. Modular Patch Panels shall exhibit attenuation loss of no more than .4 dB measured at 100.0 MHz. Attenuation at other frequencies shall conform to TIA/EIA-568-B. 3. Modular Patch Panels shall exhibit Near End Cross Talk Loss of no more than-40 dB measured at 100 MHz. Attenuation at other frequencies shall conform to TIA/EIA-568-B. 4. Acceptable Manufactures: Leviton, Siemon or approved. C. Modular Jacks-Office MASTER: 16740 telecom cabling.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 4 1. 8 positions/8 conductor outlet connectors shall be modular for use in both flush wall mounted faceplates, surface mounted,boxes as well as modular furniture faceplates/adapters. A single manufacturer and part number shall be used throughout the project. a. Faceplates shall have minimum 4 ports with voice placed on top and data on the bottom. 2. Modular connectors for data shall be rated Category 5,modular connectors for voice shall be Category 5,all shall utilize IDC termination. 3. Modular connectors shall be separately color coded to identify voice and - -- data. Voice connectors shall be match the plate color, data connectors shall be blue. 4. Acceptable Manufactures: Leviton model 5G108 and 41080 or approved. — -a. - Color to match otherehctrical plates and switches. -_ D. Apartment Voice Jacks 1. Standard 4 wire phone jacks non-modular plates. 2. Leviton model 40249 and 40914 or approved. a. Color to match other electrical plates and switches. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A.. Backboards 1. Backboards shall consist of 3/4" interior grade BC or better plywood, 4'x 8'or sized as per the drawings. Backboards shall be mounted vertically and securely anchored to the wall with fasteners appropriate for the wall construction. Backboards shall be painted with fire retarding material. B. Equipment Racks 1. Equipment racks shall be wall mounted swinging construction. The cabinet shall be steel with painted, corrosion resistant finish. Nominal dimensions shall be 19" wide by 48" tall by 18"deep. Equipment racks shall confirm to EIA Standard RS-310-C. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PANEL ROOMS A. Cabling: All surface cabling and panel interconnects shall be made in a neat and workman like manner. Cabling and cross connects shall be dressed into cable management hardware. MASTER: 16740 telecom cabling.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p3 of 4 3.2 LABELING A. All cables shall be labeled at both ends. Cable labels shall be self-laminating and permanent. Labels shall be machine lettered(not handwritten) and individual number strips are unacceptable. All cable labeling shall include numeric designation, origin, destination,and cable type. Exception: resident apartment cables need only be labeled at the Telecom room end. END OF SECTION MASTER: 16740 telecom cabling.doc 6/3/13 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p4 of 4 SECTION 16750 CATV CABLING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide CATV Cabling as specified herein and shown on the drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following codes, standards, and references shall be adhered to throughout the project. Where any specified element is in conflict with a reference listed below, the more-stringent requirement shall apply 1. TIA/EIA 568A, 569, 607, and TSB 75 and TSB 67. 2. IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.5 3. NFPA 70-1996 National Electric Code with revisions and additions as dictated by the local municipality having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor,materials and appliances required to furnish and install the CATV cabling as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The CATV cabling contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. Flexible Drop Cable: 1. Drop cable shall be RG6 bonded foil plus 60%aluminum braid construction,with PVC jacket. Cable used in underground applications shall have a self-sealing flooding compound between the PVC jacket and the aluminum tape. 18-gauge copper clad steel center conductor. Gas expanded polyethylene dielectric. Inner shield-aluminum polypropylene aluminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to dielectric. Outer shield of 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire. It has a black PVC jacket or polyethylene(for underground application use the flooded type); Maximum attenuation at 68 degrees F.; at 5 MHz, .58 dB/100ft; at 54 MHz, 1.60 dB/100 ft; at 750 MHz, 5.65 dB/100ft; at 865 MHz, 6.10 dB/100ft. MASTER(6/3/2013)16750 cats cabling.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 16750 p1 of 3 2. Drop cable length shall not exceed 175',measured from the distribution location to the outlet. B. "F" Fitting/Connector: 1. "F"type fittings shall be environmentally sealed,have 360-degree compression, and radiation proof to meet FCC Title 47, code of regulations,part 76, CATV rules and Regulations. 2. The cable center conductor shall not protrude further than manufacturers recommended specifications, approximately 1/16"past the threaded end of the"F"fitting. The cable dielectric shall not protrude past the base of the beveled portion on the interior(the threaded portion)of the"F" fitting. Special care shall be taken to avoid any braid from touching the center conductor of the cable when preparing the connection. Also, all connectors/fittings must be matched to the cable being used by manufacturer color code. A cable preparation tool must be used to prepare the cable for the fitting/connector. 3. "F" fittings/connectors shall be Snap-N-Seal type sized appropriately with the cable manufacturer and cable type. C. Television Outlet Wall plate: 1. Leviton model 80781 or approved. a. Color to match other electrical plates and switches. 2. Wall plates shall be flush mount having a barrel splice"F" female both ends 3/8"-32 threads per inch mounted in the center. 3. A washer and nut, matched specifically to the barrel, shall secure the barrel splice to the nylon wall plate. When attaching cable to barrel, special care shall be taken to avoid over tightening fitting(not more than 20-ft lbs.) D. Splitters 1. System splitters, directional couplers, etc. shall have a band-width of from 5 to 1000 MHz minimum. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. No splices shall occur in any flexible coaxial RG6 drop cables. Drop cables shall be continuous from the distribution location to the outlet, no exceptions. Special care shall be taken not to kink,flatten,twist or damage drop cables during installation. All interior pull-boxes shall be accessible and locations shall be recorded on"as-built"drawings. MASTER(6/3/2013)16750 catv cabling.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 16750 p2 of 3 1. Exception: In apartments run one home run from distribution to the living room jack location. Split the signal at that point to all other jacks in the apartment. Use a sputter with the exact number of connections needed. B. RG6 drops shall have a coil long enough to place anywhere in the area designated for CATV, in the MDF and all IDF closets/cabinets, and shall be labeled as required. C. Installation of all coaxial cable types must not exceed minimum bending radius published by the manufacturer. This includes drop cable. If the concentricity of coaxial cable is changed,an impedance mismatch might occur which could cause --picture distortion and/or channel degradation. 3.2 SYSTEM TESTING A. All coaxial distribution cables shall be tested in accordance with FCC requirements and common SCTE standards. 1. Coaxial cables shall be tested with a TDR(time domain reflectometer)to insure that no damage has been caused by the installation. Cables noting damage shall be replaced with new cables. 2. Coaxial cables shall be tested with a TDR for distance confirmation and documentation. 3.3 LABELING A. All cables shall be labeled at both ends. Cable labels shall be self-laminating and permanent. Labels shall be machine lettered(not handwritten)and individual number strips are unacceptable. All cable labeling shall include numeric designation,origin, destination, and cable type. Exception: resident apartment cables need only be labeled at the Telecom room end. END OF SECTION MASTER(6/3/2013)16750 cats cabling.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 16750 p3 of 3 SECTION 16760 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM PART 1 —GENERAL L1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the emergency call system. B. The emergency call system shall be installed in accordance with the design drawings, all applicable codes, the local AHJ, and this specification 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Underwriters Laboratories(UL). B. Codes: State specific licensing requirements and applicable local codes. C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 16700,Article 1.2, paragraph D. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor,materials and appliances required to furnish and install the emergency call system equipment as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The emergency call system contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM A. System shall be Best 9600 system. 1. All Best Manufactured parts will be provided by the Owner as detailed on the drawings, 2. All other parts and pieces to be provided by the emergency call system contractor. B. Door position switches shall be manufactured by GE Security or approved. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall provide all parts not listed as owner provided on the drawings or in this spec to complete the installation including but not limited to the following: building cable; back boxes;terminal cabinets. MASTER(6/3/2013)16760 emergency call system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 pl of 2 3.2 PANEL ROOMS A. Terminations: All terminations and connections in panel room shall be made on terminal blocks in a cabinet other than Emergency Call System Power Supply. Terminal cabinets shall not used for any other building system. B. Cabling: All surface cabling and panel interconnects in panel rooms shall be concealed in an approved raceway. 3.3 LABELING A. All panels shall have permanently fixed label with a descriptor and number that corresponds to the drawings of record. Panels shall also have a printed label with the electrical panel and breaker number that serves it. B. — -- All cables terminated in panels or on terminal block shall be clearly labeled with - ---the circuit descriptors and numbers that correspond to the drawings of record. Cable labels shall be created by a cable labeling printer not hand written. 3.3 FIELD DEVICES A. All field devices shall be mounted on recessed electrical boxes. 3.4 SYSTEM TESTING A. All devices shall be pre-tested by the emergency call system contractor before system can be programmed by the owner. B. Final testing and certification of the system will be done with the emergency call system contractor and the owner's representative. END OF SECTION MASTER(6/3/2013)16760 emergency call system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 2 SECTION 16770 P.A. SYSTEM PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the P.A. System. B. The p.a. system shall be installed where shown on drawings and shall be designed to meet the requirement of all applicable codes,the local AHJ, and this specification 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Underwriters Laboratories(UL). B. -. Codes: NEC and applicable local codes. C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 16700, Article 1.2, paragraph D. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor, materials and appliances required to furnish and install the P.A. system equipment as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The P.A. system contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 P.A. SYSTEM HARDWARE A. P.A.Amplifier shall be manufactured by Speco Technologies or approved and be a P-60FACD 60 watt amplifier with FM/AM tuner and CD player or approved. B. Speakers shall'be manufactured by Atlas Sound or approved and be SM42T-W or approved. C. Volume Controls shall be manufactured by Atlas Sound or approved and be AT series and Decora plate mounted or approved. D. Microphone jack shall be XLR type. E. Microphone shall be wireless type microphone system manufactured by Speco Technologies Or approved and consist of MWR-100UHF and MWHH-UHF. MASTER(6/3/13)16770 p.a.system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 pl of 2 PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM WIRING A, All cable is to be installed in a continuous run from the P.A. Amplifier end to the equipment end(i.e.; speakers, microphone jacks,volume controls, etc.),with no splicing of conductors allowed within the run. Ground shields/braids are to be connected to the equipment ground at the P.A. Amplifier end only. 3.2 PANEL ROOMS A. Terminations: All terminations and connections in panel room shall be made on terminal blocks in a cabinet adjacent to the P.A. amplifier. 3.3 LABELING A. All cables terminated in panels or on terminal block shall be clearly labeled with the circuit descriptors and numbers that correspond to the drawings of record. Cable labels shall be created by a cable labeling printer not hand written, END OF SECTION • MASTER(6/3/13)16770 pal.system.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p1 of 2 SECTION 16780 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the access control system. B. The access control system shall be installed where shown on drawings and shall be designed to meet the requirement of all applicable codes, the local AHJ, and this specification 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Underwriters Laboratories (UL). B. Codes: IBC, IFC,NFPA-72 and applicable local codes. C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 16700,Article 1.2, paragraph D. 1.3 S s RY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor, materials and appliances required to furnish and install the access control equipment as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The access control contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE A. Access Control Panels shall be manufactured by Keri Systems Inc., and be a PXL-500W Tiger controller II for wiegand readers. The main panel in the system (Panel Address 0)shall have a LAN-520 included for connection to the Local Area Network. B. Card Readers/Keypads shall be manufactured by HID and be either a ThinLine II 5395 or ProxPro with Keypad 5355 as shown on the drawings. i C. Credentials shall be manufactured hy HID and be 1346 ProxKey II. Provide 200 sequentially number ProxKeys. D. Electromagnetic Locks where shown shall be manufactured by Securitron or an approved. E. Door Position Switch: Door Position Switches shall be manufactured by GE Security/Sentrol or approved. MASTER(6/3/13): 16780,accesscontrol.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 pl of 2 F. Uninterruptible Power Supply System: Uninterruptible Power Systems shall be manufactured by Securitron,Altronix or approved. G. Request to Exit: Request to exit devices shall be Securitron XMS (Exit Motion Sensor) H. Locking devices: All locking devices provided by others. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM WIRING A. All cable is to be installed in a continuous run from the Access control panel end to the equipment end(i.e.; instrument,magnet, electric strike, card reader,key switch, alarm switch, etc.),with no splicing of conductors allowed within the run. Ground shields/braids are to be connected to the equipment ground at the Terminal Processor end only. Control Panel RS-485 Network shall be daisy chained to each Access Control Panel. 3.2 PANEL ROOMS A. Terminations: All terminations and connections in panel room shall be made on terminal blocks in a cabinet other than Access Control Panel and other associated Access Power Supplies. B. Cabling: All surface cabling and panel interconnects in panel rooms shall be concealed in an approved raceway. 3.3 LABELING A. All panels shall have permanently fixed label with a descriptor and number that corresponds to the drawings of record. Power Supplies shall also have a printed label with the electrical panel and breaker number that serves it. B. All cables terminated in panels or on terminal block shall be clearly labeled with the circuit descriptors and numbers that correspond to the drawings of record. Cable labels shall be created by a cable labeling printer not hand written. 3.4 NURSE CALL CONNECTION A. A connection to the nurse call system shall be provided for each door included in this scope of work. The interface shall'be a unique relay contact closure upon door forced open alarm for the specific door. Coordinate with the nurse call drawings and contractor for the location of this connection. END OF SECTION MASTER(6/3/13): 16780 access control.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 2 SECTION 16790 THEATER A/V EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the A/V equipment in the theater rooms. B. The A/V equipment shall be installed in each Theater room shown on drawings and shall be designed to meet the requirement of all applicable codes, the local AHJ, and this specification - 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Underwriters Laboratories (UL). B. Codes: NEC and applicable local codes.- C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 16700,Article 1.2, paragraph D. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work includes all labor, materials and appliances required to install the AN equipment as shown and noted on the drawings, as specified, and except as otherwise specified herein, shall be completed and ready for use. The AN contractor shall install all conduit and wiring under this section of the contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A/V EQUIPMENT A. All theater components listed below will be provided by owner. 1. A/V Amplifier 2. Speakers 3. Projector and associated mounts 4. Blu-ray player 5. Projection Screen MASTER(6/3/2013)16790 theater equipment.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p1 of 2 PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM WIRING A. All cable is to be installed in a continuous run from the endpoint to endpoint(i.e.; speakers,AN amplifier, video projector, etc.), with no splicing of conductors allowed within the runs. Ground shields/braids are to be connected to the equipment ground at the A/V Amplifier end only. 1. Provide all connection types between AN amplifier and video projector (i.e.; HDMI,composite video, S-video, component video,etc.) 2. Extend the video projector's VGA monitor connection to location shown on the drawings. 3.2 LABELING A. All cables terminated in panels or on terminal block shall be clearly labeled with the circuit descriptors and numbers that correspond to the drawings of record. Cable labels shall be created by a cable labeling printer not hand written. END OF SECTION MASTER(6/3/2013)16790 theater equipment.doc 1403 TIGARD 7/11/14 p2 of 2